JP7156450B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, effects such as a variable display of a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols are executed to give the player a sense of anticipation, effects to increase the player's desire to participate in the game, etc. Various patterns of effects are executed to improve the interest of the game.

In such a pachinko machine, for example, a pattern row is scrolled and displayed for a predetermined period, and then stopped, so that the player expects that a specific symbol in the pattern row will be stopped and displayed. is proposed to be performed.

JP 2010-075741 A

This type of pachinko machine has a problem that the player has a monotonous impression of the game, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises judging means for executing judgment based on the establishment of judging conditions, and display means for displaying identification information for indicating the judgment result by the judging means. dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and static display of the identification information for indicating that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result. the identification information is composed of a plurality of symbol rows and is displayed as a combination of specific symbols . , the determination result by the determining means is configured to indicate that the determination result is the specific determination result; The dynamic display means can display the symbol rows other than one of the plurality of symbol rows in a ready-to-win display mode that can be combined to indicate the specific determination result, and the gaming machine includes: When the symbols that are combinations other than the specific combination of symbols are statically displayed in the one symbol row, the secondary symbols that are statically displayed can be displayed by changing the display mode of the secondary symbols. A symbol variable means and an operation means operable by a player are provided, and the variable sub-symbol is displayed in such a manner that the symbols stopped and displayed in the first symbol row cannot be visually recognized. , based on the operation of the operating means, it is possible to hide the variable sub-symbols and display the symbols that are a combination of the specific symbols in the one symbol row. When the determination result is the specific determination result, the display mode of the secondary symbol is more likely to be varied than when the determination result is other than the specific determination result. are

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, the display means for displaying the identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the identification information. When dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on the display means and the identification information for indicating that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result are stopped and displayed, the player and a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the The determination result is configured to indicate that the determination result is the specific determination result, the symbol row is configured to be able to display sub-symbols different from the symbols, and the dynamic display means comprises , the plurality of symbol rows other than one symbol row can be displayed in a ready-to-win display mode that can be combined to indicate the specific determination result, and the gaming machine is capable of displaying the one symbol row sub-symbol variable means capable of changing and displaying the display mode of the sub-symbols that are stop-displayed when the symbols that are a combination other than the specific combination of symbols are statically displayed ; an operation means operable by a player, wherein the variable sub-symbols are displayed in such a manner as to make the symbols stopped and displayed in the one symbol row invisible; Based on the operation, the variable sub-symbols are hidden, and the symbols that are a combination of the specific symbols are displayed in the one symbol row, When the determination result is the specific determination result, the display mode of the sub symbol is more easily changed than when the determination result is other than the specific determination result .

As a result, it is possible to provide a fresh effect using the sub-symbols. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front view of a unit storage member. It is a front view of a unit storage member. FIG. 10 is a front perspective view of the protruding action unit in a state in which the base-side displacement member and the relative displacement member are arranged at the retracted position; (a) is an exploded front perspective view of a projecting motion unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of a connecting rod. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the transmission means in front view typically. It is a front schematic diagram which illustrated the transmission means in front view typically. FIG. 10 is an exploded rear perspective view of a proximal displacement member and a relative displacement member; FIG. 10 is a rear perspective view of a proximal displacement member and a relative displacement member; FIG. 4 is a front view of a projecting motion unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of a projecting motion unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of a projecting motion unit; It is a front perspective view of a projecting motion unit. (a) is a side view of the projecting motion unit viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIa in FIG. 16, and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the projecting motion unit in part XVIIb of FIG. 17(a). Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of the compound action unit; Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of the compound action unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the compound action unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the compound action unit; FIG. (a) is a front view of the driven member and the driven member, and (b) is a side view of the driven member and the driven member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIIb in FIG. 22(a). (a) is a front view of a driven member, and (b) is a rear portion of the driven member. FIG. 24 is a side view of the driven member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIV in FIG. 23(a); (a) is a front view of a driven member, and (b) is a rear portion of the driven member. FIG. 26 is a side view of the driven member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVI in FIG. 25(a); (a) is a schematic front view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic front view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic front view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic front view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic front view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic front view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of the driven member and the driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. It is a diagram. It is a front perspective view of a rotary operation unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary motion unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotary motion unit; 4 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the rotary motion unit; FIG. (a) is a rear view of the main body, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the main body showing an enlarged portion XXXVII of FIG. 37(a). It is a front view of a rotation operation unit. 38(a) is a cross-sectional view of the rotary motion unit taken along the line XXXIXa-XXXIXa of FIG. 38(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotary motion unit 600 taken along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 38(b). . (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) to (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display mode of the normal holding effect. (a) to (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display mode of the 8 effect. (a) to (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing display modes in variation patterns of combined display modes. (a) to (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing display modes in variation patterns of combined display modes. It is the timing chart which showed the period setting after the power supply of the pachinko machine was turned on. (a) to (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing a display mode during a time rendering period. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display mode during a time presentation period, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display mode during an extended time presentation period. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display mode at the end of the time presentation period. It is a schematic diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of various counters. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of a ROM in a main controller, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of a RAM in a main controller. be. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special winning random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special winning type selection table, (c) is a normal random number table It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the. (a) is a schematic diagram showing part of the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing part of the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device. It is a diagram. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing that is executed by the MPU in the main controller. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by an MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; Fig. 4 is a flow chart showing a time setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing an advance notice selection process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing winning command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing variation pattern selection processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing button effect selection processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device; It is the flowchart which showed the synchronous production|presentation management process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the extension production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing pending number display update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect|presentation process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the button production|presentation execution process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus. 4 is a flowchart showing background image setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device be. 4 is a flowchart showing advance notice command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing hold command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing effect command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; be. 4 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; 4 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; (a) is a flow chart showing a transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device; be. 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device; 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in a display control device; (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram comparing the pixel sizes of the main liquid crystal and the sub liquid crystal. (a) to (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a pachinko machine according to a third embodiment. (a) to (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a pachinko machine according to a third embodiment. (a) to (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a pachinko machine according to a third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment, and (b) is a display size comparison between the main liquid crystal and the sub liquid crystal of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. It is a diagram showing. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variation pattern command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. (a) to (b) are diagrams showing the internal structure of a sorting unit according to a fourth embodiment. It is a time chart for explaining the effect control regarding the reserved symbol effect in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen in a fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen in the fourth embodiment. be. (a) to (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing a display mode of a normal holding effect in the fourth embodiment. (a) to (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display mode of the 8-piece effect in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display mode of the 8-point effect in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the display mode of the additional winning effect in the fourth embodiment. It is a diagram. (a) to (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display mode of the special continuation effect in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a time chart for explaining the flow regarding composite display effect in the fourth embodiment; FIG. (a) to (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing a display mode of a combined display effect in the fourth embodiment. (a) to (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing a display mode of a combined display effect in the fourth embodiment. (a) to (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing a display mode of a combined display effect in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display mode of a combined display effect in the fourth embodiment; It is a time chart for demonstrating the flow regarding the time production|presentation in 4th Embodiment. (a) to (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing display modes of time effects in the fourth embodiment. (a) to (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing display modes of time effects in the fourth embodiment. (a) to (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing display modes of time effects in the fourth embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main controller in the fourth embodiment It is a diagram. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a ROM within a sound ramp control device according to a fourth embodiment; (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a RAM within the sound ramp control device according to a fourth embodiment; It is a block diagram showing. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a production time selection table in the sound lamp control device in the fourth embodiment, (b) is a production selected by the production time selection table in the fourth embodiment FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a timetable of time; It is the flowchart which showed the special design variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing variation execution determination processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a fourth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special design 1 fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special design 2 fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process 2 executed by an MPU in a main control device in a fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing time setting processing 2 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing main processing 2 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing identification number input processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the 8 pending|holding production|presentation process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing button effect processing executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a second notice selection process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing winning command reception processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing variable display setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing variation pattern selection processing 2 executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing button effect selection processing 2 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the setting processing during eight production|presentation performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the synchronous production|presentation management process 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation time setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the extension production|presentation setting process 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing pending command processing 2 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing effect command processing 2 executed by an MPU in a display control device according to a fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the fifth embodiment. (a) to (b) are diagrams showing the internal structure of a sorting unit according to a fifth embodiment. It is a time chart explaining the flow regarding the special symbol variation effect performed using the main screen and the sub-screen in the fifth embodiment. (a) to (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display mode of the special symbol variation effect in the fifth embodiment. (a) to (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the display mode of the special symbol variation effect in the fifth embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device according to a fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing main processing 3 executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing preliminary pseudo fluctuation setting processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 2 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing drawing processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth embodiment; FIG.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and a general winning prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the rear surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). mounted on the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, and the time is longer than during normal. set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. It is composed of a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 . Further, when the later-described protruding motion unit 400 and compound motion unit 500 are operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 protrude into the opening of the center frame 86 and are visible through the opening. It is said that For example, when the protruding motion unit 400 is placed in the rotational position by the first motion (see FIG. 14(a)), the distal end portion of the relative displacement member 450 becomes visible through the opening of the center frame 86, When placed in the extended position by the second operation (see FIG. 15B), substantially the entire relative displacement member 450 is made visible through the opening of the center frame 86 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch large liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower three patterns. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is attached to the game board on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and allows some of the balls launched to the game board that flow down the right side of the game board to pass through. is configured to When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be attached is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 through which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the variable probability and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so in the variable display of the second symbol "○ ” is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 640 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second prize-winning port 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment shoots balls to the player according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to change the way of hitting to "left hitting" and "right hitting". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged on the upper right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged. For example, it may be on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 .

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first out hole 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420 , 530 , 630 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the unit storage member 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 and 6 are front views of the unit storage member 300. In FIG. 5, the operation units 400 to 800 are arranged at the retracted position, and in FIG. The state arranged in the out position is illustrated respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the unit storage member 300 has a rectangular bottom wall plate in a front view, and outer wall plates erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion toward the front side (the front side of the page in FIG. 5). side) is formed into an open box shape. A bottom plate of the unit storage member 300 has a rectangular opening 301 in a central portion thereof, thereby forming the unit storage member 300 into a rectangular frame shape in a front view. The opening 301 is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, in which the third pattern display device 81 can be arranged).

The unit storage member 300 accommodates the projection operation unit 400, the compound operation unit 500, the rotation operation unit 600, the retractable operation unit 700, and the projecting operation unit 800 in its internal space. configured as

The protruding operation unit 400 includes a proximal displacement member 440 and a relative displacement member 450, and both displacement members 440, 450 are operated (displaced) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. Let At the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are overlapped in the front-rear direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 5), thereby reducing the space required for the retracted position. On the other hand, in the projecting position shown in FIG. 6, the relative displacement member 450 is slid with respect to the proximal displacement member 440, and the overall size is increased to ensure visibility and enhance the presentation effect. The operation of the projecting operation unit 400 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 7 to 17. FIG.

The compound action unit 500 includes a driven member 550 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) and a driven member 560, which are positioned between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. to operate (displace). In this case, the compound action unit 500 causes the driven member 550 to perform only rotational motion around a predetermined position, while the driven member 560 connected to the driven member 550 performs linear motion and linear motion. By performing a motion combined with a rotational motion, the trajectory of the driven member 560 is changed to enhance the presentation effect. The operation of this compound action unit 500 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 to 32. FIG.

The rotary operation unit 600 includes a first rotating body 650 and a second rotating body 660 that are concentrically arranged, and by rotating both the rotating bodies 650 and 660, it is easy for the player to associate the rotation of both. In this way, a rendering effect is exhibited in which the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) are each rotated. The operation of this rotary operation unit 600 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 to 39. FIG.

In addition, the retractable operation unit 700 includes a retractable member 710 that is slidably displaceable, and the projecting operation unit 800 includes a projecting member 810 that is rotatable. is slidably displaced or rotated between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and a protruding position (not shown) where the opening 301 (third pattern display device 81, see FIG. 2) protrudes in front (front). is operated (displaced) by

Next, the projection operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 17. FIG. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the protruding operation unit 400 with the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 arranged at the retracted position. 8(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the projecting operation unit 400, and FIG. 8(b) is a rear perspective view of the connecting rod 460. FIG.

7 and 8 illustrate a state in which a retractable movement unit 700 sharing the projecting movement unit 400 and the case body 410 is provided side by side with the projecting movement unit 400. FIG. A pair of projection operation units 400 are arranged on the left and right sides of the retraction operation unit 700 below the opening 301 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). Since the structures are substantially the same, only one (located on the right side when viewed from the front) will be described, and description of the other (located on the left side when viewed from the front) will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the protruding operation unit 400 includes a case body 410 forming a framework on the rear side, a drive motor 420 arranged on the front side of the case body 410, and the drive motor 420. A plurality of gears (a pinion gear 431, an intermediate gear 432, and a crank gear 433) for transmitting rotational driving force, a proximal displacement member 440 rotatably supported by the case body 410, and a sliding displacement of the proximal displacement member 440. and a connecting rod 460 that connects between the relative displacement member 450 and the crank gear 433 and that is rotatably supported by the case body 410. be.

The case body 410 is made of a resin material, and a storage recess 411 having an outer shape corresponding to a plurality of gears (each gear 431, 432, 433) is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the case body 410. A rod support shaft 412 and a base side support shaft 413 protrude below the storage recess 411 (right side in FIG. 8A), respectively. Each of the support shafts 412 and 413 is made of a brass material and arranged parallel to the rotation shafts of the gears 431-433.

In the present embodiment, when the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are arranged at the retracted positions, the displacement members 440 and 450, the connecting rod 460, and the gears 431, 432, and 433, as will be described later. are laminated in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 13), a storage recess 411 is provided in the front of the case body 410, and each gear 431, 432, 433 is stored in the storage recess 411. As a result, it is possible to reduce the size of the projection operation unit 400 in the front-rear direction.

A pinion gear 431 is attached to the drive shaft of the drive motor 420, and an intermediate gear 432 and a crank gear 433 are meshed with the pinion gear 431 and the intermediate gear 432, respectively. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 420 is rotationally driven and the pinion gear 431 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the crank gear 433 via the intermediate gear 432, and the crank gear 433 is rotated.

Note that the intermediate gear 432 and the crank gear 433 are pivotally supported by the case body 410 . Each of the gears 431 to 433 is formed as a spur gear having teeth engraved on the outer peripheral surface in parallel with the rotation axis. In this case, the crank gear 433 has a radial decoration formed on its front surface (axial end surface), and the diameter of the front portion (axial end surface) is larger than the addendum circle of the teeth engraved on the outer peripheral surface. It is made large and is formed so as to be able to shield the teeth from the player when viewed from the front.

A crank pin 433 a protrudes from the front face (axial end face) of the crank gear 433 at a position eccentric from the rotation axis of the crank gear 433 . The crank pin 433a is a portion connected to the connecting rod 460, is formed as a cylindrical body parallel to the rotation axis of the crank gear 433, and is slidably inserted into the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460. (See FIGS. 9 and 10). Accordingly, when the crank gear 433 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the connecting rod 460 via the crank pin 433a.

The base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are production members for performing production by being displaced from the retracted position to the extended position (see FIGS. 5 and 6). A hole 442) is rotatably supported by the base side support shaft 413 of the case body 410, and a relative displacement member 450 is disposed on the front side of the base side displacement member 440 so as to be slidable.

A decorative portion 454 is formed on the front side of the relative displacement member 450 . The decoration part 454 is a part for decorating the front side of the relative displacement member 450, and from the proximal side (rotation center side when the proximal displacement member 440 is rotated, the lower side in FIGS. 7 and 8) The whole is formed in a tapered shape in a front view, the width of which narrows toward the distal end side (rotational distal end side when the proximal end displacement member 440 is rotated, the upper side in FIGS. 7 and 8), and the front surface of the decorative portion 454 is formed. A first portion 454a, a second portion 454b and a third portion 454c are arranged along the longitudinal direction.

The first portion 454a, the second portion 454b, and the third portion 454c of the decoration portion 454 are formed in sizes corresponding to the tapered shape of the decoration portion 454 as a whole. That is, the second portion 454b located in the middle of the first portion 454a located in the distal end, and the third portion 454c located in the proximal side of the second portion 454b located in the middle, each have a large external shape. It is formed in a rectangular shape.

In this case, the first portion 454a, the second portion 454b, and the third portion 454c are arranged with different positions in the front-rear direction (positions in the direction perpendicular to the page of FIG. 5). Specifically, the second portion 454b located in the middle of the first portion 454a located in the distal side, and the third portion 454c located in the proximal side of the second portion 454b located in the middle, are positioned on the front side. It is arranged on the (front) side (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 5).

As a result, the decorative portion 454 of the relative displacement member 450 (that is, the front surface of the relative displacement member 450) is shifted from the base end side (the rotation center side of the base side displacement member 440, the lower side in FIGS. 7 and 8) to the tip side ( 7 and 8), the base end displacement member 440 is inclined downward in a stepped manner (three steps in this embodiment) in a direction closer to the case body 410. As shown in FIG.

Accordingly, as will be described later, when the proximal displacement member 440 is rotated (see FIGS. 13 and 14), contact with the decorative member 480 (see FIGS. 16 and 17) is prevented while the decorative member 480 is rotated. In addition, when the relative displacement member 450 is extended (see FIG. 15), the decoration part 454 is set to the front (front side). ), it is possible to improve the force.

The detailed configurations of the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 will be described later (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

The connecting rod 460 is a long plate-like member for transmitting the rotation of the crank gear 433 to the relative displacement member 450. The connecting rod 460 has a shaft support hole 461 drilled as a circular hole at one end in the longitudinal direction, and a shaft support hole 461. A connection hole 462 is bored as an elongated hole extending along the longitudinal direction on the other longitudinal end side opposite to the support hole 461, and between the shaft support hole 461 and the connection hole 462, a and a rod groove 463 recessed on the back side as a recess extending along.

The connecting rod 460 is attached to the case body 410 with the rod support shaft 412 of the case body 410 inserted through the shaft support hole 461 and the crank pin 433 a of the crank gear 433 inserted through the rod groove 463 . Also, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is inserted through the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 (see FIGS. 11 and 12). As a result, as will be described later, as the crank gear 433 rotates, the connecting rod 460 rotates around the rod support shaft 412 (see FIGS. 9 and 10), and as the connecting rod 460 rotates, The proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are rotated (first movement) and slid (second movement) (see FIG. 12), and moved (displaced) between the retracted position and the extended position.

In this case, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the driving motor 420, the proximal displacement member 440, and the relative displacement member 450 are arranged on the front (one surface) side of the case body 410. Therefore, for example, Compared to the case where the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are arranged on the front (one surface) side and the drive motor 420 is arranged on the back (other surface) side with the case body 410 interposed therebetween, the protruding operation is It is possible to reduce the size of the unit 400 in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, since the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed in the retracted position in such a posture that the drive motor 420 is positioned on the extension line in the longitudinal direction thereof (see FIG. 13(a)), these drive motors 420, the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be arranged linearly. Therefore, the space required for the retraction position on the front side of the case body 410 can be efficiently suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 to the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 is a plurality of gears (gears 431 to 433) and a crank gear 433 together with a crank gear. A portion where the connecting rod 460 (connecting hole 462 and rod groove 463) is connected to the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 and the connecting pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450, as will be described later. of the transmission means (the gears 431 to 433 and the connecting rod 460) and the support shafts 411 and 412 are arranged in the region between the rod support shaft 412 and the base side support shaft 413 of the case body 410. Set placement.

Thus, in a state where the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are arranged at the retracted position, the transmission means is arranged in a region overlapping the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 in a front view. can do. That is, the dead space formed on the rear side of the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 arranged at the retracted position can be effectively utilized as a space for arranging the transmission means. As a result, it is possible to synergistically achieve miniaturization of the outer shape of the projecting operation unit 400 in the front-rear direction and when viewed from the front, in addition to the effect of the positional relationship between the drive motor 420, the base-side displacement member 440, and the relative displacement member 450 described above. can.

9 and 10, the operation of the transmission means (pinion gear 431, intermediate gear 432, crank gear 433 and connecting rod 460) will be described. 9 and 10 are schematic front views schematically illustrating the transmission means in a front view, and the state in which the crank gear 433 is arranged at the first rotation position in FIG. 10 shows a state in which the crank gear 433 is arranged at the intermediate rotation position, and FIG. 10 shows a state in which the crank gear 433 is arranged at the second rotation position.

9 and 10, the shapes of the gears 431 to 433 and the connecting rod 460 are schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding. 9 and 10, the positions of the center line of the connecting rod 460 when the crank gear 433 is arranged at the first rotational position, the intermediate rotational position and the second rotational position are shown as positions P1, Pm and P2. It is illustrated schematically using a dash-dotted line.

13 to 15 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. 9(a) corresponds to the states shown in FIGS. 13(a) and 13(b), and FIG. 9(b) corresponds to the states shown in FIGS. 14(a) and 14(b), FIG. 10 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 15(a) and 15(b).

As shown in FIG. 9A, when the crank gear 433 is at the first rotation position and the connecting rod 460 is at the position P1, the proximal displacement member 440 is at the retracted position and the relative displacement member 450 is at the retracted position. They are arranged at the reference positions (see FIGS. 12(a) and 13). In this state, the crankpin 433a of the crank gear 433 is positioned at the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460 .

Therefore, when the crank gear 433 is arranged at the first rotation position, the crank gear 433 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. By bringing the crank pin 433 a into contact with the upper end of the rod groove 463 , the rotation in the direction of retracting from the extended position to the retracted position can be restricted. Therefore, when the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are arranged from the extended position to the retracted position, for example, even if a control failure of the drive motor 420 occurs due to an electrical factor, mechanical A mechanism (a stopper mechanism that restricts the crank pin 433a by the rod groove 463) displaces the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 beyond the retracted position, and these displacement members 440 and 450 and the connecting rod 460 move to the other position. can be avoided in advance.

9A from the state shown in FIG. 9A, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 moves the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460 to the lower end (rod 9(a) around the rod support shaft 412. As shown in FIG. When the crank gear 433 is further rotated and reaches the intermediate rotational position as shown in FIG. 9(b), the connecting rod 460 is positioned at the position Pm. In this state, the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are arranged at the rotation position and the reference position, respectively (see FIGS. 12(b) and 14).

9A from the state shown in FIG. 9B, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 moves the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460 to the lower end (rod After sliding toward the end on the side opposite to the support shaft 412), it slides toward the upper end (the end on the side of the rod support shaft 412), and the connecting rod 460 rotates around the rod support shaft 412 as shown in FIG. a) Rotated to the right (clockwise). Thereby, when the crank gear 433 reaches the second rotational position as shown in FIG. 10, the connecting rod 460 is positioned at the position P2. In this state, the proximal displacement member 440 is arranged at the rotational position, and the relative displacement member 450 is arranged at the extended position (see FIGS. 12(c) and 15).

Note that even when the crank gear 433 is arranged at the second rotational position, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is connected to the connecting rod in the same manner as the case where the crank gear 433 is arranged at the first rotational position shown in FIG. It is positioned at the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the rod groove 463 of 460 .

Therefore, when the crank gear 433 is arranged at the second rotation position, the crank gear 433 rotates clockwise in FIG. By bringing the crank pin 433 a into contact with the upper end of the rod groove 463 , the rotation in the direction of projecting to the position can be restricted. Therefore, when the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are arranged from the retracted position to the extended position, for example, even if a control failure of the drive motor 420 occurs due to an electrical factor, mechanical mechanism (stopper mechanism for restricting the crank pin 433a by the rod groove 463) displaces the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 beyond the overhanging position, and the displacement members 440 and 450 and the connecting rod 460 are displaced. Collision with other members can be avoided in advance.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12, configurations and operations of the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 will be described. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of proximal displacement member 440 and relative displacement member 450. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 11, the proximal displacement member 440 includes a body portion 441 formed in an elongated plate shape, a shaft support hole 442 opened as a circular hole in the back surface of the body portion 411, and the body portion 441. A first slide hole 443 and a second slide hole 444 are formed as elongated holes extending along the longitudinal direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 11).

The shaft support hole 442 is a hole through which the base-side support shaft 413 of the case body 410 is inserted. Such insertion allows the base-side displacement member 440 to rotate relative to the case body 410 with the base-side support shaft 413 as the center of rotation. pivoted on. That is, the proximal displacement member 440 has a retracted position (see FIGS. 12(a) and 13) and a rotational position (see FIGS. 12(b), 12(c), 14 and 15), as will be described later. is rotatably pivoted between

In this case, the shaft support hole 442 is formed below the center in the longitudinal direction of the body portion 441 and at a position biased to one side (the overhang position side) of the center in the width direction of the body portion 441 . As a result, the rotation angle required for the proximal displacement member 440 in order for the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 to protrude from the outer edge of the case body 410 by a predetermined amount (predetermined area) can be reduced. The time required to rotate the displacement member 440 between the retracted position and the rotation position can be shortened, and as a result, the presentation effect of the displacement of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be enhanced.

The relative displacement member 450 includes a main body portion 451 formed in a long plate shape, a connection pin 452 projecting from the back surface of the main body portion, and a predetermined space along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 451 (vertical direction in FIG. 11). A pair of slide pins 453 separated from each other and a decorative portion 454 arranged on the front surface of the main body portion 451 are mainly formed.

The connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 are columnar portions that are slidably inserted through the first slide hole 443 and the second slide hole 444 of the proximal displacement member 440, respectively. is slidably displaceable along the longitudinal direction of the proximal displacement member 440 . That is, the relative displacement member 450 has a reference position (see FIGS. 12(a), 12(b), 13 and 14) and an extended position (see FIGS. 12(c) and 15), as will be described later. is disposed on the base side displacement member 440 so as to be slidably displaceable between and.

In this case, the connection pin 452 is slidably inserted through the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 at the distal end side protruding from the first slide hole 443 of the proximal displacement member 440, and this insertion causes the relative displacement member 450 to move. It is connected to a crank gear 433 (see FIG. 8) via a connecting rod 460 .

As a result, as will be described later, the rotation of the crank gear 433 rotates the connecting rod 460 about the rod support shaft 412 (see FIG. 9), thereby allowing the proximal side relative to the base side support shaft 413 to rotate about the base side support shaft 413 as the rotation center. Rotation (first motion) of the displacement member 450 can be performed, and sliding displacement (second motion) of the displacement member 450 relative to the proximal displacement member 440 can be performed (see FIG. 12).

Here, the connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 are arranged at different positions (spaced apart) along the longitudinal direction of the relative displacement member 450 (vertical direction in FIG. 11). Therefore, since the locations where the relative displacement member 450 is connected to the proximal displacement member 440 can be dispersed in the longitudinal direction, the longitudinal direction of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the proximal displacement member 440 (the direction toward and away from the case body 410) ) can be suppressed to stabilize the slide displacement.

Further, the connection pin 452 is arranged on the distal end side of the relative displacement member 450 (upper side in FIG. 11) relative to the slide pin 453 . As a result, the position where the relative displacement member 450 is supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 can be brought closer to the distal end side of the relative displacement member 450 in the longitudinal direction. In other words, the position where the relative displacement member 450 is supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 can be moved away from the shaft support hole 442 of the proximal displacement member 440 toward the distal end in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 11). As a result, the front end side of the relative displacement member 450 can be easily suppressed from swinging in the front-rear direction (the direction toward and away from the case body 410).

That is, only the longitudinal direction base side (shaft support hole 442) of the base side displacement member 440 is pivotally supported by the base side support shaft 413 of the case body 410, and the relative displacement member 450 is disposed on the base side displacement member 440. Because of the structure, the tip sides in the longitudinal direction of both displacement members 440 and 450 are free ends, and the tip sides tend to swing back and forth during the first motion. This shaking may cause the tip side to come into contact with the decorative member 480 . Therefore, a structure in which the position supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 is on the distal end side in the longitudinal direction is effective.

A collar C is rotatably fitted on the connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 . By interposing the collar C between the outer peripheral surfaces of the connecting pin 452 and the slide pin 453 and the inner peripheral surfaces of the first slide hole 443 and the second slide hole 444, along these slide holes 443 and 444, each The pins 452 and 453 can be slid smoothly. In addition, the collar C (more specifically, the large-diameter flange portion of the collar C) is interposed between the main body portion 441 of the proximal displacement member 440 and the main body portion 451 and connecting rod 460 of the relative displacement member 450 . , the facing distance between the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 and connecting rod 460 can be kept constant.

The connection pin 452 is prevented from coming off from the connecting rod 460 by fastening and fixing a disc-shaped disc S to the end face on the tip end side of the connection pin 452, and the slide pin 453 has the end face on the tip end side. A long flat plate-shaped slide guide 470 is fastened and fixed to the base side displacement member 440 to prevent it from coming off.

12 is a rear perspective view of proximal displacement member 440 and relative displacement member 450. FIG. 12(a) corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 9(a) and 13 (that is, the state in which the crank gear 433 is placed at the first rotation position and the connecting rod 460 is placed at the position P1). 12(b) corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 9(b) and 14 (that is, the state in which the crank gear 433 is placed at the intermediate rotation position and the connecting rod 460 is placed at the position Pm). . 12(c) corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 10 and 15 (that is, the state in which the crank gear 433 is at the second rotation position and the connecting rod 460 is at the position P2).

As shown in FIG. 12(a), when the connecting rod 460 is positioned at the position P1 (see FIGS. 9(a) and 13), the proximal displacement member 440 rotates about the proximal support shaft 413. The position is the retracted position, which is the position closest to the rod support shaft 412, and the sliding position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 is the position where the amount of protrusion from the base side displacement member 440 is the minimum. placed in each position. In this state, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is positioned at the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 .

From the state shown in FIG. 12(a), the rotation of the crank gear 433 (see FIG. 9(a)) causes the connecting rod 460 to rotate leftward (counterclockwise) in FIG. 12(a) around the rod support shaft 412. When rotated, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 slides through the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 toward the lower end (the end opposite to the rod support shaft 412), thereby connecting the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 440 together. The displacement member 450 rotates about the proximal support shaft 413, and the proximal displacement member 440 rotates to the right (clockwise) in FIG. 12(a) together with the relative displacement member 450 (first operation). When the connecting rod 460 is further rotated and reaches the intermediate position Pm (see FIGS. 9B and 14) as shown in FIG. is positioned at the rotational position that is the furthest position from

In this case, the sliding position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the proximal displacement member 440 can be maintained at the reference position. 12(a) about the rod support shaft 412 of the connecting rod 460, the connecting pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 and the connecting hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 move toward the lower end. When the relative displacement member 450 is slid toward the base side displacement member 440 , the direction of this sliding is substantially along the direction of sliding displacement of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 . Do not generate a force component in the direction of sliding displacement. Therefore, while maintaining the sliding position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 (while restricting the occurrence of sliding displacement from the reference position), the base side displacement member 440 rotates about the base side support shaft 413. Only rotation can occur.

As a result, both the displacement members 440, 450 can be rotated around the base side support shaft 413 while the amount of protrusion of the relative displacement member 450 from the base side displacement member 440 is kept to a minimum. It is possible to reduce the distance between the rotating tip of the relative displacement member 450 and the drive motor 420 (see FIG. 7) or the decoration member 480 (see FIGS. 16 and 17). As a result, it is possible to reduce the size of the projecting operation unit 400 and increase the degree of freedom in design when defining the shape of the decorative member 480 .

From the state shown in FIG. 12(b), the rotation of the crank gear 433 (see FIG. 9(b)) causes the connecting rod 460 to rotate leftward (counterclockwise) in FIG. When rotated, the connecting pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is slid through the connecting hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 toward the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side) and then the lower end (opposite to the rod support shaft 412). side end), and the relative displacement member 450 is slidably displaced with respect to the proximal displacement member 440 along the longitudinal direction (first and second slide holes 443, 444). (Second action). 12(c), when the connecting rod 460 reaches the second position P2 (see FIGS. 10 and 15), the sliding position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the proximal displacement member 440 is It is arranged at the projecting position where the amount of projecting from the side displacement member 440 is maximized.

In this case, the rotational position of the proximal displacement member 440 can be maintained at the rotational position that is the most distant position from the rod support shaft 412 . 12(b) about the rod support shaft 412 of the connecting rod 460 moves the connecting pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 along the connecting hole 462 of the connecting rod 460. However, since the direction of this sliding is substantially orthogonal to the direction of sliding displacement of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440, the relative displacement member 450 is slid with respect to the base side displacement member 440. Only the force component in the direction of displacement is generated, and the force component in the direction of rotating the proximal displacement member 440 around the proximal support shaft 413 is not generated. Therefore, only the sliding displacement of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 can be generated while restricting the rotation of the base side displacement member 440 about the base side support shaft 413 .

As a result, the proximal displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position in a state in which the amount of protrusion of the relative displacement member 450 from the proximal displacement member 440 is kept to a minimum (a state in which the relative displacement member 450 is maintained at the reference position). position (first operation), and after the first operation is completed, the rotation of the proximal displacement member 440 is restricted (the proximal displacement member 440 is maintained at the rotational position), and the relative displacement member A sliding displacement (second operation) that extends 450 along the longitudinal direction with respect to proximal displacement member 440 can be performed. That is, since the rotating motion and the sliding motion can be separated and performed in two steps as separate motions, different modes of motion can be performed in the game compared to the case where the rotating motion and the sliding motion are performed at the same time. It is possible to make the person clearly recognize it, and to enhance the presentation effect by displacing the respective displacement members 440 and 450 .

The operation of the projection operation unit 400 configured as above will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. FIG.

13 to 15 are front views of the projecting motion unit 400. FIG. As described above, FIGS. 13(a) and 13(b) correspond to the states shown in FIGS. 9(a) and 12(a), and FIGS. 14(a) and 14(b) , correspond to the states shown in FIGS. 9(b) and 12(b), and FIGS. 15(a) and 15(b) correspond to the states shown in FIGS. 10 and 12(c). 13(b), 14(b) and 15(b) illustrate a state in which the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are removed.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, according to the protruding operation unit 400, the base-side displacement member 440 can move between the retracted position shown in FIG. 13(a) and the positions shown in FIGS. ), and the relative displacement member 450 disposed on the proximal displacement member 440 is between the reference position shown in FIGS. 13(a) and 14(a) and 15(a) and the overhang position shown in FIG. and a second movement of displacing member 440 between the reference position and the extended position.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 13A and 14A, the proximal displacement member 440 at the retracted position is moved to the rotational position by the first operation, and the relative displacement member 450 at the reference position is moved to the second position. By slidably displacing (extending) the relative displacement member 450 to the overhanging position by an operation, the relative displacement member 450 can be projected outward from the proximal displacement member 440 as shown in FIG. 15(a). Accordingly, since the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be made larger as a whole, the player can sufficiently visually recognize both the displacement members 440 and 450, and the production effect can be fully exhibited.

In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14(a), the base side displacement member 440 is placed in the rotational position by the first operation, so that the distal end portion of the relative displacement member 450 (decorative portion in the present embodiment) 454) can be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the center frame 86, and as shown in FIG. , the player can see substantially the entire relative displacement member 450 (in this embodiment, the entire third portion 454 a of the hitting decoration portion 454 ) through the opening of the center frame 86 .

That is, the relative displacement member 450, which has been retracted to the retracted position and cannot be visually recognized from the opening of the center frame 86, is first caused to appear from the side in the opening of the center frame 86 by rotating motion (first operation). , only a part of the relative displacement member 450 is visually recognized by the player, and then, the relative displacement member 450 is projected toward the center of the opening of the center frame 86 by linear motion (second operation). It is possible to perform an effect of making the player visually recognize the whole. Therefore, it is possible to expand the visible area of the relative displacement member 450 by a motion form (linear motion) different from the motion form (rotational motion) at the time of appearance. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of speed due to the enlargement and a sense of unity of the compound motions due to the continuous performance of these combined motions. As a result, it is possible to obtain a performance effect that cannot be obtained in a form in which the relative displacement member 450 protrudes and retracts with respect to the opening of the center frame 86 only by linear motion (a form in which it reciprocates between the retracted position and the extended position).

On the other hand, when the base-side displacement member in the rotating position is arranged in the retracted position shown in FIG. By sliding (shortening) the relative displacement member 450 to the reference position by the second operation, the outward protrusion of the relative displacement member 450 from the proximal displacement member 440 can be suppressed. Therefore, the displacement members 440 and 450 can be made smaller as a whole, so that the space required to accommodate the displacement members 440 and 450 in the retracted position can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to secure space for arranging other parts and devices.

In this case, as described above, the relative displacement member 450 is arranged in a slidably displaceable state on the proximal displacement member 440, and the second action is, as shown in FIGS. 14(a) and 15(a), Since the relative displacement member 440 is slidably displaced with respect to the base side displacement member 450 between the reference position and the overhang position, for example, the second operation is to move the relative displacement member 440 with respect to the base side displacement member 450. Compared to the case of rotating, the space required for displacing the relative displacement member 440 from the reference position to the extended position can be reduced, and other parts and devices can be arranged accordingly. space can be secured. Further, the mode of displacement (sliding displacement) of the relative displacement member 450 by the second motion can be different from the mode of displacement (rotation) of the proximal displacement member 450 by the first motion. It is possible to enhance the presentation effect by performing the first action and the second action in succession.

In particular, in the second motion, the direction of sliding displacement is the direction along the longitudinal direction of both displacement members 440 and 450 . That is, the relative displacement member 450 is disposed in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the proximal displacement member 440, and is slidably displaced in the direction along the longitudinal direction of each other. 450 as a whole can be efficiently extended and shortened. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 15(a), when the proximal displacement member 440 is arranged at the rotational position, the slide displacement (elongation) of the relative displacement member 450 causes the displacement of both displacement members 440 to increase as a whole. , 450 can be sufficiently visually recognized by the player, and the presentation effect can be fully exhibited. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13( a ), when the proximal displacement member 440 is arranged at the retracted position, the relative displacement member 450 is slid (reduced) to reduce the size of the entire displacement member 440 . , 450 can be reduced, and space for arranging other parts and devices can be secured.

Further, according to the protruding motion unit 400, as described above, the transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 to the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 is shown in FIGS. ) and, as shown in FIG. is connected to the connecting pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 in the region between the rod support shaft 412 that is the rotation center of the connecting rod 460 and the base side support shaft 413 that is the rotation center of the base side displacement member 440. Therefore, by rotating the crank gear 433, the first operation and the second operation by the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be performed in order. That is, since two different operations, that is, the first operation and the second operation, can be performed by only one drive motor 420, the parts cost can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

In this case, as the transmission means, a structure in which a gear is provided on the side of the rod support shaft 412 of the connecting rod 460 and the gear is engaged with the teeth of the crank gear 433 to rotate the connecting rod 460 is also conceivable. In this case, the crank gear 433 and the connecting rod 460 are arranged side by side in a plane, and there is no overlapping margin in the front view, so the space required for their arrangement increases. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is inserted through the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460, so that it is shown in FIGS. Thus, the crank gear 433 and the connecting link 460 can be arranged in a state where they always have an overlap when viewed from the front.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17, the relationship between the relative displacement member 450 and the decoration member 470 when the proximal displacement member 440 is rotated (first motion) will be described.

FIG. 16 is a front perspective view of the projecting operation unit 400. FIG. 17(a) is a side view of the projecting motion unit 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIa in FIG. 16, and FIG. 17(b) is a partially enlarged side view of the projecting motion unit 400 in part XVIIb of FIG. 17(a). is. 16 and 17 show a state in which the decorative member 480 is attached to the projection operation unit 400. As shown in FIG. However, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, only the decorative member 480 necessary for explaining the relationship with the relative displacement member 400 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the projection operation unit 400 is provided with a decorative member 480 above it (upper side in FIG. 16) (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The decorative member 480 is a decorative resin member made of a light-transmitting resin material. Therefore, it is possible for the player to visually recognize other members located on the back side of the decorative member 480 through (transparently) the decorative member 480 .

In the present embodiment, the decorative member 480 is formed so that a portion thereof protrudes downward (lower side in FIG. 17(b)), so that as shown in FIG. 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are formed with an overlapping margin of dimension L. As a result, when the proximal displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position to the rotational position (first movement) (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the rotational trajectory of the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 is It can overlap with a part of the decorative member 480 when viewed from the front.

That is, since the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be displaced while passing the back side of the decoration member 480, the operation of crossing the decoration member 480 and the displacement members 440, 450 can be performed. , both displacement members 440 and 450 can be visually recognized through the decorative member 480 at the time of crossing, and as a result, the presentation effect by displacing both displacement members 440 and 450 can be enhanced. In particular, in the present embodiment, the tip side of the substrate displacement member 440 that is spaced from the decorative member 480 protrudes from the tip side of the relative displacement member 450 that is close to the decorative member 480, so that it is difficult to make contact with the decorative member 480. As a result, the dimension L, which is the overlap margin, can be made larger. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the intersection.

In this case, as described above, the decorative portion 454 forming the front side (the right side in FIG. 17(b)) of the relative displacement member 450 is located on the base end side (the rotation center side of the base side displacement member 440, which is shown in FIG. 17 ( b) bottom side) toward the tip side (rotational tip side of the base end displacement member 440, FIG. 17(b) upper side), it is inclined stepwise in a direction approaching the case body 410 (FIG. 17(b) left side). be. Also, the distal end side of the proximal displacement member 440 arranged on the rear side of the relative displacement member 450 (the left side in FIG. 17B) is made to protrude beyond the distal end side of the relative displacement member 450 . Therefore, the proximal displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 as a whole can be arranged in a recessed position toward the case body 410 side (back side, left side in FIG. 17(b)) toward the tip side thereof.

As a result, when the proximal displacement member 440 is rotated (first movement) from the retracted position to the rotational position (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the rotational trajectory is overlapped with the decorative member 480 in front view. , it is possible to suppress the base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 from coming into contact with the decorative member 480 while ensuring an improvement in the presentation effect.

In this case, the proximal displacement member 440 has a structure in which only one side in the longitudinal direction is supported by the proximal support shaft 413 and the distal end is a free end (see FIGS. 12(a) and 12(b)). ), during the first motion, the tip end tends to swing back and forth (the direction toward and away from the case body 410 side, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 5), and is likely to come into contact with the decorative member 480 . Therefore, the configuration of this embodiment (the shape that is inclined so that the tip side is closer to the case body 410 side) is particularly effective.

On the other hand, the relative displacement member 450 does not have the decorative portion 454 as a whole come close to the case body 410 side. 17(b) to the proximal side (rotation center side of the proximal displacement member 440, FIG. 17(b) lower side) than the upper side). That is, the decorative portion 454 is inclined stepwise upward in a direction away from the case body 410 (the right side in FIG. 17(b)) from the distal end side toward the proximal end side.

As a result, when the relative displacement member 450 is slid from the reference position to the extended position (second operation) (see FIGS. 14 and 15), the relative displacement member 440 is moved closer to the front (front) side (that is, It can be placed on the side closer to the player) to enhance the impact. In particular, in the present embodiment, the outer shape of the portion (the second portion 454b is larger than the first portion 454a, and the third portion 454c is larger than the second portion 454b) is made larger toward the front (front) side. can be exhibited more effectively.

Next, the compound action unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 30. FIG. 18 and 19 are front perspective views of the compound action unit 500. FIG. 18 shows a state in which the driven member 560 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 5), and FIG. 19 shows a state in which the driven member 560 is arranged at the extended position (see FIG. 5). be.

Here, a pair of compound action units 500 are arranged on the left and right sides of the rotary action unit 600 above the opening 301 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). Since they are formed and have substantially the same structure, only one (located on the right side in front view) will be described, and description of the other (located on the left side in front view) will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the combined action unit 500 displaces the driven member 550 by the driving force of the drive motor 530, and causes the driven member 560 to follow the displacement of the driven member 550. , the driven member 560 is displaced between the retracted position shown in FIG. 18 and the extended position shown in FIG. In this case, the driven member 560 is driven by the driven member 550 while changing its position relative to the driven member 550 by rotation and sliding displacement, as will be described later (see FIGS. 27 to 29).

As a result, even when the driven member 550 is rotated at a constant speed on a constant track with a predetermined position (shaft portions 553 and 554) as the center of rotation, the driven member 550 rotates on a track different from that of the driven member 550. The member 560 can be displaced, and the manner of displacement of the driven member 560 can be varied. That is, according to the compound action unit 500, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the driven member 560 while maintaining the output of the drive motor 530 constant. A detailed configuration of the composite action unit 500 will be described below.

20 and 21 are exploded front perspective views of the compound action unit 500. FIG. 22(a) is a front view of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560, and FIG. 22(b) is a front view of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIIb in FIG. 22(a). It is a side view.

20 corresponds to an exploded state of the combined action unit 500 shown in FIG. 18, and FIG. 21 corresponds to an exploded state of the combined action unit 500 shown in FIG. 22(a) and 22(b) correspond to the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 in the states illustrated in FIGS. 18 and 20. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the composite action unit 500 includes a front case body 510 and a back case body 520 forming its skeleton, a drive motor 530 arranged on the back side of the back case body 520, and a drive motor 530. A crank member 540 attached to a drive shaft 531 of a motor 530, a driven member 550 driven by transmission of the driving force of the drive motor 530 via the crank member 540, and a relative displacement of the driven member 550. and a follower member 560 operably connected thereto.

The front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 are formed of a resin material in a flat plate shape, are arranged facing each other with a predetermined distance therebetween, and are fastened and fixed to each other by screws (not shown). It is configured as a housing member in which an internal space is formed between the facing surfaces. A driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552), a driven member 560 (interposed plate portion 561), and a crank member 540 are provided in the internal space (between the facing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520, respectively. Housed in a displaceable state.

The front case body 510 includes a pivot hole 511 , an insertion hole 512 and a first guide groove 513 . The shaft support hole 511 is a circular hole for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 553 of the driven member 540 . The insertion hole 512 is an opening through which the crankpin 541 of the crank member 540 is inserted, and is formed to have a size that allows the reciprocating movement of the crankpin 541 . Through this insertion hole 512, the crank pin 541 can be connected to the driven member 560 (drive shaft 561a).

The first guide groove 513 is an opening through which the first pin 561a of the intervening plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted, and has a shape obtained by extracting a part of an annular ring shape (that is, a groove shape curved in an arc, 27(a) to 29(a)). The groove width of the first guide groove 513 is set equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the first pin 561a. By moving (guiding), the posture of the interposed plate portion 561 (driven member 560) (in particular, relative rotational position with respect to the driven member 550) can be defined (see FIGS. 27(a) to 29(a)). .

The rear case body 520 includes a pivot hole 521 , an insertion hole 522 and a second guide groove 523 . The shaft support hole 521 is a circular hole in a front view for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 554 of the driven member 540, and is arranged concentrically with the shaft support hole 511 of the front case body 510 described above. That is, the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 support the shaft portions 553 and 554 of the driven member 550 in the shaft support holes 511 and 521, respectively, so that the driven member 550 is rotatably shafted. can support The insertion hole 522 is an opening through which the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 is inserted.

The second guide groove 513 is an opening through which the connection shaft 561b of the intervening plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted, and has a shape obtained by extracting a part of an annular ring shape (that is, a groove shape curved in an arc, as shown in FIG. 27(b) to FIG. 29(b)). The groove width of the second guide groove 523 is set equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting shaft 561b. By (guiding), the posture of the interposed plate portion 561 (driven member 560) (particularly, relative slide position with respect to the driven member 550) can be defined (see FIGS. 27(b) to 29(b)).

As described above, the crank member 540 is attached to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530, and the crank member 540 is eccentric from the rotation shaft (drive shaft 531) when rotationally driven by the drive motor 530. A crankpin 541 is arranged at the position. The crank pin 541 is inserted through the driving groove 551 a of the driven member 550 . Therefore, by rotating the crank member 540 with the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 slides along the drive groove 551a of the driven member 550, thereby rotating the driven member 550. (see FIGS. 30-32).

As described above, the driven member 550 is a member that is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530 and displaces the driven member 560 along with the rotation thereof. It is rotatably held by the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 by being pivotally supported in the holes 511 and 521 . Here, the detailed configuration of the driven member 550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. FIG.

23(a) is a front view of the driven member 550, and FIG. 23(b) is a back portion of the driven member 550. FIG. FIG. 24 is a side view of the driven member 550 viewed in the direction of arrow XXIV in FIG. 23(a).

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24 , the driven member 550 includes a long plate-like front plate portion 551 and a long plate-like interposed portion intersecting the front plate portion 551 at a substantially right angle when viewed from the front. A cylindrical shaft portion 553 that connects the plate portion 552 , the front plate portion 551 and the interposition plate portion 552 , and a circle projecting from the rear surface of the interposition plate portion 552 at a position concentric with the shaft portion 553 . It mainly includes a columnar shaft portion 554 .

The front plate portion 551 is a member that is arranged on the front surface of the front case body 510 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and one end side thereof (the side opposite to the side to which the shaft portion 553 is connected) has an oval shape when viewed from the front. A drive groove 551a having a shape is formed. The drive groove 551 a is an opening through which the crank pin 541 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the crank member 540 is inserted, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the front plate portion 551 . The groove width of the driving groove 551a is set equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the crank pin 541. As shown in FIG. Therefore, by rotating the crank member 540 with the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the crank pin 541 can be slid along the drive groove 551a, thereby rotating the shaft portions 553 and 554 as the center of rotation. The drive member 550 can be rotated (see Figures 30-32).

The intervening plate portion 552 is a member that is disposed in the internal space (between the facing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), one end side thereof (the front stomach body portion 551 A connection groove 552a having an oval shape in front view is bored in the side opposite to the side to which is connected. The connection groove 552 a is an opening through which the connection shaft 561 b (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the driven member 560 is inserted, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the intervening plate portion 552 . The groove width of the connecting groove 552a is set equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting shaft 561b. Therefore, the connection groove 552a can hold the connection shaft 561b rotatably and slidably. That is, the driven member 560 is connected to the driven member 550 in a rotatable and slidable manner (see FIGS. 27 to 29).

Here, the connection groove 552a has a region that overlaps the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520 in a front view when the driven member 550 is rotated around the shaft portions 553 and 554, and The connection shaft 561b is configured to be arranged within that area (see FIGS. 27(a) to 27(c)). Thereby, as will be described later, the sliding displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be defined based on the shape (contour) of the second guide groove 523 .

In the driven member 550, the intervening plate portion 552 and the shaft portions 553 and 554 are integrally formed from a resin material, while the front plate portion 551 is formed from a resin material separately from the respective portions 552 to 554. The axial end surface of the shaft portion 553 (the end surface opposite to the intervening plate portion 552) is brought into contact with the rear surface of the front plate portion 551 on the base end side (the side opposite to the side where the drive groove 551a is formed), It is assembled by fastening and fixing both with screws.

In this case, four pins 553a protrude from the axial end surface of the shaft portion 553, and holes 551b for receiving the four pins 553a are formed at four locations on the base end side of the front plate portion 551. It is assembled with each pin 553a received in each hole 551b. As a result, the number of screws can be suppressed, and the cost of components can be reduced, and the flat plate portion 551 and the intervening plate portion 552 can be reliably rendered non-rotatable relative to each other.

Returning to FIG. 20 to FIG. 23, description will be made. As described above, the connection shaft 561b of the interposition plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted through the connection groove 552a of the interposition plate portion 552 of the driven member 550. 560 are connected so as to allow relative displacement (rotational and sliding displacement). As described above, the driven member 560 is a member that is driven along with the displacement of the driving member 550 . In addition, it is held by the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 in a rotatable and slidable state by being inserted into the second guide groove 523 of the back case body 520 . Here, the detailed configuration of the driven member 560 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG.

25(a) is a front view of the driven member 560, and FIG. 25(b) is a back portion of the driven member 560. FIG. FIG. 26 is a side view of the driven member 560 viewed in the direction of arrow XXVI in FIG. 25(a).

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the driven member 560 includes a plate-shaped intervening plate portion 561, a decorative portion 562 having a pair of elongated portions with decorative shapes formed on the front, and It mainly includes a back plate portion 563 that is continuously provided on the side of the decorative portion 562 and connected to the back side of the intervening plate portion 561 .

The intervening plate portion 561 is a member arranged in the internal space (between the facing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21). A first pin 561a is protruded to be inserted into the first guide groove 513 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and a connection shaft 561b is protruded from the rear surface at a position eccentric to the first pin 561a. be done. As described above, the connection shaft 561b is inserted through the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552) and the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21). .

Therefore, when the driven member 550 is rotated around the shaft portions 553 and 5554, the first pin 561a is slid (guided) along the first guide groove 513 so that the intervening plate portion 561 ( That is, the driven member 560) rotates about the connection shaft 561b relative to the driven member 550 and the rear case body 520 (see FIGS. 27(a) to 29(a)), and the connection shaft 561b rotates. is slid (guided) along the second guide groove 523, the intervening plate portion 561 (that is, the driven member 560) slides along the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 as the sliding direction. It is slid relative to 550 (see FIGS. 27(b) to 29(b)).

Here, the connection shaft 561 b of the driven member 560 is inserted only through the connection groove 552 a of the driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552 ), and a pin separately provided in the interposed plate portion 561 is attached to the second end of the rear case body 520 . By inserting it through the second guide groove 523, it is possible to obtain the same effect as in the case described above.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the connection shaft 561b of the driven member 560 is connected to both the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520 and the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552). The displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the rear case body 520 is defined by being guided by the connection shaft 561b and the second guide groove 523 (that is, the driven member 560 is slidably displaced with respect to the driven member 550). ) and the role of connecting the driven member 560 to the driven member 550 so as to be relatively displaceable (rotationally and slidably displaceable) by being inserted into the connection groove 561b. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of parts, reduce the product cost, simplify the structure, and improve the reliability and durability of the movable member.

The rear plate portion 563 is a circular member arranged on the rear surface of the rear case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21). 563a is projected. The abutment portion 563a is a portion abutted against the rear surface of the back case body 520, and is formed in an annular shape concentrically with the connection shaft 561b when viewed from the front. That is, only the peripheral portion of the back plate portion 563 (the protruding tip surface of the contact portion 562a) is brought into contact with the back surface of the back case body 520 .

In this way, by providing the rear plate portion 563 with the contact portion 563 concentric with the connection shaft 561b, when the connection shaft 561b is slid (guided) along the second guide groove 523, the first pin 561a And even if the driven member 560 rotates relative to the back case body 520 around the connection shaft 561b due to the rotational action of the first guide groove 523 (see FIGS. 27 to 29), the back case body It is possible to suppress the change in the support reaction force by keeping the abutting state of the back surface of 520 constant. As a result, the driven member 560 can be stably displaced.

In the driven member 560, the decorative portion 562 and the back plate portion 563 are integrally formed from a resin material, while the interposed plate portion 561 is formed from a resin material separately from the respective portions 562 and 563. The axial end face of the connection shaft 561b of the intervening plate portion 561 is brought into contact with the front surface of 563, and the two are fastened and fixed with screws. A plurality of pins 561c protruding from the axial end surface of the connecting shaft 561b are received in a plurality of holes 563b of the rear plate portion 563, respectively, so that the two are connected so as not to rotate relative to each other. Since it is the same as the case of the member 550, its description is omitted.

Returning to FIG. 20 to FIG. 22, description will be made. Assembly of the compound motion unit 500 can be performed as follows. First, the shaft portion 553 of the driven member 550 is inserted into the shaft support hole 511 of the front case body 510, and the intervening plate portion 561 and the front plate portion 551 of the driven member 550 are fastened and fixed. Thereby, the driven member 550 can be assembled to the front case body 510 in a rotatable state. During this assembly, the connection shaft 561b of the intervening plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted into the connecting groove 552 of the driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552) in advance.

Next, the crank member 540 is attached to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 through the insertion hole 522 of the rear case body 520 , and the crank pin 541 is passed through the insertion hole 512 of the front case body 510 to the driven member 550 . It is made to pass through the driving groove 551a of (the front plate portion 551). At the same time, the connection shaft 561b of the driven member 560 (interposed plate portion 561) is inserted through the second guide groove 523 of the rear case body 520, and the interposed plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 and the rear plate portion 563 are fastened and fixed. do. As a result, the driven member 560 can be rotatably assembled to the rear case body 520 and connected to the driven member 550 in a rotatable and slidable manner. A state in which the rotational driving force of the motor 530 can be transmitted to the driven member 550 can be formed.

After that, the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 are fastened and fixed with screws (not shown). As a result, the compound action unit 500 can be operated in a state in which the driven member 550 can be displaced by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, and the driven member 560 can be displaced (driven) in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550. It can be unitized as one device. As described above, according to the compound action unit 500, it is possible to assemble by sequentially assembling the respective components to the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520, so that not only the assembly cost can be reduced, but also the unitization can be achieved. Therefore, the assembly to the unit storage member 300 (game machine main body, see FIGS. 5 and 6) can be facilitated, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 27 to 32, the operation of compound action unit 500 will be described. 27(a), 28(a), and 29(a) are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the first guide groove 513; 28(b) and 29(b) are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the second guide groove 523. FIG.

Similarly, FIGS. 30(a), 31(a), and 32(a) are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the first guide groove 513. FIG. 30(b) and 30(b) are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the second guide groove 523. FIG.

27 and 30 correspond to the state in which the driven member 560 is arranged at the retracted position (the state shown in FIGS. 18 and 20), and FIGS. 19 and 20). 28 and 31 correspond to the state in which the driven member 560 is arranged between the retracted position and the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 30, when the driven member 560 is at the retracted position, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is positioned on the right side of the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 in front view (FIG. 30(a)). As a result, the driven member 550 tilts the front end side of the front plate portion 551 (the portion where the driving groove 551a is formed) to the right side in front view (the right side in FIG. The tip side of the portion 552 (the portion where the connection groove 552a is formed) is lifted upward (the upper side in FIG. 30(b)). That is, the driven member 550 is arranged at a rotation end position in a clockwise (right) direction in a front view about the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21).

On the other hand, in the driven member 560, as described above, the driven member 550 lifts the leading end side of the intervening plate portion 552 upward, so that the connection shaft 561b moves toward the upper end side of the second guide groove 523 ( It is in a posture pushed up to the upper side in FIG. 27(b). That is, the driven member 560 is arranged at the uppermost position in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 30(b)) and is arranged at the leftmost position in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 30(b)). be done. In addition, the driven member 560 is arranged such that the first pin 561a of the intervening plate portion 561 is positioned on the upper end side of the first guide groove 513 (the upper left side in FIG. 27A), so that the driven member 560 The portion where the first pin 561a is arranged) is set in a horizontal posture toward the left side (the left side in FIG. 27(a)) in a front view. In other words, the driven member 560 is arranged at the rotational end position of rotation in the counterclockwise (counterclockwise) direction in a front view about the connection shaft 561b.

27 and 30 in which the driven member 560 is disposed at the retracted position, the crank member 540 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in a front view assuming that the drive shaft 531 is rotating due to the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530. When rotated, the crankpin 541 of the crank member 540 slides along the drive groove 551a in the front plate portion 551 of the driven member 550, thereby causing the driven member 550 to engage the shaft portions 553 and 554 (FIGS. 20 and 20). 21) as the center of rotation, and as shown in FIGS. placed.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 31, when the driven member 560 is positioned substantially midway between the retracted position and the extended position, the driven member 550 causes the front plate portion 551 to stand substantially upright and intervene. The setting plate portion 552 is assumed to be substantially horizontal. That is, the driven member 550 is arranged at a rotational position substantially in the middle of the rotatable range around the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21).

On the other hand, in the driven member 560, the driven member 550 is in a position in which the intervening plate portion 552 is substantially horizontal, so that the connecting shaft 561b pushed down by the connecting groove 552a of the intervening plate portion 552 moves to the second position. It is assumed that it is arranged at an intermediate position of the guide groove 523 . That is, the driven member 560 is arranged at a position substantially in the middle of the displaceable range in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 31(b)), and is positioned at the rightmost position in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 30(b)). placed in a certain position. Further, the driven member 560 is arranged at a position where the first pin 561a of the intervening plate portion 561 is substantially in the middle of the first guide groove 513, thereby 28(a) is tilted toward the upper left in front view (upper left in FIG. 28(a)). That is, the driven member 560 is arranged at a rotational position substantially in the middle of the rotatable range about the connection shaft 561b.

28 and 31, the crank member 540 is further rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in a front view while the drive shaft 531 is being rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530. By sliding the crank pin 541 along the driving groove 551a in the front plate portion 551 of the driven member 550, the driven member 550 rotates about the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) as the center of rotation. 29 and 32, driven member 560 is positioned in the extended position.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, when the driven member 560 is arranged at the overhanging position, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is located on the left side of the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 in front view (FIG. 32(a)). ) left side), whereby the driven member 550 tilts the front end side of the front plate portion 551 (the portion where the driving groove 551a is formed) to the left side (the left side in FIG. The tip side of the plate portion 552 (the portion where the connection groove 552a is formed) is lowered downward (lower side in FIG. 32(b)). That is, the driven member 550 is arranged at a rotation end position in which rotation in the counterclockwise (counterclockwise) direction in a front view about the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) is the end of rotation.

On the other hand, in the driven member 560, as described above, the driven member 550 is in a posture in which the leading end side of the intervening plate portion 552 is dropped downward, so that the connection shaft 561b moves toward the lower end side of the second guide groove 523 ( It is in a posture pushed down to the bottom of FIG. 29(b). That is, the driven member 560 is arranged at the lowest position in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 32(b)) and is arranged at the leftmost position in the horizontal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 32(b)). be done. In addition, the driven member 560 is positioned on the lower end side of the first guide groove 513 (lower right side in FIG. 29A) so that the first pin 561a of the interposition plate portion 561 is positioned on the tip side of the interposition plate portion 561. The upright posture is such that (the portion where the first pin 561a is arranged) faces upward in a front view (the upper side in FIG. 29(a)). In other words, the driven member 560 is arranged at the rotational end of rotation in the clockwise (right) direction in a front view about the connection shaft 561b.

As described above, according to the compound action unit 500, when the driven member 550 is displaced (rotated) by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the driven member 560 is displaced as the driven member 550 is displaced. It can be driven while being displaced relative to the driving member 550 . In other words, even if the displacement of the driven member 550 is rotation about the shaft portions 533 and 554 and is displaced along a certain trajectory, the trajectory (displacement) of the driven member 550 differs from that of the driven member 550 . mode) of the driven member 560 can be displaced. In addition, since the change in the displacement mode is formed by the displacement of the driven member 560 relative to the driven member 550, even if the driven member 550 is displaced (rotated) at a constant speed, the The driven member 560 can be displaced on a trajectory (displacement mode) different from that of the driven member 550 . As a result, the displacement of the driven member 560 can be varied while the output of the drive motor 530 is kept constant.

In this case, in this embodiment, the means for displacing the driven member 560 relative to the driven member 550 (displacement regulating means) is the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove of the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520. 523, the first pin 561a of the driven member 560 and the connecting shaft 561b. That is, by guiding the first pin 561a and the connecting shaft 561b along the guide grooves 513 and 523, the displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the case bodies 510 and 520 can be defined. Thereby, relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be formed according to the contours (shapes) of the guide grooves 513 and 523 . As a result, the displacement regulating means can be formed by mechanical elements such as the guide groove and the shaft-shaped body guided by the guide groove, which simplifies the structure and reduces the product cost. Moreover, since simple mechanical elements can be employed, the reliability and durability of the movable portion can be improved.

Further, by setting the outline (shape) of the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523, it is possible to arbitrarily set the mode of displacement of the driven member 560 relative to the driven member 550. It is possible to increase the degree of design freedom when setting the mode. As a result, variations in the form of displacement that can be imparted to the driven member 560 can be easily ensured.

In particular, in this embodiment, where the driven member 560 is rotatably and slidably connected to the driven member 550, the first guide groove 513 and the first pin 561a mainly regulate rotation. A guide structure and a second guide structure constituted by the second guide groove 523 and the connecting shaft 561b and mainly regulating the slide displacement are provided. As a result, it is possible not only to increase the variation of the change that can be applied to the displacement mode, but also, even if there are multiple types of displacements (rotational and sliding displacements) of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550, each of these displacements can be controlled by the first and the second guide structure, respectively. As a result, the displacement of the driven member 560 can be stabilized, and the reliability of the movable member can be improved.

Here, in the first guide structure described above, for example, the first guide groove 513 is formed in the intervening plate portion 561 or the rear plate portion 563, and the first pin 561a is formed in the front case body 510 or the rear case body 520, respectively. It is also established in the configuration to In contrast, in this embodiment, the first guide groove 513 is formed in the front case body 510, and the first pin 561a is formed in the intervening plate portion 561, respectively. This makes it easier to secure a space for forming the first guide groove 513 .

That is, the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 must be formed with a relatively large outer shape because it is necessary to secure a displacement space for the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 while holding these members 550 and 560 . and a dead space tends to be formed on the plate surface. Therefore, by forming the first guide groove portion 513 on the front case body 510, the dead space can be effectively used and a sufficient space for forming the first guide groove 513 can be secured. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of freedom of the outline (shape) and extension length of the first guide groove 513, and to that extent, it is possible to increase the variation of changes that can be imparted to the displacement mode. Since the second guide structure is similar to the first guide structure, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the first guide structure and the second guide structure can also be realized by forming both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 in the rear case body 520 . In contrast, in this embodiment, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed in the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520, respectively. can be formed without considering each other's formation position.

That is, when both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed in the rear case body 520, it is necessary to form the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 so as not to cross each other. The degree of freedom in designing its contour (shape) and extension length is limited. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are arbitrarily set for their contours (shapes) and extension lengths without considering their positional relationship with each other. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the design can be increased, and the variations of changes that can be given to the displacement mode can be increased accordingly.

Next, the rotation operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 39. FIG. FIG. 33 is a front perspective view of the rotary motion unit 600. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 33 , the rotary operation unit 600 has a spherical liquid crystal device 670 and a ring-shaped first rotating body 650 in a front view so as to surround the spherical liquid crystal device 670 . A second rotating body 660 having an annular shape when viewed from the front is concentrically arranged on the side, and in this embodiment, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are rotated at different rotational speeds and in opposite directions.

Here, with conventional products in which a plurality of rotating bodies are arranged at positions separated from each other, it is difficult for the player to recognize the rotations of the plurality of rotating bodies in association with each other. In other words, the conventional product has a form in which each rotating body rotates independently without being involved with other rotating bodies. I couldn't let it go.

On the other hand, according to the rotating operation unit 600 of the present embodiment, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are arranged concentrically around the spherical liquid crystal device 670, and these two rotating bodies are rotated differently. Since it is rotated in a manner (a manner in which the rotation speed and the rotation direction are different from each other), it is possible to associate these rotations and make it easier for the player to recognize, and to exhibit the effect of presentation by rotating a plurality of rotating bodies. can. A detailed configuration of the rotating operation unit 600 will be described below.

34 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary motion unit 600, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotary motion unit 600. FIG. Also, FIG. 36 is a longitudinal sectional view of the rotary operation unit 600. As shown in FIG. 35 and 36, illustration of the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is omitted. 36 corresponds to a cross section of the rotary operation unit 600 cut by a plane including the rotation centers of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, the rotary operation unit 600 includes a front case body 610 and a rear case body 620 forming its skeleton, a drive motor 630 arranged on the rear side of the rear case body 620, and a drive motor 630. A plurality of gears (first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and a front gear 646) as transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the motor 630, and the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 is transmitted through the plurality of gears. A first rotating body 650 and a second rotating body 660 rotated by being rotated, a spherical liquid crystal device 670 arranged on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, and a light emitting device 680 disposed on the front.

The front case body 610 and the rear case body 620 are formed in a flat plate shape from a resin material, are arranged facing each other with a predetermined distance therebetween, and are fastened and fixed to each other by screws (not shown). It is configured as a housing member in which an internal space is formed between the facing surfaces. The first to fifth housing gears 641 to 645 and the housing flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 are housed in the internal spaces (between the facing surfaces) of the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620, respectively.

Circular openings 611 and 621 in a front view are formed in the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620, respectively, and these openings 611 and 621 are arranged concentrically in the assembled state. On the front side of the front case body 610 , a tubular portion 612 is provided so as to protrude frontward (forward) at a position concentric with the openings 611 and 621 . In the front case body 610, the inner diameter dimensions of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 are set to be the same. supported as possible. A second rotating body 620 is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral side of the tubular portion 612 .

In this way, by rotatably supporting the first rotating body 650 (body part 651) and the second rotating body 660 by the inner peripheral surface and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610, the first rotating body 650 (main body portion 651) and the second rotating body 660 are The arrangement positions of the rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be defined with the front case body 610 as a reference. Therefore, as described later, the gears (first and second peripheral gears 653a, 661a) engraved on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 650 (storage flange portion 653) and the second rotating body 660, and the front The positional relationship between the second housing gear 642 and the front gear 646 arranged in the case body 610 can be defined with the front case body 610 as a reference. As a result, it is possible to stabilize the meshing state between the outer peripheral gears 653a and 661a of the rotating bodies 650 and 660 and the second housing gear 642 and the front gear 646, thereby suppressing uneven wear of the gears and driving resistance. can be suppressed.

The drive motor 630 has a pinion gear 631 attached to its drive shaft, and is mounted on the back surface of the back case body 620, so that the pinion gear 631 is attached to the first storage gear 641 of the plurality of gears that constitute the transmission means. engage teeth. Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 can be transmitted to the transmission means (a plurality of gears) via the pinion gear 431. As a result, as described later, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be rotated respectively.

The first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and the front gear 646 are gear groups for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, as described above. Each is formed as a spur gear whose teeth are engraved on the outer peripheral surface parallel to the axis of rotation. The first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 are rotatably supported on the back side of the front case body 610, and are connected (engaged) in series to form a fifth storage gear with the first storage gear 641 at the head. A single gear train (gear train) is formed with the gear 645 at the tail.

The front gear 646 is rotatably supported on the front side of the front case body 610 in a state of being synchronously rotatable with the fifth housing gear 645 . That is, the front gear 646 and the fifth housing gear 645 are fixed to one end and the other end of a rotary shaft arranged through the front case body 610, respectively, and these gears 645 and 646 and the rotary shaft are integrated. and rotated.

According to the gear group configured in this way, when the drive motor 630 is rotationally driven, the rotational driving force is transmitted to the first housing gear 641 via the pinion gear 631, and the first housing gear 641 is rotated. . The rotation of the first housing gear 641 is transmitted to the fifth housing gear 645 by the action of the gear train (gear train), and the rotation of the fifth housing gear 645 causes the front gear 646 to rotate.

Here, as will be described later, the second storage gear 642 has a first outer peripheral gear 653 a of the first rotating body 650 (storage flange portion 653 ), and the front gear 646 has a second outer peripheral gear 653 a of the second rotating body 660 . Since the gears 661a are meshed with each other, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be rotated as the driving motor 630 rotates. In other words, one driving motor 630 can rotate two rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) at the same time.

In this case, an even number of gears (third and fourth accommodation gears 643 and 644) are interposed between the second accommodation gear 642 and the fifth accommodation gear 645 in this embodiment. Therefore, not only can the rotational speed between the front gear 646 and the second housing gear 642, which rotate synchronously with the fifth housing gear 645, be different, but also the rotation speed between the second housing gear 642 and the front gear 646 can be changed. Different directions are also possible. As a result, as will be described later, the rotational speed and direction of rotation between the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be made different.

In this embodiment, a gear train including the second storage gear 642 is arranged on the back side of the front case body 610, and a front gear is arranged on the front side of the front case body 610. On the back side, the second housing gear 642 and the front gear 646 are meshed with the first outer gear 653a of the first rotor 650 and the second outer gear 651a of the second rotor 660, respectively. Therefore, for example, both the second storage gear 642 and the front gear 646 are arranged on the front side of the front case body 610, and these gears 642 and 646 are meshed with the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, respectively. As compared with the structure that rotates, not only the transmission structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 but also the structure of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 themselves It can be simplified.

Further, the gear train and the storage flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 with which the second storage gear 642 of the gear train is meshed are arranged on the back side of the front case body 610, thereby rotating the gear train. The gear train and housing flange portion 653 can be shielded by the front case body 610 from the player who views the operation unit 600 from the front. That is, the shielding structure for shielding the gear train and housing flange portion 653 from being visually recognizable can be simply formed using the rear case body 610 without providing a separate member.

The first rotating body 650 is an effect member for effecting effects by rotating around the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (see FIG. 33), and is integrated with a main body 651 on one side in the axial direction of the main body 651. It mainly includes a formed front effect portion 652 and a housing flange portion 653 fastened and fixed to the other axial side (axial end surface) of the main body portion 651 by screws.

The body portion 651 is a cylindrical portion made of a resin material, and is inserted through the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610 . That is, the first rotating body 650 is rotatably held by the front case body 610 (the opening 611 and the tubular portion 612) with the main body portion 651 as the rotation axis. Here, the detailed configuration of the main body portion 651 will be described with reference to FIG. 37 .

37(a) is a rear view of the body portion 651, and FIG. 37(b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the body portion 651 showing an enlarged portion XXXVII of FIG. 37(a). In addition, in FIG. 37(b), in order to facilitate understanding, the diameters of the first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b are schematically illustrated by enlarging them more than they actually are, and the first projecting portion 651a A virtual circle IS, which is a virtual circle inscribed by the apexes of the second projecting portion 651b and the second projecting portion 651b, is illustrated using a chain double-dashed line.

As shown in FIGS. 37(a) and 37(b), the body portion 651 is formed with a first projecting portion 651a and a second projecting portion 651b, and a position corresponding to the second projecting portion 651b. , an offset portion 651c is formed.

The first protruding portion 651a and the second protruding portion 651b are formed to protrude from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 651, respectively, and extend along the axial direction of the main body portion 651 (the direction perpendicular to the paper in FIG. 37(a)). It is a portion that extends over the entire length of the main body portion 651 (see FIG. 35), and is a plurality of locations (a total of eight locations in this embodiment) that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction, and includes a first protrusion 651a and a second protrusion 651a. 651b are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction.

That is, the first protruding portion 651a is a columnar body having a circular cross section and having a diameter larger than the plate thickness of the body portion 561, and is embedded in the body portion 651 in a posture in which the axial direction is aligned with the body portion 651, It is formed by a portion (a part of the columnar body) protruding from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 651 of the embedded columnar body. The second projecting portion 651b is similar to the first projecting portion 651a, except that the cylindrical body embedded in the body portion 651 has a larger diameter than the first projecting portion 651a.

In this manner, the first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b projecting from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 extend over the entire length of the main body portion 651 along the axial direction. The stiffness of 651 can be increased.

The second protruding portion 651b extends further along the axial direction from the axial end surface of the main body portion 651 (the front side surface of the paper surface of FIG. 37(b)). Therefore, as will be described later, when the storage flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 651 by screws, the axially extending portion of the second projecting portion 651 b is recessed in the front surface of the storage flange portion 653 . By being fitted in the concave portion, the main body portion 651 and the storage flange portion 653 can be firmly coupled so as not to rotate relative to each other (see FIG. 36).

The offset portion 651c is a portion of the main body portion 651 in which the vicinity of the portion where the second protrusion 651b is formed is offset to the inner peripheral side while maintaining the plate thickness dimension, and is approximately three times the diameter of the second protrusion 651b. It is formed over a range (circumferential direction). That is, the offset portion 651c is curved in an arc concentric with the body portion 651 when viewed in the axial direction of the body portion 651 shown in FIG. 37(b). By forming the offset portion 651c in the main body portion 651 in this manner, the axis of the second protruding portion 651b can be offset to the axial center side as described later, and the main body portion 651 as a whole can be Rigidity can be increased.

The plurality (four in this embodiment) of the first protrusions 651a are set to have the same amount of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the body portion 651, and the plurality of (four in this embodiment) of the second protrusions 652b are , the amount of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the body portion 651 is set to be the same, and the amount of protrusion of the first protrusion 651a is also set to be the same due to the offset by the offset portion 651c. A plurality (eight in this embodiment) of the first protrusions 651a and the second protrusions 652b are set to have the same amount of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651, respectively. As a result, as shown in FIG. 37B, a virtual circle IS inscribed by the tops of the first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 652b can be concentrically set on the outer peripheral side of the main body portion 651. In this case, the diameter dimension of the virtual circle IS is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the inner diameter dimension of the opening 611 and the tubular portion 612 in the front case body 610 .

Therefore, in a state in which the body portion 651 of the first rotating body 650 is inserted through the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610, the contact areas between them are the first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion. Since it can be limited to each top of 651 b , contact resistance can be suppressed, and the main body 651 can be smoothly rotated on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 .

In particular, the first protruding portion 651a and the second protruding portion 651b have an arcuate shape when viewed in the axial direction (specifically, a cross-sectional shape cut along a plane perpendicular to the axial direction of the main body portion 651 has an outwardly convex arcuate shape). ), not only can the contact area be suppressed, but also the tops of the first and second protrusions 651a and 651b can smoothly contact the inner peripheral surfaces of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610. Therefore, the main body portion 651 can be rotated more smoothly on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 even if there is play due to dimensional tolerance.

The first protrusion 651 a and the second protrusion 651 b not only protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651 as described above, but also protrude from the inner peripheral surface of the main body 651 . As a result, when the main body portion 651 is molded with a resin mold, the shape of the main body portion 651 can be uniformed (made symmetrical) on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side, and the moldability can be ensured.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when viewed in the axial direction of the body portion 651 shown in FIG. The protrusion dimension of the portion formed to protrude from the inner peripheral surface of the is the same. Similarly, in the second projecting portion 651a, the projecting dimension of the portion projecting from the outer peripheral surface of the offset portion 651c is the same as the projecting dimension of the portion projecting from the inner peripheral surface of the offset portion 651c. . Therefore, the shape on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side of the main body portion 651 can be made more uniform (symmetrical shape), and the moldability can be further secured.

In addition, a hole having a circular cross section along the axial direction is bored over the entire length of the second projecting portion 651b (see FIG. 36). As a result, the thickness of the second projecting portion 651b, which has a larger diameter than the first projecting portion 651a, can be made uniform with the other portions (main body portion 651, offset portion 651c, first projecting portion 651a, etc.). As a result, the formability of the body portion 651 can be ensured.

In this case, an internal thread is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the hole formed in the second projecting portion 651b, and a screw for fastening and fixing the housing flange portion 653 can be screwed (see FIG. 36). In this way, the strength of the screw fastening portion can be ensured by the second protruding portion 651b having a relatively large diameter serving as the screw fastening portion for fastening the screw. In particular, the second projecting portion 651b is formed in the offset portion 651c, and the rigidity of the main body portion 651 is enhanced. By carrying it, both can be firmly connected and the durability can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 34 to FIG. 36, description will be made. The front effect portion 652 is a portion visually recognized by the player as a effect portion, and is formed to protrude radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 in a flange shape. The front face (front face, appearance forming surface) of the front presentation part 652 is plated, and the front presentation part 652 is provided with an appearance imitating lustrous metal. Although the front effect portion 652 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, it is plated so that the player can see the light emitting device 680 (light emitting element 681) through the front effect portion 652. can be avoided.

The front view shape of the front effect portion 652 is formed in a sawtooth shape in which irregular peaks (second portions) and valleys (first portions) are repeated along the circumferential direction. Peaks (troughs) are arranged at uneven intervals (uneven pitches) in the circumferential direction. As will be described later, when the first rotating body 650 is rotated, the peaks and valleys of the front rendering section 652 sequentially pass through the front side (front) of the light emitting element 681 of the light emitting device 680, thereby emitting light to the player. Element 681 can be intermittently and selectively viewed (see FIG. 39).

The housing flange portion 653 is a portion that is housed in the internal space (between the facing surfaces) of the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620, and is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is a cylindrical portion of the front case body 610. It is fastened and fixed through the opening 611 to the axial end face of the body portion 651 inserted through the 612 . Specifically, the housing flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the body portion 651 by screwing the screws inserted through the housing flange portion 653 into the second projecting portion 651b of the body portion 651 as described above.

The housing flange portion 653 has a thickness dimension equal to or slightly smaller than the distance between the facing surfaces of the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620, and an outer diameter dimension that is equal to or smaller than the distance between the facing surfaces of the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620. The dimension is set larger than the inner diameter dimension of the openings 611 and 621 in the body 620 . Therefore, the first rotating body 650 defines the axial position of the first rotating body 650 by bringing the front or rear surface of the housing flange portion 653 into contact with the rear surface of the front case body 610 or the front surface of the rear case body 620. can.

A first peripheral gear 653 a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the storage flange portion 653 . Gear 642 is engaged. Therefore, when the gear train is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630, the rotation is transmitted to the storage flange portion 653 via the second storage gear 642 and the first outer peripheral gear 653a, and the first rotating body 650 rotates. rotated.

In this way, the first rotating body 650 has the first outer gear 653a engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the storage flange portion 653, and is one of the gear trains arranged along the peripheral edge of the opening 511 of the front case body 610. Since the second storage gear 642 is meshed with the first outer peripheral gear 653a, the transmission structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotor 650 can be simplified. In particular, since the first rotating body 650 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the projected surface portion 671 of the spherical liquid crystal device 670, which will be described later, is arranged on the inner peripheral side thereof, it is difficult to secure a space on the inner peripheral side. becomes. Therefore, it is effective to dispose the transmission structure described above on the outer peripheral side of the first rotating body 650 .

Further, as described above, the first rotating body 650 (main body portion 651) is rotatably supported on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610. The position can be defined with reference to the front case body 610 . Therefore, the position between the gear (first outer peripheral gear 653a) engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 650 (accommodating flange portion 653) and the second accommodating gear 642 disposed in the front case body 610 A relationship can be defined with respect to the front case body 610 . As a result, the meshing state between the first outer peripheral gear 653a of the first rotating body 650 and the second housing gear 642 can be stabilized, so that uneven wear of the gears can be suppressed and driving resistance can be suppressed. can.

The second rotating body 660 is a rendering member for performing rendering by rotating on the back side of the first rotating body 650 (see FIG. 33). 661 and a front rendering portion 662 formed integrally with the axial end surface of the main body portion 661 .

The inner diameter of the body portion 661 is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610, and is fitted on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612 (i.e. , and by inserting the cylindrical portion 612 into the inner peripheral side of the main body portion 661), it is rotatably held by the front case body 610 (the cylindrical portion 612).

A second outer peripheral gear 661a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the body portion 661, and the above-described front gear 646 disposed on the front surface of the front case body 610 is meshed with the second outer peripheral gear 661a. Therefore, when the gear train and the front gear 646 are rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630, the rotation is transmitted to the main body 661 via the front gear 646 and the second outer peripheral gear 661a, causing the second rotation. Body 660 is rotated.

In this manner, the second rotating body 660 has the second outer peripheral gear 661a engraved on its outer peripheral surface, and the front gear 646 provided on the front surface of the front case body 610 meshes with the second outer peripheral gear 661a. , the transmission structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the second rotor 660 can be simplified. In particular, since the second rotating body 650 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is rotatably held by being fitted onto the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610, a space is secured on the inner peripheral surface side. it becomes difficult to Therefore, it is effective to dispose the transmission structure described above on the outer peripheral side of the second rotating body 660 .

Further, as described above, the second rotating body 660 is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610. 610 can be defined as a reference. Therefore, the positional relationship between the gear (second outer peripheral gear 661a) engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 660 and the front gear 646 disposed on the front case body 610 is It can be specified as a standard. As a result, the meshing state between the second outer peripheral gear 661a of the second rotating body 660 and the front gear 646 can be stabilized, so that uneven wear of the gears can be suppressed and driving resistance can be suppressed.

The main body portion 661 has an axial dimension equal to or slightly smaller than the distance between the front surface of the front case body 610 and the rear surface of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 . Therefore, the second rotating body 660 causes the end face on one side in the axial direction of the main body part 661 or the end face on the other side in the axial direction to contact the back surface of the front rendering part 652 of the first rotating body 650 or the front face of the front case body 610. Thus, the axial position of the second rotating body 650 can be defined.

The main body portion 661 has a front projection 661b and a rear projection 661c protruding from the end face on one side in the axial direction and the end face on the other side in the axial direction. The front projection 661b is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and the rear projection 661c is formed by dividing the annular shape when viewed from the front at a plurality of points. As a result, when rotating the first rotating body 660, the frictional resistance between the main body portion 661, the front case 610, and the second rotating body 650 (front rendering portion 652) is reduced, and the load on the drive motor 630 is reduced. can be suppressed.

The front effect part 662 is located on the back side of the front effect part 652 in the first rotating body 650, and is a part visually recognized by the player as a effect part together with the effect part 652. It is formed to protrude outward in the shape of a flange. The front rendering portion 662 includes an outer peripheral side portion 662a formed in a sawtooth shape in which irregularly shaped peaks and valleys are repeated along the circumferential direction, and an annular shape in a front view on the inner peripheral side of the outer peripheral side portion 662a. and an inner peripheral side portion 662b that is a portion.

The front surface (front surface, appearance forming surface) of the front rendering portion 662 is plated in the same manner as the front rendering portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 . However, in the first rotating body 650 described above, the entire surface (entire range) of the front rendering portion 652 is plated, but in the second rotating body 650, only the outer peripheral portion 662a of the front rendering portion 662 is plated. is applied, and the inner peripheral side portion 662b is not plated.

Therefore, as will be described later, the crest (second portion) and the valley (first portion) of the front rendering portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 are caused to pass in order on the front side (front) of the light emitting element 681 of the light emitting device 680. In order to allow the player to intermittently and selectively view the light emitting element 681, the light emitting element 681 is placed in the inner peripheral side portion 662b (that is, the portion not plated) of the front rendering portion 662. It is possible for the player to visually recognize it (see FIG. 39).

The spherical liquid crystal device 670 includes a projection surface portion 671 formed as a spherical shell from a light-transmissive material, and a case body 672 in which a projection device for projecting an image onto the inner surface of the spherical shell of the projection surface portion 671 is accommodated. , and allows the player to visually recognize the image projected from the projection device and transmitted through the outer surface of the projected surface portion 671 . In the assembled state, the case body 672 is fastened and fixed to the rear surface of the rear case body 620, and the projected surface portion 671 has approximately half of its spherical shell projecting forward from the front surface of the front rendering portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. It is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body 650 (see FIG. 33).

A light emitting device 680 includes a case body 681 having an annular shape in a front view and fitted onto a cylindrical portion 612 of a front case 610, a circuit board housed in the case body 681, and a front surface (front) of the circuit board. and a plurality of (12 in this embodiment) light emitting elements 682 arranged (mounted) on the side, and in the assembled state, the front rendering parts 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, 662 on the back side.

In the front (front surface) of the case body 681, openings having an outer shape larger than that of the light emitting element 682 are formed at 12 locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. 682 is mounted on the circuit board. That is, when viewed from the front, the light emitting device 680 exposes the light emitting element 682 from the opening of the case body 681, and emits light emitted from the light emitting element 682 through the opening of the case body 681 toward the front side (the first rotation angle). It is possible to irradiate toward the front rendering portions 652 and 662 of the body 650 and the second rotating body 660 .

On the front (front) side of the light emitting device 680, as described above, the front rendering portions 652 and 662 of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are arranged. is rotated, it is possible for the player to intermittently and selectively view the light emitted by the light emitting element 682 . Here, a structure for intermittently and selectively allowing the player to visually recognize the light emission of the light emitting element 682 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. FIG.

FIG. 38 is a front view of the rotary operation unit 600, and FIGS. 38(a) and 38(b) show the states in which the first rotor 650 is arranged at different rotational positions. 39(a) is a cross-sectional view of the rotary motion unit 600 taken along the line XXXIXa-XXXIXa of FIG. 38(a), and FIG. 39(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotary motion unit 600 taken along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 38(b). is a cross-sectional view of.

38, in order to clarify the phase relationship between the front rendering portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680, the first rotating body 650 and the Only the light emitting device 680 is illustrated, and FIG. 39 shows the radial positional relationship between the front rendering portions 652 and 662 of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680. 38 schematically shows an exploded state in which a second rotating body 660 is added to the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting device 680 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the front view shape of the front rendering portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 is such that irregular peaks (second portions) and valleys (first portions) are repeated along the circumferential direction. In light emitting device 680, light emitting element 682 is disposed radially outside (upper side in FIG. 39A) of the bottom of front effect portion 652 and It is set at a radial position (vertical position in FIG. 39(a)) that is radially inward (bottom in FIG. 39(a)) of the crest.

In this case, the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front rendering portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is not plated on the front surface (front surface) as described above, and is formed to allow light to pass therethrough. The formation range of the circumferential side portion 662b (the range indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 39) is set to a range that includes the bottom of the front rendering portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680. That is, when viewed from the front, light is emitted from the valley portion of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 through the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 (that is, through). Light-emitting elements 682 of device 680 may be visible to the player.

In addition, as described above, the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front rendering portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is plated on the front surface (front surface) to give an appearance imitating lustrous metal. The outer peripheral side portion 662 a is arranged to face the back side of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 . That is, in a front view, the player can visually recognize the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front presentation portion 662 of the second rotation body 660 from the valley portion of the front presentation portion 652 of the first rotation body 650 .

As described above, according to the rotation operation unit 600, in the front rendering portion 652 of the first rotating body 650, peaks and valleys are formed alternately in the circumferential direction in the region overlapping the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 when viewed from the front. Therefore, as the first body of rotation 650 rotates, the peaks and valleys of the front rendering portion 652 alternately pass in front of the light emitting element 682, causing the light emission of the light emitting element 682 to be transferred to the second body of rotation 660. The player can intermittently visually recognize the image through the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front presentation portion 682 of FIG. As a result, it is possible to effectively perform an effect of rotating a plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) around the spherical liquid crystal device 670. FIG.

In addition, the outer peripheral portion 662a of the front rendering portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is plated to give an appearance imitating lustrous metal. is provided with a front rendering portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 . Therefore, as described above, when the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are rotated in mutually opposite directions, the first rotating body 650 rotates through the valley portion of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 . The player can see how the outer peripheral portion 662 a of the front effect portion 652 of the second rotating body 660 rotates in the opposite direction to the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 .

That is, according to the rotation operation unit 600, the player who views the first rotating body 650 from the front can intermittently visually recognize the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 on the valley bottom side of the mountain valley shape of the front rendering section 652. On the peak side of the mountain-valley shape of the front effect portion 652, the front effect portion 662 (outer peripheral portion 662a) of the second rotating body 660 rotates in the opposite direction to the front effect portion 652 (mountain-valley shape) of the first rotating body 650. can be visually recognized. As a result, the rotation of the first rotating body 650 and the rotation of the second rotating body 660 can be easily recognized by the player, and as a result, a plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) It is possible to effectively perform the effect of rotating each.

Furthermore, according to the rotation effect unit 600, as described above, the valleys in the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 are formed at 16 locations in the circumferential direction, while the light emitting elements 682 of the light emitting device 680 are arranged at 12 locations in the circumferential direction. Since the light emitting elements 682 are arranged at the locations, the player can selectively view only the specific light emitting elements 682 out of the light emitting elements 682 arranged at the 12 locations.

That is, the circumferential interval of the troughs in the front effect portion 652 and the circumferential interval of the light emitting elements 682 are set to different intervals, so that, for example, in the state shown in FIG. While the provided light emitting element 682 is visible, when the first rotating body 650 (front rendering section 652) is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle from the state shown in FIG. ), different light-emitting elements 682 are selected, and the light-emitting elements 682 arranged at the upper right, lower right, lower left and upper left are visible.

As a result, not only can the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 be visually recognized intermittently, but also the position of the visible light emitting element 682 can be changed in the circumferential direction. The effect of rotating each of the second rotating bodies 660) can be performed more effectively.

Returning to FIGS. 34 to 36, the overall structure of the rotary motion unit 600 will be described. As described above, the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 are formed in the front case body 610 , and the housing flange portion 653 is formed separately from the body portion 651 and the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 . Therefore, the second rotating body 660 is attached to the outer peripheral side of the tubular portion 612 of the front case body 610, and the main body portion 651 of the first rotating body 650 is inserted through the inner peripheral side of the tubular portion 612 of the front case body 610. At the same time, after fastening and fixing the storage flange portion 653 to the inserted main body portion 651, the rear case body 620 is fastened and fixed to the front case body 610, so that the first rotating body 650 is attached to the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620. and the second rotating body 660 can be held in a rotatable state.

That is, the first rotating body 650 is rotatably pivotally supported by the front case body 610 by inserting the body portion 651 through the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610 . In this case, the storage flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 can abut against the back surface of the front case body 610 and the front surface of the back case body 620, respectively, thereby allowing the first rotating body 650 to contact both the case bodies 610 and 620. to the front side (forward) and back side (backward).

At the same time, the second rotating body 660 is rotatably supported by the front case body 610 by being fitted onto the tubular portion 612 of the front case body 610 . In this case, the second rotating body 660 (the front protruding strip 661b and the rear protruding strip 662c) is brought into contact with the back surface of the front rendering part 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the front surface of the case body 681 of the light emitting device 680, respectively. As a result, displacement of the second rotating body 660 toward the front side (forward) and the rear side (backward) with respect to both the case bodies 610 and 620 can be restricted.

As described above, according to the rotating operation unit 600, a plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) can be held in a rotatable state, and the rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650) themselves can be rotated. also serves as a portion for restricting the displacement of the second rotating body 660, the structure can be simplified accordingly. In addition, a holding structure capable of holding a plurality of rotating bodies (first rotating body 650 and second rotating body 660) in a rotatable state is provided by fastening and fixing housing flange portion 653 to body portion 651 of first rotating body 650. The assembly process can be simplified because it can be formed only by pressing. As a result, it is possible to reduce the product cost.

Further, according to the rotating operation unit 600, the first rotating body 650 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the opening 621 is formed in the rear case body 620, so that the front case body 610 and the rear case body 620 can be rotated a plurality of times. After the bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) are held in a rotatable state, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is attached from the rear side of the rear case body 620 and fastened and fixed, and the rotating operation is performed. Assembly of the unit 600 can be completed (see Figure 33). That is, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 can be retrofitted to the assembly of the case bodies 5610 and 620 and the rotating bodies 650 and 660 in a separate process. Therefore, this point also contributes to simplifying the assembly process and reducing the product cost.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In the projecting operation unit 400 in the above embodiment, the case where the relative displacement member 450 is slidably displaced with respect to the proximal displacement member 440 has been described. Relative displacement member 450 may be arranged rotatably with respect to 440 . That is, the first operation is to rotate the base side displacement member 440 between the retracted position (see FIG. 13) and the rotating position (see FIG. 14) as in the above embodiment, and the second operation is to A configuration in which the relative displacement member 450 is rotated with respect to the proximal displacement member 440 between the reference position (see FIG. 14) and the extended position (see FIG. 15) may be employed.

With this configuration as well, the proximal displacement member 450 at the retracted position is arranged at the rotational position by the first operation, and the relative displacement member 450 at the reference position is arranged at the extended position by the second operation. The displacement members 440 and 450 as a whole can be sufficiently visually recognized by the player, and the production effect can be exhibited sufficiently. , the base side displacement member 440 in the rotating position is arranged in the retracted position by the first operation, so that both the displacement members 440 and 450 are made smaller as a whole, and the space required to accommodate the displacement members is reduced. can.

In the protruding operation unit 400 of the above embodiment, the distal end side of the proximal displacement member 450 is located further than the distal end side of the relative displacement member 450 when the proximal displacement member 440 is arranged at the retracted position (see FIG. 17(b)). 17(b)), but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to employ a configuration in which it protrudes toward the decorative member 480 side (upper side in FIG. 17(b)) from the tip end side.

With this configuration as well, the rotational trajectories of both the displacement members 440 and 450 intersect with the decorative member 480, and the decorative member 480 is transmitted through the intersection so that both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be visually recognized. The presentation effect can be enhanced by displacing the members 440 and 450 . Furthermore, according to this configuration, when the relative displacement member 450 is extended (see FIG. 15), the area of the decorative portion 454 located in the front (front) can be further expanded, and the impact is further increased. can be improved.

In the compound action unit 500 of the above embodiment, the driven member 550 (connection groove 552a) and the driven member 560 (connection shaft 561b) are rotatable because the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 is formed in an elongated shape. Although the case where the driven member is connected in a slidably displaceable state has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. A configuration in which the slide displacement of 560 (connection shaft 561b) is disabled (that is, a configuration in which only rotation is permitted) may be adopted. With this configuration as well, when the driven member 560 is displaced relative to the driven member 550, the angle of the driven member 560 relative to the driven member 550 can be changed. can be changed to enhance the production effect.

In this case, the displacement regulating means constituted by the first guide groove 513 and the first pin 561a is meshed with a gear provided concentrically with the connection shaft 561b on the driven member 560 and the gear. A curved rack gear formed along an arc centered on the drive shaft 551a of the driven member 550 and disposed on the front case body 510 or the rear case body 520 may be used. As a result, when the driven member 560 is relatively displaced in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550, the relative angle of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be changed by rolling the rack gear. can.

In the compound action unit 500 of the above embodiment, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed in the front case body 510 and the rear case body 520, and the guide grooves 513 and 523 are inserted into the second guide grooves 513 and 523, respectively. Although the case where the 1-pin 561a and the connecting shaft 561b are formed in the driven member 560 has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. 560, and parts (members corresponding to the first pin 561a and the connecting shaft 561b) inserted through the guide grooves 513 and 523 are provided in the front case body 510 and/or the rear case body 520. can be This configuration also allows the driven member 560 to perform a combination of linear motion and rotary motion in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

In the compound action unit 500 of the above embodiment, the case where the first guide groove 513 is bored (opened) in the front case body 510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. may be formed, for example, as a concave groove having a U-shaped cross section. That is, it is sufficient that the first guide groove 513 has a shape capable of guiding the first pin 561a along the extending direction.

In the compound action unit 500 of the above embodiment, the case where the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are curved and extended and the connection groove 551a is extended linearly has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. On the contrary, while the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are extended linearly, the connection groove 551a is curved and extended. Also good. In particular, with respect to the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523, the case where the radius of curvature is set to an arc shape has been described, but the invention is not limited to this, and arc shapes having a plurality of curvature radii can be combined. It is of course possible to adopt a shape (for example, an S shape, etc.). As a result, the trajectory of the driven member 560 can be changed in a more complicated manner, so the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Specifically, for example, when the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to have a circular arc shape, the circular arc shape is set at the starting point of rotation of the driven member 550 about the shaft portions 553 and 554 in the rotation direction. Alternatively, it is preferable to make the radius larger (the curvature smaller) than the reference value in the state of being arranged at and near the terminal end. That is, the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 in the first range of the starting end and its vicinity or the terminal end and its vicinity of the second range is made larger than the reference value, or the radius of the first range and the second range It is preferably larger than the radius in the third range located between the ranges. As a result, in the initial stage of starting the driving of the driven member 550 in the stopped state by the driving motor 530, the load can be reduced and the driving can be started smoothly.

Alternatively, while the driven member 560 is made invisible by the front case body 510, the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to a value larger than the reference value, and a part of the driven member 560 is is exposed outside the area of the front case body 510 (made visible) until the entire driven member 560 is exposed outside the area of the front case body 510 (made visible), the first The radius of the guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 may be set to a value smaller than the reference value. According to this, in the former case, since the movement of the driven member 560 is not visually recognized by the player, the load on the drive motor 530 can be reduced without affecting the presentation effect. In the range where a part of the driven member 560 is shielded by the front case body 510 , the movement of the driven member 560 can be accelerated, so that the driven member 560 suddenly appears from the front case body 510 You can quickly hide behind the .

Alternatively, when the driven member 560 is in a horizontal posture (as viewed in the direction of the connecting shaft 561b (see FIG. 30), decoration is provided within a range defined by a pair of imaginary lines that are vertically inclined by 45 degrees with respect to a horizontal line that passes through the connecting shaft 561b. 562, the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to a value larger than the reference value, and while the driven member 560 exceeds the horizontal posture, The radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 may be set to a value smaller than the reference value. According to this, in a region where it is relatively necessary to support the self weight (action of gravity) of the driven member 560 with the driving force of the drive motor 530, the radius is increased so that each of the guide grooves 513 and 514 has n frictional resistance and driven force. The influence of the inertial force due to the change in the posture of the member 560 can be reduced, and the load on the drive motor 530 can be reduced. Then, by reducing the radius, the change in the motion of the driven member 560 can be increased, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In the rotation operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the main body portion 651 and the front rendering portion 652 are integrated in the first rotating body 650, and the storage flange portion 653 is separate. Instead, a configuration in which the main body portion 651 and the storage flange portion 653 are integrated and the front effect portion 652 is separately provided to form the first rotating body 650 may be adopted. With this configuration as well, the structure for rotatably holding a plurality of rotating bodies and the assembly process can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced.

In the rotation operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the case where the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front rendering portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is formed with the front surface (front surface) as a flat surface has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. However, a part or all of the front surface may be replaced with a flat surface and may be of another shape. Other shapes include, for example, a surface having a plurality of irregularities, a surface formed with a waveform in cross section, an inclined surface, a curved surface, or a combination of these surfaces. When these other shapes are adopted, not only can the light emitted from the light emitting element 682 and transmitted through the inner peripheral side portion 662b be irregularly reflected or refracted, but also as the second rotating body 660 rotates, the irregularly reflected or refracted light can be caused. Since it is possible to give movement in the direction of refraction, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect (see FIG. 39).

In the rotating operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the case where the outer diameter dimension of the front effecting portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is set to a size that overlaps only a part of the front gear 646 when viewed from the front has been described ( 36), it is not necessarily limited to this, and the outer diameter dimension of the front rendering portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 may be set to a size that overlaps the entire front gear 646 in a front view. As a result, since the front gear 646 can be shielded by the front effect section 662, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for making the front gear 646 invisible to the player. If the front gear 646 can be made invisible to the player, the front gear 646 can be made to have a larger diameter, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in setting the gear ratio. Therefore, the change in rotation of the second rotating body 660 with respect to the first rotating body 650 can be increased.

In the rotating operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, description of the stop positions of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 has been omitted, but it may be configured as follows. That is, at least one or both of the front effecting portions 652 and 662 of the first rotating body 650 or the second rotating body 660 are shaped so as to have a shape capable of shielding the front gear 646 when viewed from the front. The rotation of the first rotating body 650 or the second rotating body 660 may be stopped at the phase position where the shaped portion is arranged in front of the front gear 646 . As a result, the front gear 646 can be made invisible to the player when the rotation of the first rotating body 650 or the second rotating body 660 is stopped.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

<Second embodiment>
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to FIGS. 40 to 97. FIG. In addition, in the second embodiment, control processing (processing related to game control such as display effects) executed by the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment will be described.

<Regarding the mechanical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. 1 is a front view, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of a pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 49) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 .

The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the background mode of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or when changing the details of the advance notice effect. be. Further, the frame button 22 may be configured to be used as a switch for driving a driving accessory or the like provided in the game machine, for example.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for the purpose, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. (not shown) are built-in. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails for guiding balls, pinwheels and rails 61 and 62, a general prize opening 63, a first The prize winning port 64, the second prize winning port 640, the electric accessory 640a, the variable prize winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled together, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed with a wood screw or the like from the front side. Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a winning opening is arranged and a shot ball is area).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 49) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin-made arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

In this pachinko machine 10, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, a lottery for special symbol 1 (first symbol) is performed, and when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the special symbol 2 ( The lottery for the first symbol) is performed, and when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 (hereinafter, special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 will be referred to as special symbol) performed for the ball entering the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640, special Whether or not the jackpot of the symbol is determined is determined, and when the jackpot of the special symbol is determined, the type of the jackpot is determined. When the jackpot of the special pattern is achieved, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds, or until 10 balls are won). ), and the opening is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out. As the jackpot type of the special pattern, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided, and after the special game state is finished, as an added value after the jackpot is finished, a game in accordance with these jackpot types is provided. (game value) is given to the player.

Also, when the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) is drawn, the variable display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds) is displayed. ~ 30 seconds, etc.), the special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first prize winning port 64 while the variable display of the special pattern is being performed on the first pattern display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the first. It is shown by the pattern display device 37 and is also shown by the third pattern display device 81 . Similarly, when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 while the special pattern is changing, the number of times the ball enters is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first pattern display device 37. Together, the third pattern display device 81 is also shown. The number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in identifiable display modes. Although the details will be described later, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that the number of held balls, the variable display mode of the special symbols, the determination result, etc. are easier to identify than the first symbol display device 37 for the player. A normal player is configured to play a game by looking at the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 .

When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first prize winning port 64 or the second winning prize port 640 remains, the lottery for the next special symbol is performed, and the lottery is performed. A variable display corresponding to is started. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the number of reserved balls in the second winning opening 640 is given priority over the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64, and the special symbol 2 is drawn. , the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. Therefore, the lottery for the reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is configured to be executed when there is no reserved ball in the second winning opening 640 . While the variation of the special symbol 2 is being performed, the variation of the special symbol 1 is not performed. That is, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are configured so that there is no period during which they fluctuate at the same time.

In this embodiment, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are configured not to change at the same time, but are not limited to this, and may be configured to change at the same time. By configuring in this way, lotteries for more games can be executed in a short time, and the determination results can be displayed, so that the game can be played more time-efficiently.

Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the second prize winning port 640 is in an open state in which a game ball can be guided to the entrance into which the game ball enters, and in which entry of the ball into the entrance is regulated. It has an electric accessory 640a having a wing member that can rotate between the closed state and the closed state. This electric accessary product 640a is operated from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time based on the winning of a normal symbol (second symbol), which will be described later. In addition, normally, it is held in an upright state so as to prevent game balls from entering from both sides of the ball entrance, and to prevent game balls from entering from between the blade members. , a first winning port 64 is arranged. Therefore, the second winning hole 640 is usually configured so that a ball can be entered only when the electric accessory 640a is operated in the open state. Therefore, normally, the game ball is easily entered into the first winning hole 64, and the player plays the game by shooting the game ball to enter the first winning hole 64.例文帳に追加matter.

The special prize winning port 65a which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state is provided immediately below the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, during the special game state, since the player hits the ball to win the special winning hole 65a, many balls enter the first winning hole 64 as well. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is shifting to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first winning hole 64 becomes maximum (4 times).

On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, a determination of whether or not the normal symbol hits is performed. There are two types of wins for normal symbols: normal wins and long-time wins in which the opening time and the number of times of opening increase, respectively, compared to the normal win. When a normal win or a long win of a normal pattern occurs, the electric accessory attached to the second winning port 640 is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 2 seconds), and the second winning port 640 is opened. The ball will be in a state where it is easy to enter. In other words, when the normal symbol wins, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol becomes easier.

Further, when the lottery for the normal design (second design) is performed, the fluctuation display of the normal design is started in the second design display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has passed, A normal symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the through gate 67 while the second pattern display device 83 is performing the variable display, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37. It is also shown in the second symbol reservation lamp 84 . When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate 67 remains, the lottery for the next normal symbol is performed, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. be.

As described above, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided as the jackpot types of special symbols. When "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16R jackpot). After that, in the case of "jackpot A", as an added value after the jackpot is finished, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state ( During the special pattern definite change). On the other hand, for the "jackpot B", the probability of winning the normal pattern is increased from the end of the jackpot to the end of the lottery of the special pattern 100 times. Incidentally, even in the high-probability state, the winning probability of normal symbols is similarly increased and set.

Here, the "special symbol high probability state" refers to a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is increased, the so-called special symbol probability state (during the probability change of the special symbol), in other words, the special game state (16R jackpot ). On the other hand, if it is not a "high probability state of special symbols", it is called "low probability state of special symbols", which is a state in which the probability of a big hit is lower than the variable state of special symbols, that is, the probability of a special symbol is a normal state. (Normal state of special symbols or low probability game state). In addition, "ordinary symbol time saving state" (ordinary symbol time saving medium or time saving game state) is a game state in which the winning probability of normal symbols is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640. Say. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of normal design", it is called "normal state of normal design" (normal game state). indicates that Hereinafter, the period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbols after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as the special symbol definite variable period.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A", the period from the end of the "jackpot A" to the start of the next jackpot is the probability variable period. times, 100 times, etc.) may be set as the probability variable period. Further, both the "jackpot A" and the "jackpot B" may be set to have a period of a predetermined number of times and a variable probability period. In addition, the variable probability period may of course be a variable probability period for a predetermined period of time (2 minutes, 5 minutes, etc.).

When the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by turning on the power, etc., it is always set to the "low probability state of special symbols". After that, when the special symbol hits the jackpot, the game shifts to the "special symbol high probability state" and the "ordinary symbol time-saving state".

It should be noted that while the "special symbol high probability state" is continuing, a new special symbol jackpot occurs, and if the jackpot type is "jackpot A", the "special symbol high probability state" further increases. It is continued until the start of the next big winning game after the end of the big winning of the new special pattern.

A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 provides display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether or not the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 that is performed when the ball enters the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (start winning) is being executed depending on the lighting state. By showing, a variable display is performed, and as a stop design after the end of the fluctuation, a special design 1 (first design) or a special design 2 (first design) according to the lottery result of the special design is displayed by the lighting state, The lighting state indicates the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640, respectively.

While the variable display of the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the ball enters the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. When the ball is hit, the number of hits is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81 . In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. In addition, the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, and blue). Depending on the combination of the emitted colors, various game states (high-probability state of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved with a small number of LEDs. , etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but also if it is a big hit, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to B) is shown.

For the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, separate dedicated LEDs 37a are allocated for displaying the symbol and for displaying the number of reserved balls, respectively. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it possible for the player to distinguish between the special symbols 1 and 2 in a more comprehensible manner.

The game area is also provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 (starting winning), this triggers a special pattern (first pattern) is displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later. columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 displays the display of the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 40(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.40(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen.

The third pattern is composed of main patterns of numerals "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 49) to be described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbols is "jackpot A", a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" are stopped and displayed together. In addition, if it is a "jackpot B", a variable display is performed in which even-numbered "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" main symbols are aligned.

As shown in FIG. 40(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The lower 1/3 is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, main symbols are arranged in ascending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. Approximately the center of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and the third symbols stop on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 during each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is divided into three equal sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered in the first winning hole 64, and the small area Ds2 , and the small area Ds3 is an area for displaying the notice effect image, and the small area Ds3 is an area for displaying the number of pending balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed among the balls that entered the second winning hole 640. is.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 40(b), a total of three main patterns of the third pattern are stop-displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, when the variable display is performed, in addition to the main symbols displayed in the center, the main symbols arranged before and after the main symbols are also displayed so that a maximum of 9 main symbols are displayed. In some cases. In the secondary display area Ds, one "●" symbol is displayed for one reserved ball, and reserved symbols are displayed corresponding to up to four reserved balls for each of special pattern 1 and special pattern 2. Is displayed. That is, a maximum of eight reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In this embodiment, the same reserved design (design) is used for the special design 1 and the special design 2, but this is not the only option. Symbol 2 may be configured to be displayed as a “□” symbol).

Thereby, the reserved balls of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, that is, the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 can be easily identified and displayed. In addition, since the display mode of the held ball entering the second winning hole 640 is displayed differently depending on the winning type of the normal symbol, the player can easily discriminate that the held ball is generated after winning for a long time. be able to.

In the present embodiment, in the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the above-described main symbols, reserved symbols, etc., a notice effect display such as character display and characters, etc. Display of the number of fluctuations, etc. are displayed as appropriate. Further, when the reserved pattern is not displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is suspended up to four times. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1 or Ds3, the number of reserved balls may be displayed as a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the number of reserved balls may be displayed in four divided areas. It may be displayed in a manner (for example, color or lighting pattern) that differs by the amount. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Continuously, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44, the display mode of the pending effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 will be described. In the second embodiment, by changing and displaying the display mode of the reserved design of the special design 1 or the special design 2, it is configured to inform the determination result of the game and the selected variation pattern type. . In this embodiment, a normal holding effect as shown in FIG. 41 and an 8-piece effect as shown in FIG. 42 are set respectively. As for the normal pending effect, as shown in FIGS. 41(a) to 41(b), when the number of pending items is less than 8, one of the pending symbols is changed to a symbol displayed as "push". is displayed (FIG. 41(a)). After the "push" symbol is variably displayed, when the player presses the frame button 22, the symbol is variably displayed as the "△" symbol (see FIG. 41(b)).

In the present embodiment, when a reserved pattern in which super reach is selected is stored in the stored reserved patterns, or when a reserved pattern in which the winning judgment result is a hit is stored, a normal reserved pattern is executed by lottery. When the lottery is drawn, the pending symbol is changed to the "push" symbol and displayed as shown in FIG. 41(a). The "push" symbol is a notification pending symbol that notifies the player to press (operate) the frame button 22 . As long as the frame button 22 is not pressed, the notification reserved pattern is displayed while maintaining the display mode of the notification reserved pattern until the reserved pattern starts to fluctuate.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured such that the notification pending pattern is displayed until the fluctuation starts, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the notification pending pattern may be displayed only for a certain period of time. In addition, the normal holding effect is configured to be executed by lottery when a super ready-to-win holding pattern is stored and when a jackpot holding pattern is stored, but it is not limited to that. (For example, in the case of normal reach, out of reach, etc.), it may be constructed so as to be executed by lottery. It is also possible to set a variety of patterns to be displayed by changing from the notification pending pattern, and to notify the success/failure determination result, the reach type, etc., according to the pattern type, color, and the like. In addition, by structuring the normal suspension performance to be easily drawn when the success/failure determination result is a big win, a big win can be more expected when the normal suspension performance is displayed.

Next, referring to FIG. 42, the 8 effects will be described. In this embodiment, when the number of pending is maximum 8, it is determined whether or not to execute 8 effects (see FIGS. 42(a) to 42(b)) using all 8 reserved symbols, When it is determined that 8 effects are to be executed, as shown in FIG. 42(a), all reserved symbols are changed to "push" notifying reserved symbols and displayed. Then, at the right end, a notification mode (a notification mode that is not a reserved pattern) showing the characters ``Push it!!'' is displayed to urge the player to press the frame button 22.

When the player depresses the frame button 22 during the period during which the 8 effects are being executed, the notification pending symbols are displayed one by one while being changed into characters as shown in FIG. 42(b). Here, each time the frame button 22 is pressed once, one notification suspension pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The variable order is configured to vary in order from the notification pending design displayed on the left.

Whether or not to execute the 8 performances is determined by lottery when there is a super-reach pending memory or a jackpot winning/failure judgment result among the 8 stored pending patterns. be done.

In the 8 reserved performance, the player is notified by characters using 8 reserved symbols. Specifically, when the characters "Big Win!!!!" are displayed, it is notified that there is a pending memory with a hit/fail determination result as a big win (it is confirmed that a big win will be made) among the eight pending memories. is doing. On the other hand, if the characters "Jump !!!?" It informs that it is undetermined that another reserved memory is stored.

With this configuration, when the player presses the frame button 22 once after the notification pending symbols of the eight effects are displayed, the leftmost notification pending symbol is changed to "large" and displayed. be done. By displaying this character, the player first expects the character "big hit" and then presses the frame button 22 . Here, when "hi" is displayed, next, the frame button 22 is pressed and the character "ri" is expected to be displayed. In this way, the seven notification pending patterns are variably displayed, and when the character "Big Win!!!" is displayed, the last remaining notification pending pattern (the rightmost reserved pattern) is "! Expectations for the jackpot will increase as it will be variable. After that, the player can determine the notification result by operating the frame button 22 . Thus, in the 8-piece holding effect, the player can play the game while expecting the character to be displayed next every time the frame button 22 is pressed, and the player can be entertained.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the reserved balls are digested and the variation starts, the remaining notification reserved symbols changed by the 8 effects are maintained and displayed. From the characters, it is possible to predict what characters (notification modes) have been set.

In the present embodiment, since eight reserved balls are stored, an effect advantageous to the player is executed. can be done. Specifically, usually, when a variation pattern with a long variation time such as Super Reach (high expectations for a big hit) is selected, the player may stop shooting the game ball and play the game. However, during this period, it is also a period during which the reserved balls are likely to accumulate, so that the player can continue the game without stopping the shooting of the game balls so that the 8 effects will be executed even when the game balls are lost. can.

Further, it may be configured such that, for a certain period of time after the execution of the 8 performance, the 8 performance is executed when the 8 reserved balls are stored. By constructing in this way, the player can continue shooting the game balls to play the game in order to generate more reserved balls.

Also, the notification mode (characters to be displayed) determined at the timing when the 8 effects are executed may be changed according to the determination result when a new reserved ball is generated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of determining the timing at which the player changes the notification pending pattern.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44, a composite display effect displayed by the third pattern display device 81 in the second embodiment will be described. Synthetic display effect is that when the ready-to-win display mode is reached, the secondary symbol (blank symbol "△") is changed to the "push" symbol after the main symbol that is out of the middle symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, the "push" pattern moves to the center of the third pattern display device 81, and is synthesized and displayed in a large "push" pattern. After that, when the player presses the frame button 22, the combination of the main symbols indicating the winning/losing determination result is displayed again. Specifically, if the result of the win/fail judgment is a win, a combination indicating a big win such as "777" is displayed. On the other hand, if it is out, it is displayed with a symbol indicating the loss such as "717".

FIG. 43(a) shows a state in which the fluctuation pattern of the composite display mode is displayed, the ready-to-win display mode is the "7" symbol, and the middle symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Other than the variation pattern of the composite display mode, when reaching the ready-to-win state, the medium pattern is variably displayed (dynamically displayed) beyond the ready-to-win pattern. That is, the ready-to-win pattern is once displayed by scrolling through the effective line for ready-to-win. However, in the variation pattern of the combined display mode, the ready-to-win pattern does not pass through the effective ready-to-win line and is temporarily stopped before it. That is, the reach period is set shorter than the normal reach display mode.

As shown in FIG. 43(b), after the "5" symbol before the ready-to-win symbol stops on the effective ready-to-win line, three seconds later, the secondary symbol is arranged between the main symbols in the left and right symbol rows. A symbol (blank symbol "Δ") is displayed by changing it to a small "push" symbol notification symbol. Among the variation patterns of the synthetic display mode, the variation pattern of the pseudo-synthetic display mode is configured so as not to change to the synthetic display mode after being changed to this notification pattern. In this case, by pressing the frame button 22, an effect is executed in which the stopped middle symbol "5" symbol is changed again.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44(a), in the variation pattern that is changed to the synthetic display mode, the "push" symbol is displayed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81, and the "5" symbol of the middle symbol row is displayed. displayed by moving toward After that, as shown in FIG. 44(b), the "5" symbol is covered and a large "push" symbol is displayed. Since the variation pattern of the synthetic display mode in which the large "push" symbol is displayed is configured to be extremely easily selected when the result of the winning/failure determination is a big win, the player can enjoy the display of this synthetic display mode. , you can have high expectations for the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 45 to 48, time effects in this embodiment will be described. The time effect means that the pachinko machine 10 is changed to a preset dedicated background image for a predetermined period of time (five minutes in this embodiment) every predetermined period of time after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. This is the effect mode to be executed. In the present embodiment, the timer means 292 comprising an RTC (real time clock) is provided, and an internal power supply (battery in this embodiment) dedicated to the timer means 292 is provided. Timekeeping can be continued even in the state of no supply. Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured, by setting the same time (for example, the current time) to the clock means and manufacturing it, power is supplied to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 at the same time. , the same input time information can be obtained between the pachinko machines 10. By configuring in this way, the time production can be executed synchronously among the plurality of pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加

FIG. 45 is a timing chart showing the timing of executing the time presentation period. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the current time information is set by the time setting process (FIG. 69, S1214) in the start-up process (see FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, which will be described later. obtained from Based on the acquired time information, a time production period (production mode B) is set when 55 minutes have passed. It should be noted that, during the period until this time production period is set, the normal game machine period (production mode A) is set. The time presentation period is normally set to 5 minutes, and when this 5 minutes elapse, the normal game period is set.

Here, when 5 minutes of the time performance period elapses, it is determined whether or not the reserved memory stored at that point in time or the changing special pattern is set to give a big win as a result of winning/failure determination, and a big win is made. When one is set, a time effect extension period (effect mode C) is set with the time until the change ends.

FIG. 46(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the time effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the remaining time in the time effect period is 180 seconds. During the time presentation period, the background image becomes a display mode in which a dedicated school of fish is displayed.

FIG. 46(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the remaining time in the time effect period is 3 seconds. In the example of FIG. 46(b), the actual third pattern is reduced and is variably displayed in the lower right portion of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. In the example of FIG. Then, a performance symbol similar to the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a disengagement. In this case, the performance pattern is displayed with a slight sway to inform that the design is not completely stopped and displayed. In this way, it is rare that the end timing of the time effect period and the timing of stopping the variation of the third pattern match, but by switching to the effect pattern and displaying it, the third pattern appears as if it were stopped. , the other pachinko machines 10 can be made to think that the third pattern is stopped and displayed at the same timing. In addition, the production design is also displayed when the stop timing of the third design coincides with the time production period. By configuring in this way, the display mode at the end of the time presentation period becomes constant, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

When the effect pattern is stopped and displayed 3 seconds before the remaining period, as shown in FIG. 47(a), an omen display mode is displayed in which the effect pattern is slightly trembling and displayed for the remaining 3 seconds. Then, after the characters "Super school of fish time" indicating that it is the time rendering period, the notification mode "end?" After that, when the time effect extension period is set, as shown in FIG. 47(b), the text "Super school of fish time extended!!" is displayed to notify that the time effect period has been extended, and the background image of the school of fish is displayed. is displayed again. In this case, at the same time as the start of the extension, the performance symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner, and the player is notified as if a new special symbol has started to vary. In addition, since the extended period is the period until the variable display for the big win is finished, the remaining time (115 seconds in the example of FIG. 47(b)) is displayed during that period.

In this embodiment, when the time production period is extended, the time production is extended because the reservation memory that becomes a big hit is set or the fluctuation has already started (during fluctuation). This means that the player 4a is notified of a big win. Here, in the time effect period, the same effect is executed synchronously between the same pachinko machines 10, and the effect (see FIG. 47(a)) of whether or not the extension period is set at the same timing is displayed. be done. As a result, it can be determined that the pachinko machine 10 to which the extended period is set will also win big from other players, and the gambling spirit of the other players can be aroused.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48, when the extended effect is not set, the characters "Super Fish School Time End!!" are displayed to notify that the time effect period has ended. After that, when the third pattern is fluctuating, the performance pattern is stop-displayed after being fluctuated for the same time as the remaining fluctuation time of the third pattern. From the next variation, the reduced display of the third pattern is canceled and the third pattern is displayed in the normal size. By configuring in this way, even when the time presentation period ends, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, when the timing of the stop display of the third pattern coincides with the end timing of the time effect period, the reduced display of the third pattern is canceled and displayed from the start of the next variation.

In addition, when the fluctuation has already ended at the end timing of the time effect period and the pending memory is not stored, the portent effect is not executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as a condition for setting the extension, it was supposed to be a big hit, but not limited to that, it may be the case that a pending memory is set in which a variation pattern that becomes a super reach is selected, It may be configured to be set when a lottery is executed and a win is won.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. The second symbol display device 83 variably displays by indicating whether or not the lottery of the normal symbols performed with the passing of the ball through the through gate 67 is being executed by the lighting state, and stops after the variability ends. As a symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the through gate 67, a variable display is provided in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately lit. done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize winning opening 640 operates for a predetermined period of time. It is configured to be in a state (opened), and as a result, a state in which a ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640 is achieved. The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol reservation lamp 84 is lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37 And part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, as with the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640, the maximum number of balls that pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but is three times or less, or five times or more. number of times (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be performed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first prize winning port 64 and a second prize winning port 640 through which balls can enter are arranged. When the ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640, the first ball hole switch and the second ball hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on. Due to the turn-on of the first ball entrance switch and the second ball entrance switch, the main controller 110 draws a special symbol 1 and a special symbol 2, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. is indicated by the LED 37a. Also, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when balls enter.

In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls entering the first prize hole 64 and the second prize hole 640 are the same, but the number of prize balls may be different. For example, when a ball enters the first winning hole 64, it is assumed that three balls are awarded, and when a ball enters the second winning hole 640, four balls are awarded. It is also possible to set the number of prize balls to be larger than the number of prize balls for one winning hole 64 .

On the other hand, when the number of prize balls in the second prize-winning opening 640 is set smaller than that in the first prize-winning opening 64, it is possible to design so that more game balls win the second prize-winning opening 640 during the variable probability period or time saving. As a result, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 can be maintained at a larger number, and an efficient game can be played. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the game time in the variable probability period during the time saving, and to increase the sales on the game parlor side.

A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged below the second prize winning port 640, and a laterally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery for special symbols performed by the main controller 110 results in a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses so that the big win stops. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls than normal is paid out. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large open opening to be opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first pattern display device 37 is lit, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is opened. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. You may make it form.

Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that have not entered any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out hole 66.例文帳に追加The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 49). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 49) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, referring to FIG. 49, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 52, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. A first winning type counter C2 used for , an initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 67). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) for storing the special symbol 1 reserved ball, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) is provided, and a special symbol reserved ball execution area common to special symbols 1 and 2 is provided. is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, each value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the first winning hole 64, respectively. Similarly, for each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203 b , similar values are stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second winning hole 640 .

In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing when the gate 67 is passed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 299, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 299. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 57).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt processing), and the RAM 203 is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 When the value of the random number for the big win set by the symbol big win random number table matches, it is determined as the special symbol big win. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is for when the probability of special symbols is low (the period when the probability of special symbols is low) The number of random numbers that will be the jackpot included in each type is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high. A special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for special symbol high probability and a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for special symbol low probability are stored in ROM 202 of main controller 110. is provided in

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first winning hole 64, the special symbol 1 is reserved in the RAM 203. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that will result in a special symbol jackpot, that is, if it is a random number that will result in a loss of the special symbol, The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the 1-symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. The display mode will be the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In this embodiment, two types of jackpot types, "jackpot A" and "jackpot B", are set. is determined. Then, a display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 299. FIG. In this first winning random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that become a jackpot for special symbols when the probability of special symbols is low. It is stored in the jackpot random number table. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that become a big hit is 3 among the total number of random number values of 300, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/100".

On the other hand, when the probability of special symbols is high, there are 30 random numbers that are special symbol jackpots, and the values are "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299" is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability stored in In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 30 out of the total number of random numbers of 300, so the probability that the special symbol will be a big hit is "1/10".

In addition, in the present embodiment, the random number value to be a jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability time and the random number value to be the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability time. In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers are set for each jackpot. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random value will be input from the outside and the jackpot will be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state), the random number value for the big win is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that fraud can be suppressed.

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. In this first win type counter C2 set in a jackpot type selection table (not shown), the jackpot type when the random number is "0 to 59" is "jackpot A". Also, when the value is "60 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B".

Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of winning (jackpot A, jackpot B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first winning type counter C2. The random number for determining the special symbol jackpot type from the value (random number) of the first hit type counter C2 is set by the special symbol jackpot type table (see FIG. 52(b)). The table is provided in ROM 202 of main controller 110 .

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called short-time out, long-time out, normal reach, and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 67), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) storing a random value for determining one variation time of pattern variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is

In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern dedicated to the special symbol 1 is set for each game state (normal game state, time saving game state, probability variable game state). It should be noted that the selection of the variation pattern in the voice ramp control device 113 will be described later in more detail, but in the main control device 110, the result of the determination, the number of pending balls, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 Then, the rough fluctuation pattern contents (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and fluctuation time are determined, and a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined contents is set.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52(c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is any one of 5 to 20, the normal symbol determined to be a hit. On the other hand, when the probability of the normal design is high, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is any one of 5 to 204, it is determined to be a normal winning of the normal design.

In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency with which the electric accessory 640a is operated can be reduced, and the frequency with which the ball enters the second winning hole 640 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the profit of the game parlor by increasing the consumption of the game balls by the player, mainly by making the ball enter the first winning hole 64 . On the other hand, during the short time period and variable probability period with high probability, it is possible to give an opportunity to operate the electric accessory 640a with a probability of "1/1.2", increasing the chance of entering the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加be able to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress consumption of game balls by the player and set a game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play a game aiming at a game with a high probability, and can spend more time playing the game.

When the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal pattern, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is obtained and the normal pattern is displayed on the second pattern display device 83 as a variable display. is run for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), a symbol of “○” is illuminated. Then, if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is "5 to 20", the second winning opening 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds×1 time" as a normal winning. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the second winning hole 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when normal symbols are won. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the normal winning random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 53(a)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal pattern, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal pattern is displayed on the second pattern display device 83 while the normal pattern is variable. is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be elected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the second prize winning opening 640 is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". In this way, when the normal pattern has a high probability, compared to when the normal pattern has a low probability, the variable display time is very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and the opening period of the second winning opening 640 becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds×1 time→2 seconds×2 times”, so that the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640 . In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the second winning hole 640 is opened only for "2 seconds x 2 times" when normal symbols are won. and the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 67).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 49, the description is continued. The RAM 203 includes various counters shown in FIG. 50, a stack area storing the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 67) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 41) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 65) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 51(b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number. It has a counter 203d, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a time saving medium counter 203g, a variable probability flag 203h, and other memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the special symbol 1 and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each value of the per-1 random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first winning port 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to reserved fourth area) are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored. Also, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the special symbol 2.

Like the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Among the areas in which the data is stored, the area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in ascending order. That is, similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Shift processing is performed to pack the data into a reserved area with an area number that is one smaller. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first winning port 64 (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases, the counter 203d reaches a maximum value of 4. are added (see S404 in FIG. 61). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S307 in FIG. 60).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command. The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on the winning of the second winning hole 640, and other configurations are the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Detailed description is omitted.

The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the variable display suspended in the main controller 110 by the suspended ball number command sent from the main controller 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 suspended ball number counter 203d is changed. You can get the value of the number of balls itself. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the special symbol pending ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the actual variable display pending ball number held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and every time the number of held balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of held balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203f counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to 4 times. A counter that counts up to The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero. See S704 in FIG. 64). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 63).

When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of holding variable display in normal symbols M) is less than 4, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 64). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (Fig. 64 S703: No).

The time-saving medium counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns, and if the value of the time-saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns. If the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols. The initial value of the time-saving counter 203g is set to zero, and every time a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110 and a special symbol jackpot is determined, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. be done. That is, when a special symbol jackpot is won, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is newly set regardless of the value of the time saving medium counter 203g.

The probability variation flag 203h is a flag indicating that the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. When the variable probability gaming state is set as the gaming state, the variable probability flag 203h is set to ON. This variable probability flag 203h is set to OFF when the jackpot B is won. It is set to off in the initialized state.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 65) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the background mode displayed at the time of super reach. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, and the display control device 114 is instructed so as to change the content of the presentation.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a as shown in FIG. 53(a). In addition, as shown in FIG. 53(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, and a normal symbol reserved ball. Number counter 223d, fluctuation start flag 223e, stop type selection flag 223f, production counter 223g, pending production flag 223h, 8 production flags 223i, set time storage area 223j, production mode storage area 223k, normal period flag 223m, start period flag 223o, extension production flag 223p, extension production time storage area 223q, button production flag 223r, button production counter 223s, and other memory area 223z are provided at least.

The prize winning information storage area 223a is an area in which prize winning information is stored corresponding to the reserved ball based on the winning command output from the main controller 110 . As the winning information, various kinds of information such as win/fail determination results, variation patterns, and stop types are set.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a storage area in which the reserved ball number of the special symbol 1 is stored based on the reserved ball command. The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is a storage area in which the reserved ball number of the special symbol 2 is stored based on the reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is a storage area in which the normal symbol reserved ball number is stored based on the reserved ball command.

The variation start flag 223e is a flag indicating that it is time to start varying the third symbol.

The stop type selection flag 223f is a flag indicating the stop type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the stop type command output from the main controller 110. FIG.

The performance counter 223g is a counter used in the sound lamp control device 113 for determination of details of various performances and variation patterns, various lotteries, and the like. This effect counter 223h is repeatedly updated within the range of 0 to 198 in the main process.

The pending effect flag 223h is a flag indicating that the normal pending effect is being executed. It is set to ON when the normal pending performance is executed, and is set to OFF based on the timing when the pending pattern starts to fluctuate.

The 8 effect flag 223i is a flag indicating that the 8 effect is being executed. It is set to ON based on the determination that 8 effects are to be executed, and is turned OFF based on the timing at which the 8th reserved symbol displayed when the 8 effects are executed starts to fluctuate. is a flag that is set to

The set time storage area 223i is a storage area in which time information for executing the time presentation period is stored. In this set time storage area 223i, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the time setting process (FIG. 69, S1214) in the start-up process (see FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 113 of the sound lamp control device 113 is stored. In S1222, the information of the time presentation period is set for 24 hours.

The effect mode storage area 223k is a storage area in which information on effect mode A, effect mode B, and effect mode C is stored (set). As for the production mode, if the current production mode is the normal game period (outside the time production period), production mode A is stored, if it is the time production period, production mode B is stored, and if it is the extended time production period, production is performed. Mode C is stored.

The normal period flag 223m is a flag indicating that the normal game period is started. By setting the normal period flag 223m to ON, the background image is changed from the time presentation period or the extended time presentation period to the background image corresponding to the normal game period. In that case, after the background image shown in FIG. 48 is displayed, the background image showing the normal game period is displayed.

The start period flag 223o is a flag indicating that the time presentation period is started. By setting the time effect period to ON, a background image of a super school of fish (see FIG. 46(a)) indicating the time effect period is set in the third symbol display device 81 .

The extension effect flag 223p is a flag indicating that the time effect extension period is started. When this extended time effect period is set, a background image showing the extended time effect period shown in FIG. 47(b) is set.

The extended presentation time storage area 223q is a storage area for storing information indicating the calculated time until the end of the variation that becomes a big hit when the time presentation extension period is set. Based on the value of the extended performance time storage area 223q, the remaining time of the time performance extension period is displayed.

The button effect flag 223r is a flag indicating that a variation pattern for executing a button effect is selected. It is determined by this flag that the button effect is to be executed.

The button effect counter 223s is a counter for selecting the display mode of the button effect.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 71) of the audio ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) is controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 65).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR-type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND-type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 83) executed after the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 84) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 57) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one frame of a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 85(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by a player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see FIG. 83).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (not shown) as the first image. 3 is displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of , a variation image at the time of power-on with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a variation image at the time of power-on with an "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the variation period. Medium, alternately displayed repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. The result is determined, and if it is a ``jackpot with a special pattern'', an image showing it is displayed for a certain period after stopping the variable performance, and if it is a ``missing special pattern'', the image showing it is stopped from the variable performance. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image area is displayed. The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and the images showing "O" and "X" are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 as follows. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can.

Returning to FIG. 54, the description is continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main patterns (see FIG. 40) with numerals "0" to "9", which are the third patterns, are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640, although the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect, the third symbol display device 81 changes. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the performance is not started immediately.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by storing data corresponding to these characters in the character design area 235e. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data pre-resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, a storage image data discrimination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect, etc. , an ending effect, and a display data table corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

In addition, since the first prize winning port 64 is a prize winning port in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, a jackpot of normal symbols is generated and the electric accessory is released, and the ball enters the second prize winning port. As it becomes easier to enter 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand or in a state in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if a game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table.

The MPU 231 selects one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (sea, beach, preparation period background, time production background) according to the background type. A rear image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the passage of time.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 55) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 57), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order defined in the display data table, so the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in a conventional pachinko machine, if a program to be executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81. - 特許庁

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that should be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 56). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 56).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 56, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 57) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 56, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81 . This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 231 (see S2005 in FIG. 83). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S3605 in FIG. 95(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 85(b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 85(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2308 in FIG. 85(b) S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 86 to 91) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 92 to 94) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S3501 in FIG. 95(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 95(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 96) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 57) is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 draws an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 57), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 57) describing the contents of image rendering instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 85(b)). )), pointer update processing (see S3105 in FIG. 70B) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 57), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ). , characters (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, . . . , error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed (FIG. 85(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3107 in FIG. 69). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S2002 in FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 96) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3713 in FIG. 96). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S3514 in FIG. 96). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing for that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. The information of the specified drawing object buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3802 in FIG. 97).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of drawing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the process (see FIG. 85B) is executed (see S3802 in FIG. 97).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 58 to 67. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and startup processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at intervals of 2 milliseconds). There are timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Processing and main processing will be described.

FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 299, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and then, A starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. After executing the through-gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and further, other processing that should be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. In the shooting control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the ball is shot on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the middle of a jackpot at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not being won (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), special symbol variation start processing for starting variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S203). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S204). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the stop type selection counter C3 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation If the time has not elapsed (S204: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S204: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S205). The stop symbols are set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S203), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , A lottery for special designs will be held. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of a special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the second winning type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B will be given.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lit. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S205 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot (S206). If the result of the lottery this time is a special pattern jackpot (S206: Yes), the jackpot type is determined from two types of special pattern jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B) (S207), and the jackpot type is determined. is a jackpot B, 100 is set in the counter 203g during time saving of the RAM 203 (S209). After that, the process of S210 is executed. Also, if the jackpot type is jackpot A, the game state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability, which is the variable probability period (S208). Then, the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S210), and the process is terminated.

In the process of S206, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special pattern (S206: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203g is 1 or more (S211), and the value of the time saving counter 203g is 1 If it is above (S211: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the counter 203g during time saving (S212), and this process is complete|finished. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 (S211: No), the process of S212 is skipped and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the special symbol variation start process (S203) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S203). This special symbol variation start process (S203) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 59) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58). Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common with the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (judgement of success or failure) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed. It is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 while performing.

In the special symbol variation start process (S203), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times of holding the variation display in the special symbol N2) is acquired. (S301). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S302), and if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 ( S302: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S303), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by calculation is set. (S304). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 67), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S304, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number area 203b is shifted (S305). In the process of S305, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After the process of S305 is executed, the process of acquiring the data of the execution area in the special symbol reserved ball number storage area is executed (S310).

On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S302: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S301 It is determined whether (N1) is 0 (S306). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S306: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S306, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S306: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1. (S307), and set a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation (S308). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 67), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S308, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S309). In the process of S309, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, each value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 stored in the execution areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are acquired. (S310).

Next, it is determined whether the game state is currently in the variable probability period (high probability game state) (S311). Whether or not it is the variable probability period is determined by determining whether a variable probability flag (not shown) is on. This variable probability flag is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot A. On the other hand, it is set to OFF based on the start of the jackpot game.

If it is determined that the probability is changing (S311: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability changing state of the special symbols, so the process proceeds to S312. In the processing of S312, based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S310 and the special symbol big winning random number table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol big winning is acquired ( S312). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with 30 random numbers stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. As described above, the random numbers for the special symbol jackpot are: , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299" are set, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and these winnings and If the random number matches, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S314.

On the other hand, in the processing of S311, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state with special symbols (S311: No), the processing of S313 is executed. In the process of S313, based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S310 and the special symbol big win random number table for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol big win is acquired ( S313). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random number values of 3 stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. Three random numbers of "7, 107, 282" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of the special symbol. , It is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S314.

In the process of S314, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the process of S312 or S313 is a special symbol jackpot (S314). Yes), based on the value of the second winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S310, the display mode at the time of the big winning is set (S315). More specifically, the value of the second hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S310 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table, and two types of special pattern jackpots (jackpot A, It is determined what the jackpot type is among the jackpots B). As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 59", it is determined to be a jackpot A (16R jackpot, probability variable period until the next jackpot after the jackpot game), and "60 to If it is in the range of 99", it is determined to be a jackpot B (16R jackpot, 100 times for a short period of time with normal symbols).

In the process of S315, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S316). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S316, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops at the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Note that the relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

In addition, in the variation pattern, the main controller 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for informing the success/failure determination result, and notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the variation time. The sound ramp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variable display mode to be actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the variation time and the success/failure determination result. Even if the main controller 110 is in the out-of-reach display mode, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch between the out-of-reach display mode and the non-out-of-reach display mode if the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

For example, as the variation pattern for failure, "miss (for long time)", "miss (for short time)", "miss normal reach", "miss super reach", and "miss special reach" are defined. ing. As fluctuation patterns for both jackpot A and jackpot B, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

In the processing of S314, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S314: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S317). In the process of S317, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is stored in the execution area. The variable time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S318). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the processing of S317, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3, the pattern fluctuation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. Determine the time of variation.

Next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S316 or S318 is set (S319). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the stop type selection counter C3 set in the process of S316 or S318 is set (S320). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 67). be. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S320 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 61, the starting winning process (S105) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), determines whether or not there is a win to the first winning opening 64 (start winning), and if there is a starting win, It is processing for holding the value indicated by various random number counters and processing for executing prefetching of the lottery result in the special design from the value indicated by the reserved various random number counters.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning hole 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning hole 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, if there is no winning to the first winning port 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning to the first winning port 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize to the first winning hole 64 (S401: Yes) and if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball 1 is added to the value (N1) of the number counter 203d (S404). Then, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 67), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the second hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. (S406) among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a. In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

Next, regarding S407 to S411, the processing for winning the first winning opening 64 is changed to the processing for winning the second winning opening 640 in each of the processes of S401 to S406 described above. Since similar processing is executed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. When a game ball wins the second winning hole 640 and is stored as a reserved ball, each value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the second winning type counter C2 is acquired and the corresponding special game ball is stored. It is stored in the empty reservation area of the symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b.

In this way, the values of the first winning random number counter C1 and the second winning type counter C2 similar to those of the special symbol 1 are obtained for the special symbol 2 based on the ball entering the second winning hole 640. Since the lottery can be executed by using a common random number for the special pattern 1 and the special pattern 2, the winning probability can be made constant even for the special pattern 1 and the special pattern 2.例文帳に追加

After executing the process of S411, a prefetch process is executed (S412). Details of the look-ahead processing (S412) will be described with reference to FIG. Then, a process for determining in advance each lottery result to be executed at the start of fluctuation is executed.

In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is selected based on the incoming ball, but it may be configured to be selected at the start of variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 without requiring a storage area for storing the values of each counter until the start of fluctuation. Further, among the counters, some counters (for example, only the stop type selection counter C3) may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. By configuring in this way, the counter related to the winning/failure determination can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counter not related to the winning/failure determination can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored can be reduced while maintaining the fairness of the game. can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 62, the look-ahead process (S412), which is one process in the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S412).

In the look-ahead process (FIG. 62, S412), first, based on the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1, it is determined whether the win/loss determination at the start of fluctuation is a big win (S501). Whether the game state at the time of start of fluctuation is normal game state (low probability) or probability variable game state (high probability game state) is determined in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area. 203a, it is judged by the hit or miss judgment of what is variably displayed before each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b and the hit type. When it is determined that the determination result is a big win (S501: Yes), a winning command indicating a big win is set (S502). On the other hand, in the processing of S501, if the determination result is not a jackpot (S501: No), it is determined whether or not it is a lose super reach (S503). If it is determined in the process of S503 that it is a losing super reach (S503: Yes), a winning command indicating that it is a losing super reach is set (S504). On the other hand, in the processing of S503, if it is determined that the win is not Super Reach (S503: No), a prize winning command indicating a loss is set (S505). In this way, before the start of the variation, the result of the judgment in advance is output as a prize winning command to the audio ramp control device 113 each time the ball is held, so the audio ramp control device 113 It is possible to recognize in advance the result of the judgment of success or failure and the type of hit. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113, based on the prize winning command, forewarning effect for informing the player of the winning judgment result of the reserved ball in advance (for example, changing the color of the reserved symbol to the color for notifying the winning judgment result) , an effect such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the result of the determination of whether or not the ball is on hold) can be executed. In addition, since one winning command is output for each reserved ball each time a reserved ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize establishment of a reserved ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 63, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the electric This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). The winning of the second symbol includes the second symbol display device 83 displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640. is included. As a result of the determination, if the second symbol is being hit (S601: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the second symbol is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is determined. is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the processing of S606, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S607).

Next, it determines whether it is a time saving state (S608), and when it is not a time saving state (S608:No), it transfers to the process of S611. On the other hand, if it is in the time-saving state (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a jackpot (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game.

In the process of S609, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S609: No), the process proceeds to S610. In the process of S609, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S610.

If it is during probability variation or time saving (that is, time saving state) (S609: Yes), if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot (S609: No), the second hit random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 Based on the value and the normal winning random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 52(c)), the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal winning random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 52(c)).

In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S607 and the low Based on the normal winning random number table 202c for probability time (see FIG. 52(c)), the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S611). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 52(c)) for low probability.

In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of special symbols, it is difficult to win the lottery of normal symbols. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened. This is to prevent the balls that are intended to enter the special winning hole 65a from entering the second winning hole 640 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning hole 65a is provided immediately below the second winning hole 640, even if the balls are prevented from entering the second winning hole 640 during the special symbol jackpot, the second winning hole 65a A lot of balls enter the 640. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is shifting to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the second winning hole 640 becomes maximum (4 times).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S610 or S611 is the winning of the second symbol (S612). Yes), the display mode at the time of winning is set (S613). Next, it is determined whether or not it is in the time saving state (S614).

And in the process of S614, when it determines with it being a time-saving state (S614:Yes), it is determined whether it is during the big hit of a special design now (S615). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this embodiment, during the special symbol jackpot, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second winning hole 640 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol wins, it is the same as when the normal symbol is lost. , the number of times of opening and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

In the processing of S615, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S615: No), the opening period of the electric accessary 640a associated with the second prize winning opening 640 is set to 1 second, and the number of openings is set to 2 times. (S616), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S614, when it determines with it not being a time saving state (S614:No), it transfers to the process of S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the second symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning hole 640 is The time is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of opening times is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

In the processing of S612, when it is determined that the second symbol is out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not it is in the time saving state (S619), and if it is in the time saving state (S619: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds ( S620), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is not in the time-saving state in the processing of S619 (S619: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second pattern display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing ends. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, when the probability of the second symbol is high, compared to when the probability of the second symbol is low, the variable display time is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds", Furthermore, the release period of the second prize winning port 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, so that the ball can easily enter the second prize winning port 640 .

On the other hand, in the processing of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed is determined (S622). The variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the second symbol display device 83 starts the variable display.

In the process of S622, if the variable time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 67) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. When the game ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or S618.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. is determined (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (S624: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 67) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and this process is finished.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

The ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703 : No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f 1 is added to the value (M) (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. area (S705). In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area. exit.

FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, referring to FIG. 66, the start-up process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S912.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S913, S914).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S913, S914) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S908). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral (S1001). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 58) or the starting winning process (see FIG. 61). In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the prize winning command set in the starting prize winning processing and the look-ahead processing (see FIG. 62). Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific prize winning port 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific prize winning port 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific prize winning port 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, although the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric role product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric role product 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product 640a is set by the processing of S625 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 63), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 640a is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S613 or S617 of FIG. 63 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S316 or the process of S318 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 60), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37 . In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S315 or the process of S317 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 60) ends, the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S315 or S317 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 60). Stop display (illumination display) is performed on the device 37 .

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 63), the variation display is performed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the symbol "o" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 63), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The current variation display is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S613 of the normal symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 63). do.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009). ), if the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the main process this time (S1009: No), the initial The value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (299 and 239 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the first hit The initial value of the random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the stop type selection counter C3 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1008, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 65 has been executed, so the power-off process after S1012 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1012), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1013). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the process of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the time of the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 82. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 68, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing of S1320 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 70, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S1317 in FIG. 70), it executes power-off processing in S1320. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S1320 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1320. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), it will transfer to S1204 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1320 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process of S1320, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined as normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1206). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1320 is executed (see S1317 in FIG. 70). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1320 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1320 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1209), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1210), an interrupt Permission is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S1208 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1210), interrupt permission is set. Then (S1211), the process proceeds to the main process. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from main controller 110 (S1212).

The reason why the clearing process of S1209 is skipped is that when the process of S1208 is reached from S1204 via the process of S1206, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1204, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

In the processing of S1214, time setting processing is executed (S1214). Details of this time setting process (S1214) will be described with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the time setting process (S1214), which is one process in the start-up process (see FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing this time setting process (S1214). In the time setting process (FIG. 69, S1214), the setting of the setting switch 291 is determined to determine whether or not to execute the time effect, and if the setting is to execute the time effect, time information is acquired from the RTC 292 Then, based on the time information, a process of setting the time presentation period in the set time storage area 223j is executed.

In the time setting process (FIG. 69, S1214), time information is first obtained from the RTC 292 (S1221). As for the time information acquired here, the value of "hour, minute" is acquired. The RTC 292 is a clock means having an internal battery, and when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the same current time is initially set to the pachinko machine 10 by a predetermined jig. The capacity of the internal battery is about three and a half years of operating time. In addition, the RTC 292 also has a calendar function, and is configured to be able to distinguish "year, month and day". Therefore, for example, on Christmas Day, the background image can be changed to a Christmas-only background image, or a special character such as Santa can be displayed.

Next, based on the acquired time information, the preparation period and the time performance period are calculated and set in the set time storage area 223j (S1222).

In this embodiment, based on the acquired time information, the 24-hour preparation period and the time performance period are calculated and set in the set time storage area 223j. 54 minutes during which the game is to be played may be set, the period may be counted down or counted up, and the preparation period may be set based on the lapse of 54 minutes. In addition to this, it is also possible to set the time after 54 minutes, and set the time of the next period when that time is reached. By configuring in this way, the required capacity of the storage area can be reduced. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be constructed at a lower cost.

Next, referring to FIG. 70, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S1301 was executed (S1301). If the time has not elapsed (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1312 without performing the processes of S1302 to S1311. In the process of S1301, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S1302 to S1311 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). On the other hand, it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1312, the variable display setting process of S1313, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) at short intervals. By executing the process of S1312 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S1313 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1303 to S1314 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S1302). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is the process of setting to perform production. Details of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1307) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1309, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and further a background image setting process is executed (S1311). After that, the process proceeds to S1312. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

In the process of S1312, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S1312). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process (FIG. 71, S1312) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed (S1313). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 . As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of S1313 ends, the processing of synchronous effect management processing (S1314) is executed. Details of this synchronous effect management process (S1314) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S1314 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1317). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1317 (S1317: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1319), and the power-off processing is executed (S1320). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S1321), and then the processing is infinitely looped. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1317 (S1317: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1318), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1318: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1318: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main process is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the pachinko hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination processing (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S1312). This command determination process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223e is turned on (S1402), and the data in the corresponding winning information storage area is shifted (S1403). After that, the advance notice selection process is executed (S1404), and the process proceeds to S1419.

Details of the advance notice selection process (S1404) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing this advance notice selection process (S1404).

In the announcement selection process (S1404), first, the value of the effect counter 223g is obtained (S1501). It is determined whether the effect mode set in the effect mode storage area 223k is the effect mode A (S1502). When it is determined that the effect mode A is set (S1502: Yes), the normal notice effect is selected based on the success/failure determination result and the value of the effect counter 223g (S1503). After that, a display notice command indicating the selected notice effect is set (S1504).

On the other hand, in the process of S1502, when the production mode A is not set (S1502: No), it is determined whether the production mode C is set (S1505). If the effect mode C is set (S1505: Yes), if the result of the win/fail judgment is a hit, the third symbol display device 81 shows a notice of a super school of fish in which a school of fish flows from right to left. A notice command is set (S1507).

On the other hand, if the production mode C is not set in the process of S1505 (S1505: No), or if the win/loss determination result is not hit in the process of S1506 (S1506: No), this process ends.

In this way, it is possible to switch the display forewarning command to be set based on the effect mode that has been set. In addition, since the notice performance is also determined based on the value of the performance counter 223g and the success/failure determination result at the time of start of fluctuation, there is no need to determine and select the display start timing, etc., thereby reducing the control load. be able to. Further, in the present embodiment, the timing for displaying the notice is predetermined by the variation pattern, and by setting the notice display command for display indicating the timing, the display control device 114 displays the notice at that timing. is set to be

Here, return to FIG. 71 and continue the description. After the advance notice selection process (FIG. 72, S1404) is executed, this process is ended and the process returns to the main process. If it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1405). When the stop type command is received (S1405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1406), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1407), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 74) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1405: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from main controller 110 (S1408). When the reserved ball number command is received (S1408: Yes), each reserved ball number is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are extracted. , respectively, are set (S1409).

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 (start winning), or when a lottery for special symbols is performed. Therefore, each time a start winning prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 are set by the processing of S1407. can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, respectively. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, etc., the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol Even if it deviates from the value of the 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 when the start winning is detected or when the special symbol lottery is selected. can be modified to match the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203 d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203 e of the main controller 110 . Incidentally, when the processing of S1407 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is issued. set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

On the other hand, if the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S1408: No), then it is determined whether or not a special symbol winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1410). Then, when the winning command is received (S1410: Yes), the winning command reception process is executed (S1411). After that, processing according to other commands is executed (S1419), and the processing returns to the main processing. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 (start winning), the values of the counters C1 to C3 are obtained in the main controller 110, and The obtained values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number storage area 203b, respectively. In addition, as soon as the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are obtained in the main control device 110, apart from the original special symbol jackpot lottery, from the values of the counters C1 to C3 obtained, the original Various information obtained when the lottery is performed is read ahead (predicted). When main controller 110 completes the prefetching, a winning command including various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by prefetching is sent from main controller 110 to sound lamp controller 113 .

Here, with reference to FIG. 73, the winning command reception process (S1411), which is the process within the command determination process (FIG. 71, S1312), will be described. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing the winning command reception process (S1411). In the winning command reception process, first, data is set in the winning information storage area corresponding to the received winning command (S1511), and the value of the effect counter 223g is obtained (S1512). Next, it is determined whether or not the 8 effect flag 223i is ON (S1513). When the 8 effect flag 223i is ON (S1514: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the 8 effect flag 223i is not ON, the total number of reserved balls in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is 8 (that is, the first special symbol and It is determined whether the number of balls held with the second special symbol is the maximum value (S1514).

When the number of reserved balls is 8 (S1514: Yes), based on the effect counter 223g, an 8 effect lottery is executed as to whether or not to perform the notice display mode executed for the 8 reserved balls ( S1519). Here, for the 8 effect lottery, it is determined whether the value of the effect counter 223g (counter updated in the range of 0 to 198) acquired in the process of S1512 is any one of "0 to 49".

When the result of the lottery for 8 effects is to execute the 8 effects (S1520: Yes), the 8 effects flag 223i is turned on to set the 8 effects (S1522). On the other hand, if the result of the lottery for 8 effects is not to execute the 8 effects (S1520: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S1514, if the pending number is not 8 (S1514: No), the normal pending effect is selected based on the value of the acquired effect counter 223g (S1515), and whether there is a change in the pending effect is checked. Determine (S1516). Here, when the received winning command is a win, if the value of the effect counter 223g is "0 to 99", the normal pending effect (the display mode of the pending symbol corresponding to the received winning command is shown in FIG. 41(a). ) is selected, and in other cases, the normal pending performance is not selected (that is, there is no change in the pending performance (the display mode of the pending pattern)).

When there is a change in the pending effect (S1516: Yes), the corresponding pending effect flag 223h is set to ON (S1517), and the selected normal pending effect is set (S1518). On the other hand, if there is no change in the pending effect (S1516: No), this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 71, the description continues. In the processing of S1410, when it is determined that the special symbol winning command has not been received (S1410: No), it is determined whether or not other commands have been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1419) and returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set to be sent to the device 114 .

As described above, in the present embodiment, different pending effects are set depending on the number of pending games. When the number of reserved coins reaches the maximum value, as shown in FIG. 42(a), an effect mode different from the normal reserved effect (see FIG. 41(a)) is displayed. You can play games with your will.

Also, as will be described later, in the normal pending effect, it is changed by operating the frame button 22 to the pending symbol that notifies the result of determination corresponding to the changed pending symbol. Specifically, if the result of the win/fail determination is a win, the star pattern is displayed, and if the selected variation pattern is super ready-to-win, a triangular pattern or the like is variably displayed by pressing the frame button 22. be. Further, in the 8-piece effect, the notification mode is determined based on the determination result of one of the 8 reserved symbols being displayed and the type of variation pattern for one of the reserved symbols. For example, a reservation for a big hit is stored, and as a notification mode based on this, if the frame button 22 is pressed for each of the eight PUSH symbols to variably display them, as shown in FIG. 42(b). , the text "Jackpot !!!" is displayed. FIG. 42(b) shows a state in which the PUSH symbols up to the second are displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, in the present embodiment, for 8 effects, when it is determined to execute 8 effects, the effect mode displayed according to the success or failure determination result in the set reservation memory and the selected variation pattern type However, it is not limited to that, based on the fact that the number of pending is 8, it is determined whether or not to execute the 8 production, and when it is decided to execute the 8 production changes the reserved symbol display to a display mode as shown in FIG. 42(a). When a reservation memory is set in the reservation memory in which the winning judgment result is a jackpot, a notification mode indicating a jackpot (for example, "big win!!!!") is set. On the other hand, when the result of the success/failure determination is not stored as a big win, a notification mode (for example, "big win determined???") is set to expect a big win, and the frame button 22 is pressed. If the held ball has been digested before and a new held ball is stored, it may be configured to change and set the notification mode set according to the judgment result of the held ball. In this case, if the hit/fail judgment result of the newly established held ball is a big hit, it is configured to newly set a notification mode that suggests a big hit (for example, a big hit is decided!) as a notification mode. good too. Thereby, the player can enjoy the pleasure of deciding the timing of pressing the frame button 22 .

Next, the variable display setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S1313). This variable display setting process (S1313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 .

In the variable display setting process (FIG. 74, S1313), first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1601). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1601: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S1605. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S1601: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned off (S1602), and then fluctuation pattern selection processing is executed (S1603). The details of this variation pattern selection process (S1603) will be described with reference to FIG. 75. Based on the current effect mode, the details of the variation pattern are determined according to the variation pattern command received from main controller 110. process is executed. Regarding the selection of the variation pattern, rough contents such as variation time and variation type (reach, non-reach, etc.) are determined by the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, and the effect mode set by the sound lamp control device 113 The content of the variation mode to be actually displayed (details of the variation pattern) is determined by the value of the effect counter and the like.

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1604). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1605.

In the processing of S1605, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223f provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S1605). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S1605: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S1605: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is turned off (S1606), and the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is stored from the RAM 223. Acquire (S1607). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1608), and the process proceeds to S1609.

In the process of S1609, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1609). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled. After the processing of S1609 is executed, this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 75, variation pattern selection processing (S1603) which is one processing in the variation display setting processing (FIG. 74, S1313) executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. will be explained. FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing the contents of this variation pattern selection process (S1603).

In the variation pattern selection process (S1603), first, the value of the effect counter 223g is acquired (S1611). It is determined whether the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223k (S1612). When it is determined that the effect mode A is set (S1612: Yes), button effect selection processing is executed (S1613). After that, this process ends. The button effect selection process (S1613) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 75. A process of selecting a variation pattern exclusively for the normal game period is executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1612, when it is determined that the effect mode is not A (S1612: No), it is determined whether the effect mode B (time effect period) is set (S1614). When it is determined that the effect mode B is set (S1614: Yes), a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223g and the content of the variation pattern command from the variation pattern selection table 222a of the corresponding time effect period. Select and set (S1615). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1614, if it is determined that it is not the production mode B, that is, the production mode C (time production extension period) (S1614: No), the corresponding time production extension period variation pattern selection table 222a A variation pattern is selected and set based on the effect counter 223g and the content of the received variation pattern command (S1616). After that, this process ends.

In this way, since a dedicated variation pattern is selected based on the set production mode, the content of the production displayed can be changed depending on the period. Therefore, the performance of the game can be diversified, and the problem that the player gets tired of the game early can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 76, a button effect selection process (S1613) which is one process in the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 75, S1603) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. will be explained. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing the contents of this button effect selection process (S1613).

In the button effect selection process (FIG. 76, S1613), first, a variation pattern is selected from the corresponding normal game period-dedicated variation pattern selection table 222a based on the value of the effect counter 223g and the content of the received variation pattern command. Set (S1621). It is determined whether or not the selected variation pattern is a button effect (variation pattern of synthesized display mode). When it is determined that it is the variation pattern of the composite display mode (see FIG. 43) (S1622: Yes), the stop pattern for button effect is set as the ready-to-win stop pattern (S1623). Here, the sub-symbols are set so as to be in the ready-to-win display mode in which they are positioned diagonally. The button effect flag 223r is set to ON (S1624). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1622, when it is determined that the selected variation pattern is not the variation pattern of the combined display mode (S1622: No), this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the synchronous effect management process (S1314), which is one process in the main process (FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing this synchronous effect management process (S1314). In this synchronous effect management process (S1314), time information is acquired from the RTC 292, and based on the time information, it is determined whether it is a normal game period, a time effect period, or a time effect extension period, and an effect indicating it is displayed. Perform processing to set the mode.

In the synchronous effect management process (FIG. 77, S1314), time information of "hour, minute" is first obtained from the RTC 292 (S1701). It is determined whether or not the production mode A (normal game period) is set in the production mode storage area 223k (S1702). When it is determined that the effect mode A is set (S1702: Yes), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1701 is within the time effect period (S1703). When it is determined that it is within the time effect period, that is, when it is determined that it is time to start the time effect (S1703: Yes), the start period flag 223o is set to ON (S1704). The effect mode B (time effect period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223k (S1705), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1703 that it is not the time effect period, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1702, if it is determined that the effect mode A is not set (S1702: No), it is determined whether the effect mode B (time effect period) is set (S1706). When it is determined that the effect mode B is set (S1706: Yes), the time data acquired in the process of S1701 is three seconds before the end of the time effect, that is, the end timing of the time effect period is three seconds. Seconds ago is determined (S1707). By constructing in this way, it is possible to execute an indication effect as to whether or not to execute an extension effect for 3 seconds.

When it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect period (S1707: Yes), an extension effect setting process is executed (S1708). After that, this process ends. This extension effect setting process (S1708) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 78, and the process of whether or not to set the time effect extension period is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the production mode B, that is, it is the production mode C (time production extension period) (S1706: No), it is outside the time production extension period, that is, the end timing of the time production extension period (S1709). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect extension period (S1709: Yes), the effect mode is set to A (S1710). After that, this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 78, an extension effect setting process (S1708) which is one process in the synchronous effect management process (FIG. 77, S1314) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment explain. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing the contents of this extension effect setting process (S1708).

In the extension effect setting process (FIG. 78, S1708), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (S1721). When it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (S1721: Yes), the normal period flag 223m is set to ON (S1722), and the effect mode A (normal game period) is set (S1723). After that, this process ends.

Thus, when the jackpot game is in progress, the extension effect cannot be executed, so by executing the processing for setting the normal game period, the background image of the normal game period is set after the jackpot game. can be controlled as follows.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1721, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not in progress (S1721: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the time presentation period (S1724). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect period (S1724: Yes), it is determined whether or not the re-variation effect is set in the processing of S1728 described later, that is, whether it is decided to set the extended effect. (S1725). When the extension effect is determined (S1725: Yes), the extension effect flag 223p is set to ON (S1725). The production mode is set to C (S1727). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1725 that the extension effect has not been determined (S1725: No), the process proceeds to S1722. Also, in the process of S1724, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the time effect (S1724: No), the winning prize information is stored in the winning prize information storage area 223a, or the winning prize determination during fluctuation is the winning prize. It is determined whether there is any (S1728). If winning prize information is stored, or if the hit/fail determination during fluctuation is a hit (S1728: Yes), the time until the winning fluctuation ends is calculated and set as an extended performance time. (S1729). A re-variation effect is set (S1730). Here, as shown in FIG. 47(b), the re-fluctuation effect is set to a display mode in which the fish school appears from the right. After the process of S1730 ends, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the pending number display update process (S1306), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. do. FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing the content of this pending number display update process (S1306).

In the pending number display update process (FIG. 79, S1306), first, it is determined whether or not it is necessary to change the display of the pending symbols (S1801). This determination is made based on the hold command acquired from main controller 110 . A pending command for display indicating the changed pending symbol display is set (S1802). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1801, if it is determined that the pending display has not been changed (S1801: No), this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 80, frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1307) which is one processing in the main processing (see FIG. 80) executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. will be explained. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the contents of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1307).

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (FIG. 80, S1307), first, it is determined whether or not an effective period is set to be determined to be valid when the frame button 22 is pressed (S1811). If it is determined that it is within the valid period (S1811: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1812). When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1812: Yes), it is determined whether the eight effect flags 223i are set to ON (S1813). When it is determined that the 8 effect flag 223i is ON (S1813: Yes), the corresponding pending 8 effect flag 223i is set to OFF (S1814). Incidentally, the eight performance flags are configured so that a flag is set for each reserved ball, and the flag corresponding to the reserved pattern displayed after being changed to the notification reserved pattern is set to ON. Also, based on the operation of the frame button 22, based on the operation of the frame button 22, it is set to OFF based on (when it is) displayed in a variable manner in the notification mode (character display in this embodiment).

After the processing of S1814, the notification mode of 8 effects is set for the notification reserved pattern with the earliest change start order among the reserved patterns with the 8 effects flag 223i set to ON (S1815). . After that, this process ends. This notification mode is set in advance when the 8 effects are set.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the validity period of the frame button 22 has expired (S1811: No), or if it is determined in the process of S1812 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S1812: No), this process ends. do.

Also, in the process of S1813, when it is determined that the 8 effect flag 223i is off (S1813: No), it is determined whether the pending effect flag 223h is on (S1816). When it is determined that the pending effect flag 223h is ON (S1816: Yes), the corresponding pending effect flag 223h is set to OFF (S1817). The normal suspension effect of the corresponding suspension is executed (S1816). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1816 that the pending effect flag 223h is off (S1816: No), it means that the variation pattern of the composite display mode is being executed, so the button effect execution process is executed ( S1819). After that, this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 81, button effect execution processing is one process in frame button input monitoring/effect processing (FIG. 80, S1307) executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. (S1819) will be described. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing the contents of this button effect execution process (S1819). In this button effect execution process (S1819), button effect control is executed in the variation patterns of the synthesized display modes shown in FIGS.

In the button effect execution process (FIG. 81, S1819), first, it is determined whether the button effect flag 223r is on (S1831). The button effect flag 223r is a flag indicating that the variation pattern in which the composite display mode shown in FIG. 44(b) is displayed is selected. The variation pattern of the composite display mode includes a fake variation pattern in which the composite display mode shown in FIG. 44(b) is not displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the button effect flag 223r is on (S1831: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing after the composite display mode (see FIG. 44(b)) is displayed (S1832). When it is determined that it is the timing after the composite display mode is displayed (S1832: Yes), a display command indicating the composite display mode corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S1843). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1831, when it is determined that the button effect flag 223r is OFF (S1831: No), the timing of the variable display of the notification pattern before the composite display mode is displayed (FIG. 43(b) reference) (S1835). If it is determined that the timing is before composite display (S1835: Yes), the button effect counter is incremented by 1 (S1836). Based on the selected variation pattern and the value of the button effect counter, a display command indicating a pre-synthesis effect mode (notification mode) is set (S1837). After that, this process ends. Here, characters such as "Chance", characters, etc. are displayed to inform the player of the success/failure determination result.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1835 that it is not the pressing timing before the composite display mode is displayed, this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of button effects are set, but each flag is discriminated and controlled accordingly. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure without increasing the number of frame buttons 22, and it is possible to configure at a low cost and in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, the background image setting process (S1311), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described with reference to FIG. . FIG. 82 is a flow chart showing the contents of this background image setting process (S1311).

In the background image setting process (FIG. 82, S1311), first, it is determined whether or not the extension effect flag 223p is ON (S1901). When the extension effect flag 223p is ON, that is, when it is the start timing of the extension effect (S1901: Yes), the extension effect flag 223p is set to OFF (S1902). A display background image command corresponding to the time effect extension period is set (S1903). In this embodiment, a background image is set in which the color of the background image for the time rendering period is changed to gold. This background image is used when the time presentation period is extended, that is, when it is determined that the winning variation will start, so that the background image notifies the player of the winning. After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1901, when it is determined that the extension effect flag 223p is off (S1901: No), it is determined whether the start period flag 223o is on (S1904). When it is determined that the start period flag is ON (S1904: Yes), the start period flag 223o is set to OFF (S1905), and a display background change command corresponding to the time effect period is set (S1906). . In this way, when the start period flag 223o is ON, it is the start timing of the time presentation period, so the background image dedicated to the time presentation period (see FIG. 46(a)) is set. As a result, the background image can be changed in accordance with the start timing, so that the background image can be changed in synchronization with other pachinko machines 10 of the same model.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1904 that the start period flag 223o is off (S1904: No), it is determined whether the normal period flag 223m is on (S1907). If it is determined that the normal period flag 223m is on (S1907: Yes), the normal period flag 223m is set to off (S1908), and a display background command corresponding to the normal period is set (S1909). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal period flag 223m is off (S1907: No), this processing is terminated.

<Regarding control processing in the display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 97. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 84, the boot processing (S2001) will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S2001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S2102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. A predetermined amount of the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a out of the stored control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2104), the command pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 83) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S2002 in FIG. 83) (S2105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S2001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 84, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a in step S2101. and the processing of S2102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S2103 to S2105 without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S2005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 95(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S3402 in FIG. 95(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 85(b)), the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 47 is drawn. Determination processing (see S2308 in FIG. 85B) and simple display setting processing (see S2309 in FIG. 85B) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, the ball enters the first winning port 64 (start winning), and the command to start the variable effect is issued from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, and a simple variation presentation can be performed. can. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S2005, interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 85(a). FIG. 85(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85(b), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 85(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 57) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 85(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301). If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81, command determination processing (S2302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S2303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 86 to 91. FIG.

In the display setting process (S2303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S2304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2303) or the simple display setting processing (S2309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, even when a continuous notice command (not shown) is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the continuous notice is sent to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S2306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2305), 57, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the buffer information to be drawn. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type (jackpot A, jackpot B) indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop type counter. , and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S2301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S2301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third pattern display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2309) is executed, and the process of S2304 is executed. Move to

Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 68, the details of the command determination process (S2302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process (FIG. 86, S2302), as shown in FIG. 86, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401). (S2401: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2303) that the new command has been processed is set to ON (S2402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S2403).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a variation pattern command for display (S2404), and if there is a variation pattern command for display (S2404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2405) and returns to the processing of S2401.

Details of the variation pattern command process (S2405) will now be described with reference to FIG. 87(a). FIG. 87(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S2501). Here, the display data table buffer 233d is configured so that a plurality of display data tables can be set, and the set display data tables can be processed by moving pointers in synchronization. Therefore, even when executing different displays corresponding to a plurality of background modes, it is possible to switch to a plurality of display contents by setting one of the plurality of display data table buffers active and switching.

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is stored in the display data table buffer. 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). It is determined whether it is a variation pattern of the synthesized display mode (whether it is a variation pattern of the button effect) (S2503). When it is determined that it is the variation pattern of the synthetic display mode (S2503: Yes), the ready-to-win pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the synthetic display mode is set (S2504). After that, the process of S2505 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S2503, if it is determined that the change pattern is not the composite display mode (S2503: No), the process of S2505 is executed.

Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the set variable display data table is turned on, and the other variable display data tables are turned on. The corresponding data table determination flag is set to off (S2505). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2506, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2506), and the pointer 233f is set to 0. Initialize (S2507). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S2508), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2508, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the pointer 233f At the same time as extracting the drawing contents defined at the indicated address and specifying the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81, The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 in the image storage area of the normal video RAM 236. 236a to control the image controller 237.

Also, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S2507 is used to measure the time for the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S2404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S2406), If there is a display variation type command (S2406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2407), and the process returns to S2401.

Details of the stop type command process (S2407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 87(b). FIG. 87(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114 .

In the stop type command process, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A, before jackpot B) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined (S2601), and the stop type table and V interrupt processing are determined. (Refer to FIG. 85(b)) is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time is executed, and finally the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is set. (S2602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to off (S2603). After that, the process returns to S2401 in FIG.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S2602. In the above-described task processing (S2304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S2603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Returning to FIG. 86, the description is continued. In the processing of S2406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S2406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an advance notice display command for display among the unprocessed commands (S2408). If it is determined that the notice command for display has been received (S2408: Yes), the notice command process is executed (S2409).

Details of the advance notice command processing (S2409) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing the content of this advance notice command processing (FIG. S2409).

In the notice command process, first, the display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S2701). Here, the display data table buffer 233d is configured so that a plurality of display data tables can be set, and the set display data tables can be processed by moving pointers in synchronization. Therefore, even when executing different displays corresponding to a plurality of background modes, it is possible to switch to a plurality of display contents by setting one of the plurality of display data table buffers active and switching.

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is stored in the display data table buffer. 233d.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702). Then, among the data table discrimination flags of the variable display data table corresponding to each notice pattern, the set data table discrimination flag is turned on, and the other data table discrimination flags are turned off (S2703). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2703, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2704), and the pointer 233f is set to 0. Initialize (S2705). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S2706), the advance notice command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 86, the description continues. In the processing of S2408, if it is determined that there is no advance notice command for display (S2408: No), it is determined whether there is a hold command for display among unprocessed commands. If it is determined that the hold command for display has been received (S2410: Yes), hold command processing is executed.

Here, the pending command process (S2411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing the contents of this pending command process (S2411).

In the pending command process (FIG. 89, S2411), first, it is determined whether or not the received command indicates the number of pending items (S2801). If it is determined that the command indicates the pending number (S2801: Yes), the pending display data corresponding to the pending pattern is displayed in the pending number and pattern (pattern, color, etc.) indicated by the received display pending command in the display data table. (S2802). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2801, when it is determined that the received command is not a command indicating the number of pending games (S2801: No), it is determined whether the received command is a normal pending effect command (S2803). When it is determined that the command is for a normal pending effect (S2803: Yes), the corresponding pending pattern is changed to a normal pending effect pattern and set in the display data table (S2804). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2803, when it is determined that the received command is not the command indicating the normal holding effect (S2803: No), it is determined whether the received command is the command of the 8 effects (S2805). When it is determined that the command is for 8 effects (S2805: Yes), the display data to be changed to the 8 effects forewarning symbol is set in the display data table (S2806), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2805, when it is determined that the command is not the command for the 8 effects, other pending display settings are executed (S2807). After that, this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 86, the description is continued. In the processing of S2410, if it is determined that the pending command for display has not been received (S2410: No), it is determined whether or not the effect command for display has been received (S2412). When it is determined that the display effect command is received (S2412: Yes), effect command processing is executed (S2413).

Here, with reference to FIG. 90, the details of this effect command processing (S2413) will be described. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing the contents of this effect command process (S2413).

In the effect command process (FIG. 90, S2413), first, it is determined whether or not the re-variation effect (see FIG. 47(b)) in the time effect extension period is set (S2901). Here, when the re-fluctuation effect is set in the process of S1730 of the extension effect setting process (FIG. 78, S1708) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is notified by a command. When it is determined that the re-variation effect is set (S2901: Yes), the display data table corresponding to the re-variation effect is set in the display data table buffer (S2902). After that, the process proceeds to S2909.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2901, when it is determined that the re-variation effect is not set (S2901: No), it is determined whether it is a pseudo extension effect (S2903). This pseudo extension effect is an indication effect displayed three seconds before the end of the time effect period, and the effect pattern is displayed with shaking (see FIG. 47(a)). When it is determined that the pseudo extension effect is set (S2903: Yes), the display data table corresponding to the pseudo extension effect is set in the display data table buffer (S2904). After that, the process proceeds to S2909.

On the other hand, in the process of S2903, when it is determined that the pseudo extension effect is not set (S2903: No), it is determined whether the 8 effect is set (S2905). When it is determined that the 8 effects are set (S2905: Yes), the display data table corresponding to the 8 effects is set in the display data table buffer (S2906). After that, the process proceeds to S2909.

On the other hand, in the process of S2905, when it is determined that the 8 effects are not set (S2905: No), it is determined whether the normal pending effect is set (S2907). When it is determined that the normal pending effect is set (S2907: Yes), the display data table corresponding to the normal pending effect is set in the display data table buffer (S2908). After that, the process proceeds to S2909. On the other hand, in the process of S2907, when it is determined that the normal pending effect is not set (S2907: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of S2909, a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2909). Then, among the data table discrimination flags of the display data table corresponding to each display pattern, the set data table discrimination flag is turned on, and the other data table discrimination flags are turned off (S2910).

Next, based on the display time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2911), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2912). After that, this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 86, the description continues. If it is determined in the processing of S2412 that there is no display effect command (S2412: No), it is determined whether or not a back image change command has been received (S2414). If it is determined that the back image change command has been received (S2414: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S2415).

Here, the back image change command processing (S2415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing the contents of this back image change command process (S2415).

In the back image change command process (FIG. 91, S2415), the back image change flag is set to ON (S3001). The back image discrimination flag corresponding to the changed back image type indicated by the command is set to ON (S3002). After that, this process ends.

Here, return to FIG. 86 and continue the description. If it is determined in the process of S2414 that the back image change command has not been received (S2414: No), it is determined whether there is an error command (S2416). If it is determined that an error command has been received (S2416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2417).

Details of the error command processing (S2417) will now be described with reference to FIG. 91(b). FIG. 91(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp controller 114 .

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S3102). End the process and return to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S3102, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, then in the process of S3002, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2416 that there is no error command (S2416: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2419), and the process returns to S2401.

In the process of S2401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes ), and the processing of S2402 to S2419 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2401 to S2419 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 85(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image (not shown), that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are selected from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. are extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 87(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 87(b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and for other commands discards the command without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 87(a)) executed in this case, in the process of S2301, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on varying moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S2303), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 92, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3201). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing executed first, the processing of S3202 to S3204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S3205. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S3201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S3202), S3203-S3204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the processing of S3203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S3203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3204).

Details of the warning image setting process will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S3301).

In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, along with specifying the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the warning image, for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined. Determine the various parameters required.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3204), or if it is determined in the process of S3203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S3203: No), then the process proceeds to S3205.

In S3205, pointer update processing is executed (S3205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S3301, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S3402). As a result, if it is End information (S3402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3403). The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3404), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S3405), and this processing is terminated. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3303, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always developed, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3302, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S3402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 92, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3206). In task processing, the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the process of S3206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., and the display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3108: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S3209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S3209: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S3210), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3211). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3213). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is in progress is set to ON (S3214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3215), returning to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, unlike the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81. - 特許庁

Incidentally, the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the fluctuation performance performed one before is described. In the task processing (S2304), from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, from the last stop design determination flag set by S3215, the stop design of the variation effect performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S3209, if the fixed display flag is not ON but OFF (S3209: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S3216). If the demonstration display flag is off (S3216: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so the demonstration display data table is replaced with the display data table. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the buffer 233d (S3217), and then the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In the process of S3216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S3216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the end of the fixed display effect, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is terminated as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 85(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images according to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. A display data table specifying that an image (not shown) is to be displayed in a stopped state is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96, details of the transfer setting process (S2305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 95(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S3501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. After executing the process (S3502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95(b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S3501, that is, if it is turned off (S3501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S3502), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 95(b). FIG. 95B is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S3601). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S3602). In the processing of S3602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S3602 that the transfer process has not ended (S3602: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so this resident image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3602: Yes), the process proceeds to S3603. Also, as a result of the processing of S3501, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3601: No), the process proceeds to S3603.

In the process of S3603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3604), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the processing in S3603, if all the resident image data have been transferred (S3603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3605), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 85B), the command is executed instead of the simple command determination processing (see S2308 in FIG. Since determination processing (see FIGS. 86 to 91) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 92 to 94) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 96) (see S3401: No in FIG. 95(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Next, normal image transfer setting processing (S3503), which is one process of the transfer setting processing (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3205) of the previously executed display setting process (S2303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3703), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state, is set to ON (S3704), and the process proceeds to S3705.

Also, in the process of S3702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S3702: No), the process of S3703 and S3704 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3705. In the process of S3705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S3706).

In the process of S3606, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S3606 that the transfer process has not ended (S3706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, so the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3706: Yes), the process proceeds to S3707. Also, as a result of the process of S3705, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S3705: No), the process proceeds to S3707.

In the processing of S3707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3707). is turned off (S3708), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S3703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S3709. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not ON, but OFF (S3707: No), this process ends.

In the process of S3709, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3709). The determination in the process of S3709 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3709 (S3709: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3709 (S3709: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S3710). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S3610, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3711), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 97, details of the drawing process (S2306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 57 is generated (S3801). That is, in the process of S3701, from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in task processing (S2304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops the images in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information by overwriting. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image drawn from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and drawing processing and display processing can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the rendering process, after the process of S3702, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3703). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the rendering process of the loading process (see FIG. 85(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

Also, in the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and when the command is received by the audio lamp controller 113, the audio lamp controller 113 transmits the command to the display controller 114. A command to be issued is determined and then sent from the audio lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114 . On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is determined in the display control device 114. Then, a command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113 .

In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 transfers image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234 , read image data from the character ROM 234 , and transfer it to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . In this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is unused. If unused, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 as the transfer destination.

In this case, whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being in use). and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (that is, that it is in use). ) is provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

Alternatively, the signals transmitted and received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signals transmitted and received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 are monitored by the MPU 231, and the resident It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or terminates the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time so that the MPU 231 can Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third pattern display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is during the blank period. , and if the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third pattern display device 81 and judges whether or not it is unused, so that judgment can be easily made.

In this case, the MPU 231 stores transfer data that is not null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. If the information exists, image data may be read out from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is defined for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, etc., the sprite can be drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for normal operation can be stored in the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading out the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process executed by the MPU 231 or in the loop of the main process. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute image data transfer processing using the time during which important processing in the display control device 114, such as command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, is not being performed. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed with priority over the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 can process the image data without affecting the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing. transfer processing can be executed.

In the above-described embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the address of each of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. Each video RAM may be managed by assigning a different address area to each video RAM in the address system provided. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, but simply specifies an address. Image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . That is, when the MPU 231 designates the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, it suffices to designate the address set in the common address system. It is possible to simplify the structure of the instruction that makes the specification. For example, in the drawing list sent from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system is simply used as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the construction of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) that connects the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 has been described. 237 may be provided. A bridge circuit is provided to convert the input/output specifications of the character ROM 234 to the input/output specifications of the mask ROM, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. good too.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM can be used as it is, and the NAND type flash memory 234a can be used. A configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or a bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234 .

In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and is composed of a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. may be Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by configuring the display control device 114 as described in the above embodiment, the image can be displayed at the desired time without problems. be able to.

In the above embodiment, the character ROM 234 is provided with the NOR type ROM 234d, and the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. The first program storage area is provided in a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is stored in the area after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. part of the boot program to be executed in the . For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, the character ROM 234 may be provided with FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like. A part of the boot program that is executed first may be stored.

In the above embodiment, the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) is provided with the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). , a first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program that is first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released may be stored in the area. For example, in place of the NOR type ROM 234d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided on the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided thereon, and the MPU 231 may store part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released.

In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. After that, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read out from the buffer RAM 234c and transferred to the internal bus (bus line 240). 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, when the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" to the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 already set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H". Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the display main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the display control device 114 or the third pattern display device 81 can be immediately started. can be done.

In addition, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1 The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be directly read out from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the display main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section or the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started. can be done. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A direct connection to line 240) may also be provided. When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. By connecting the resident video RAM 235 to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected. RAM 235 can be easily provided in display controller 114 .

In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 is provided with one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236. However, the number of video RAMs is not limited to this, and may be increased. A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each of them, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are composed of a 1-port type (one input/output port) DRAM has been described. type of RAM may be used. As a result, writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. It is possible to parallelize the process of writing the received image data to the normal video RAM 236 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

In the above embodiment, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories. It may be divided so that the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are stored in each area. In addition, when a resident area and a normal area are configured in one RAM, the input/output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by either the resident area or the normal area during read or write processing. , it is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. . In this case, in response to a command received from main controller 110 or sound lamp controller 113 or other input from the outside, image data corresponding to an image to be immediately displayed on third pattern display device 81 is at least resident. It is preferably resident in video RAM 235 .

In the above embodiment, part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident. You may In this case, the image data stored in the temporary character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, so the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. may

In the above embodiment, the resident video RAM 235 has been described as a case where its contents are retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated on a predetermined occasion, such as when the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is greatly changed based on the command received from the good. In this case, while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is kept held in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when other resident images are updated. You can leave it. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The data may be transferred while not in use (that is, while the image data corresponding to the transitional image is not read). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 transmits to the image controller 237 a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for image data to be newly resident, and the image controller 237 sends the transfer instruction (transfer data information) to the image controller 237 . image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to data information) and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (that is, while the image data corresponding to the transition image is not being read). You may make it

When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the transition image is updated using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three-symbol display device 81 . While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. good too. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234, reads image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is being displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In the above-described embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are resident, a RAM judgment value for judging whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when the power failure is resolved. In the display main processing or main processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after power-on, the RAM judgment value is confirmed before starting to transfer main image data at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that image data to be resident in resident video RAM 235 continues to be stored normally. It may be configured to In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be disabled by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even if a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure, and the MPU 231 starts executing the main display process or the main process, the data in the resident video RAM 235 can be stored normally. In this case, image data can be prevented from being wastefully transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the time required for recovery from power failure can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. FIG. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in the present modification, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normal due to a momentary power failure or the like, it is possible to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, the normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of the RAM determination value, whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored may be used to determine the validity of the data.

In the above embodiment, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be provided outside the image controller 237. FIG. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and configured to be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit with the buffer RAM. In this case, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit. transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by

In the above embodiment, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a. For example, among the scanning periods of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the buffer The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be a data capacity sufficient to complete transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236. FIG. As a result, transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 that occur during this blank period. .

In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the stored image data is transferred from another buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236. may be configured. Also, one buffer RAM is divided into two or more areas, and while image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . In either case, the writing of the image data read out from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written in the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. The time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the power-on main image while transferring the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . can do. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. Transfer can be completed quickly, and processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. 235b, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, by using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the power-on image, while the character ROM 234 Image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. Transfer can be completed quickly, and processing can be simplified.

In the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to . may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. After the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to turn on the power. If the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the main image, The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, while the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is being transferred, image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. good too. Further, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power-on main image and the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored in the normal video RAM 236 . By causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image at power-on using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the image data is not read out from the character ROM 234, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above-described embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the sound lamp control device 113 generates the back image change command and the frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the back image change command and the frame button. Although the case of changing the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of Super Reach based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the game state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the game state, for example, according to the change of the game state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the back image and the effect mode of super ready-to-win according to the game state based on the back image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the game state of the gaming machine 10 and change the back image and the effect mode of super ready-to-win according to the game state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a partial range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. , the rear image can be immediately displayed from the resident range using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed rear image is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, composite data table, and display data table. You may Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the synthesized data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new rear image is stored in the sub-area. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined such that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image. An increase in load can be suppressed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is sent to the display control device 114. Although the case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and main control device 110 may transmit an error command notifying the error to either audio lamp control device 113 or display control device 114 . When an error command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the error to the display control device 114. may

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114 so that the display control device 114 detects the presence or absence of a vibration error. When a vibration error is detected, the error generation flag is turned on, and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error generation flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 69). A warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 70(a)) when is determined. In this case, since it becomes unnecessary to transmit and receive an error command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

Further, in the above embodiment, the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13, but instead of the vibration sensor or together with the vibration sensor, a magnet sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13. good too. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of balls from being changed by the magnetic field of a magnet or the like and to prevent the balls from being intentionally entered into the ball entrance. , and the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any one of the main controller 110 , the sound lamp controller 113 and the display controller 114 . When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when the main controller 110 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is corrected. A signaling error command may be sent from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113 or directly to the display controller 114 . Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound ramp control device 113, when the sound ramp control device 113 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field An error command may be sent from the audio lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114 to communicate the error. In the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third pattern display device 81 is resident. , and when receiving an error command that conveys a magnetic field error from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third pattern display device 81. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, when the display control device 114 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113 , the warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 234 Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is used to display the error message image informing the magnetic field error without delay as the third pattern. It can be displayed on the display device 81 . Therefore, when the player applies a magnetic field to the game board, the error message image is displayed by the third symbol display device 81 to notify the player of the magnetic field error immediately. can be deterred.

In the case where the additional data table or the display data table defines the drawing contents necessary to change the color tone of part or all of one effect, the additional data table or the display data table can be used in the third pattern display device 81 to The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed at that time are associated with the addresses expressed in units of the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which the image for the frame is displayed. It may define color information that designates color tone. Then, the MPU 231 designates the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If the color information to be used is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. A drawing list may be created by replacing with color information defined by the additional drawing contents of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

In addition, when the display data table defines the drawing contents necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect, the display data table allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image for one frame. is displayed as one unit (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). It may define the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 stores the type of sprite to be replaced, the type of sprite to be newly displayed, and If the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is defined, various sprites defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

In the above embodiment, the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data that is necessary when drawing an image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data required when drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is associated with identification information ("additional effect 1", "additional effect 2", etc.) for identifying effects that can be additionally displayed for each address, and is added. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the effect to be additionally displayed is determined, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. can be configured to

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the sprite image data to be used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 according to the drawing list in advance before the image data is used. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Further, by using the additional transfer data information specified in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of an image based on the additional drawing content. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can display various effects.

In the above-described embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table, Although the case where only the drawing contents corresponding to the super reach selected by is specified is described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawing contents corresponding to the selected super reach are added to the display data table. may As a result, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents of the super reach selected by the player. In addition, since it is not necessary to prescribe drawing contents corresponding to all super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the data size of the display data table from increasing.

In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when a performance to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the performance may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, even if the additional data table defines not only the additional drawing content but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the additional drawing content. good. As a result, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the drawing, so that the additional data table and the transfer data table for addition can be used to specify The processing load required for the specification can be reduced compared to the case of specifying the drawing content and the transfer data information respectively.

In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command in the display control device 114 has been described. Prepare a display data table for each element such as "variation startup", "high speed variation", "notice effect", "normal reach", "super reach", and according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command After specifying the elements necessary for the variable performance, the display data tables corresponding to the paper required for the specified variable performance are combined into one to generate the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern. You may do so. "Variable start-up", "High-speed fluctuation", "Normal reach", etc. are often displayed in common with each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by dividing the variable effect into elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be provided efficiently.

In the above embodiment, a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table, and the drawing content and transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. A pointer may be provided.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) of the image for one frame at which drawing processing ends. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third pattern display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third pattern display device 81 is driven so that one frame of image is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By sending a , the time interval can be kept accurate without timing.

In the above-described embodiment, the image controller 237 identifies the frame buffer to which the rendered image should be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information rendered earlier from the other frame buffer. is read out and sent to the third pattern display device 81, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. are alternately selected, and the previously developed image information is read out from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third pattern display device 81 . Also, every time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third pattern display device 81, it outputs the image information to the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be developed and to the third pattern display device 81. You may make it replace the frame buffer which carries out.

In the above-described embodiment, after the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, by the time the fixed display effect ends, the main controller 110 through the sound lamp control device 113 When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demonstration command (demonstration command for display) is received, the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d As explained above, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Also, in this case, until either the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) or the demo command (demonstration command for display) is received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, the finalized display effect is not performed. Each time it ends, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to continue displaying the fixed display effect until the variation pattern command or the demonstration command is received from the main control device 110 .

In the above embodiment, the explanation has been given for the case where the demonstration effect changes the rear image and stops displaying the third pattern consisting of the main patterns without the numerals "0" to "9". The present invention is not limited to this, and a third pattern consisting of main patterns with numbers or main patterns without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third pattern. Also, a character or back image completely different from the third pattern or back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control means 114 first transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on main image area 235a. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at the time of power-on on the third pattern display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the power is turned on, the display control means 114 first transfers only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235. After the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image when the power is turned on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation has started without any problems when the power is turned on.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on this, it is possible to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a simple variable display using the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image stored in the power-on variable image area 235b. It is desirable to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image to the power-on varying image area 235b immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As a result, it is possible to quickly perform the variable display using the power-on variable image.

In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, and the content of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing content) and the content of the image to be transferred at that time. Although a case has been described in which image data information (transfer data information) is specified, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, as long as the display content is specified for each predetermined time interval. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81 . For example, when the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third pattern display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third pattern display device 81 is 1/30 Since one frame image is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display contents for every 1/30 second interval.

Also, in the display data table, as the sprite type to be drawn defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not indicated, but the address of the character ROM 234 where the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. may be specified. In the display control device 114, the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores the image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. manages the addresses of Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, each sprite type can be associated with the sprite. Since there is no need to manage both the information specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is provided with the stored image data determination flag 233i, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, the work RAM 233 may store information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a. In this case, when instructing transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and transfers the predetermined image data. is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not stored, an instruction to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the MPU 231 sets an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and the image data of the sprite type is stored. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the storage image data determination flag 233i. The MPU 231 determines whether or not the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the MPU 231 performs the processing of not executing the transfer processing. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237 . In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is determined. may be stored. Also, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . In this case, if image data of a predetermined sprite type needs to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal-use video RAM 236, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 237 regardless of the image data storage state in the normal-use video RAM 236. On the other hand, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above-described embodiment, only the image data corresponding to the "back side A" among the plurality of back side images is resident in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. For example, the image data of the rear image used in part of the super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. In particular, by making the back image of Super Reach, which appears frequently or is expected to be high, resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, image data transfer processing from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times

In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 outputs the transfer command at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. Although the case where the image controller 237 is controlled to transfer the image data instructed by the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, the display data table is not necessarily limited to this. Information about the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally displayed from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 236 for use.

In the above embodiment, the case where the color tone of a part of the image on the back surface C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, changes with time has been described. good. In addition, the back image is not limited to one that scrolls or changes color tone over time. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 110 receives the information of the various counters (the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning notified to the sound lamp control device 113, and the number of pending balls Although the case where it is included in the command has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and by another command, the information of various counters (first random number counter C1, first per type counter C2) obtained at the time of starting winning is displayed with a voice lamp. The controller 113 may be notified.

In the above-described embodiment, when the variable effect is executed, the case of displaying the high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot visually recognize it has been described. , all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an unrecognizable degree and displayed, or all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the game board 13 is provided with one first prize winning port 64 for starting a lottery for a special symbol jackpot when a ball enters the ball has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances, each of which is independently detected to start a jackpot lottery. In this case, when there is a hold at each of the first ball entrances, the number of held ball commands sent by the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 indicate which of the first ball entrances is being held. May contain information. In addition, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 when starting the variation also includes information indicating which of the first entrances is the suspended variation effect. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a holding ball counter is prepared for each first ball entrance, and when a holding ball number command is received, the first ball entering indicated by the holding ball number command is received. When the number of held balls is set in the number of held balls counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, if the number of held balls counter for the first entrance indicated by the variation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entrance The number of held balls can be counted every time.

In the above embodiment, each time the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is issued to the main controller. Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 . As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above-described embodiment, winning to the first winning hole 64 and passing through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is not limited to four. , 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls for variable display based on the winning to the first winning port 64 is changed by a number in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or by the number of reserved balls in the area divided into four. It may be displayed in a manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. may be configured.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a pattern along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 104. FIG. In the third embodiment, display control of the rotating operation unit 600 and the third pattern display device 81 explained in the first embodiment will be explained.

FIG. 98(a) is a schematic diagram showing a display mode when the main pattern is displayed on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 of the rotary operation unit 600. FIG. In the spherical liquid crystal device 670, a plurality of 1 mm square pixels are arranged to form a display area. The display area Pb of the spherical liquid crystal device 670 shown in FIG. 98(a) and the display area Pa shown in the third pattern display device 81 have the same size.

FIG. 98(b) is an enlarged view of the display area Pa and the display area Pb. The display area Pa is composed of 2 rows×2 rows of 1.5 mm square pixels (pixels), and is composed of a total of 4 pixels. The display area Pb is composed of 3×3 columns of 1 mm square pixels, for a total of 9 pixels. Thus, the third pattern display device 81 is composed of pixels 1.5 times larger than the spherical liquid crystal device 670 .

The display area of the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is arranged so as to overlap with the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, and is configured to be able to display mutually related display effects.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 98 to 102, an example of display mode displayed in association with the third pattern display device 81 and the spherical liquid crystal device 670 will be described. FIG. 98(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the third pattern is displayed only by the spherical liquid crystal and is scroll-displayed while being enlarged from the upper right direction to the lower right direction. When the main pattern is displayed up to the end of the display area of the spherical liquid crystal device 670, the third pattern moves to the boundary between the third pattern display device 81 and the spherical liquid crystal device 670, as shown in FIG. 99(a). displayed. In this case, the same display data as the display data of the main pattern displayed immediately before on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is set and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

With this configuration, the pixel size of the third pattern display device 81 is 1.5 times larger than that of the spherical liquid crystal device 670, so that the size of the third pattern is 1.5 times larger than that of the spherical liquid crystal device 670. is displayed. As a result, it is possible to show to the player that the spherical liquid crystal device 670 and the third pattern display device 81 are gradually enlarged and scroll-displayed. As a result, the process of enlarging and setting the main pattern can be reduced, and the control load of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99(b), the third pattern is scroll-displayed while being enlarged by 1.5 times. Further, even when the scroll display is performed within the display area of the spherical liquid crystal device 670, the display is variably displayed by enlarging the display by 1.5 times. With this configuration, even if the display is performed from the spherical liquid crystal device 670 to the third pattern display device 81 without changing the enlargement setting, there is no change in the enlargement display ratio due to the pixels, so the player feels uncomfortable. Defects can be suppressed.

FIGS. 100(a) to 100(b) are diagrams showing enlarged scroll display while rotating within the display area of the spherical liquid crystal device 670. FIG. In this case also, the image is enlarged by 1.5 times each time it is moved and displayed. 101(a)-(b) and FIG. 102(a) are scrolled from right to left from the right end of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 after being rotated and displayed on the spherical liquid crystal device 670. It is a figure showing. Here, too, the image is enlarged by 1.5 times each time it is moved and displayed. As shown in FIG. 102(b), a table showing the size of the pattern actually displayed at the set magnification of the third pattern display device 81 (main liquid crystal) and the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub liquid crystal). is.

In the sub-liquid crystal, the actual size of the pattern set with the enlargement ratio c1 differs by 1.5 times from the pattern set with the enlargement ratio c1 in the main liquid crystal.

In the present embodiment, when scrolling display within the same display device, the display is gradually enlarged at the same magnification ratio. It may be set to be close to 1.5 times (ratio of pixel size) at the boundary between the liquid crystal and the sub-liquid crystal. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display the switching between the main liquid crystal and the sub-liquid crystal while suppressing a sense of incompatibility. Alternatively, the display may be scrolled from the main liquid crystal to the sub liquid crystal while being reduced. In this case, similarly to the enlarged display, the reduction ratio may be changed gradually at the same reduction ratio or at the same ratio, and may be configured to match the reduction ratio of the pixels at the timing of switching. Also, in the present embodiment, the main pattern has been described as an example, but the main pattern is not limited to this, and other patterns, characters, characters, and the like may be used.

The electrical configuration of the display control device 114 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a block diagram of the display control device 114 in this third embodiment.

In the third embodiment, a sub display data table buffer 233m, a sub pointer 233n, and a sub time counter 233i are added to the second embodiment. Here, the sub-liquid crystal is configured in the same manner as the main liquid crystal 81 so that a different display mode can be displayed at the same time as the main liquid crystal. Therefore, the detailed description is omitted because it is the same as the description given in the second embodiment.

Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the third embodiment, only the command determination process is changed, and the other processes are the same as those in the second embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The command determination processing (not shown) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment is the variation pattern command processing (FIG. 87, S2302) is different in that it is changed to variation pattern command processing 2 (FIG. 104, S2450). Since other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 104, the variation pattern command processing 2 (S2450) in the third embodiment is the variation pattern command processing (FIG. 87(a), S2405) in the second embodiment, the processing of S2519 to S2523 is added.

In the processing of S2513, if it is determined that the button effect is not selected (S2513: No), it is determined whether the variation pattern is set to display effect using the sub liquid crystal (spherical liquid crystal device 670). If the variation pattern does not use the sub-liquid crystal, the process proceeds to S2515.

On the other hand, in the process of S2519, if it is determined that there is an effect using the sub liquid crystal (S2519: Yes), a display data table for the sub liquid crystal is set (S2520). The sub data table determination flag corresponding to the set display data table for the sub liquid crystal is set to ON (S2521). Based on the data table, time data is set in the sub time counter (S2522). A sub-pointer is initialized and set (S2523), and the process proceeds to S2515.

By configuring in this way, the sub-liquid crystal and the main liquid-crystal can independently display the display mode. Therefore, various display effects can be provided to the player.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 148. FIG. In the fourth embodiment, the configuration of the sorting unit 1064, the processing order of the balls that have won the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640, and the display control of the third symbol display device 81 are the same as those of the second embodiment described above. The other configuration is the same as that of the second embodiment. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof is omitted.

In detail, the differences between the display control of the fourth embodiment and the second embodiment are as follows. , in that an effect using the frame button 22 is added, and in the time effect, a time effect period, which will be described later, can be changed.

FIG. 105 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 105, below the variable display device unit 80 provided on the front surface of the game board 13, a sorting unit 1064 into which balls can enter is arranged. Balls entering the sorting unit 1064 are alternately sorted to a first winning hole 964a or a second left winning hole 964b, which will be described later.

Note that the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment has a right second winning opening 640 (second winning opening) as a winning opening (so-called second winning opening) in which a lottery for the special symbol 2 is executed by winning a prize. A second prize winning port disposed on the lower right side of the game board 13) and a left second prize winning port 964b (a second prize winning port disposed within the sorting unit 1064) are provided.

Now, with reference to FIG. 106, the configuration of the sorting unit 1064 will be described. 106(a) and (b) are diagrams showing the internal structure of the sorting unit 1064. FIG. Actually, a cover made of transparent resin is arranged on the front side, and the surface of the cover is colored with a spiral pattern so that the inside of the cover is difficult to see. In addition, a decorative LED (illustrated) is attached to the sorting unit 1064, and emits light when the pachinko machine 10 is performing a jackpot game or when performing a normal game to make the game board 13 gorgeous. I'm doing a performance to do it. The light emitted when performing such an effect is reflected on the surface of the cover body, making it difficult to see the inside of the distribution unit 1064 while the game is being played on the pachinko machine 10, and the game is being played. The inside of the sorting unit 1064 is configured to be easily visible when it is not installed. By constructing in this way, it is possible to prevent cheating using the principle of the ball distribution mechanism, and to allow the store clerk to easily visually inspect the inside of the distribution unit 1064 when a game is not being played. ing.

At the upper part of the sorting unit 1064, a passage opening through which game balls can enter is provided, and a transmissive ball entry sensor 1064a that can detect that a game ball has passed through the passage opening is arranged. . Balls that have passed through the passage openings are alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first winning opening 964a and the second left winning opening 964b arranged therebelow.

The balls sorted by the sorting member 900 roll on the first guide member 900z1 and the second guide member 900z2 erected on the sorting unit 1064, and are guided to respective winning holes. In this way, by providing the guide members 900z1 and 900z2 between the distribution member 900 configured to be rotatable to the left and right and the respective prize winning openings 964a and 964b, the rotatably operated distributing member 900 is connected to the respective winning openings. It is possible to prevent contact with 964a and 964b. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the size of the distribution member 900 .

As for the size of the sorting member 900, it is desirable that the size of the accommodating portion 900a of the sorting member 900 is such that two balls are not accommodated (the length of the wall surface constituting the accommodating portion 900a is less than 5.5 mm). good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the plurality of balls accommodated in the accommodating portion 900 a from being balanced and hindering the rotation of the distribution member 900 . In addition, in order to prevent one of the storage sections 900a from continuously receiving a plurality of game balls, a gently sloping section may be provided to temporarily receive the ball entering the sorting unit 1064 and flow down a gentle slope. By using such a configuration, the balls that enter the sorting unit 1064 in succession (the balls that form a string of beads) flow down the gently sloping portion, creating a gap between the balls. It is possible to prevent one accommodating portion 900a from continuously receiving balls.

The distribution member 900 is attached to a base body provided on the rear side of the distribution unit 1064 so as to be able to rotate left and right via a pivot portion 900d. Alternatively, it is configured to be received at 900c. The distribution member 900 is bilaterally symmetrical with respect to the shaft support portion 900d, and is axially fixed so that the boundary wall between the storage portions 900a and 900c is in a vertical state (directly above) due to the weight of the distribution member 900. It is When the game ball is received by the storage portion 900a, the distribution member 900 rotates counterclockwise due to the weight of the game ball and guides the game ball to the first winning opening 964a.

Limiting members 900y1 and 900y2 are erected in the sorting unit 1064, and the range of rotation of the sorting member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 45 degrees in the left-right direction. A magnet 900b is provided at the boundary between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b.

A magnet (base-side magnet) 901 is arranged on the base body provided on the back side of the sorting unit 1064 at a position on the center line of the passage opening. The magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 and the base-side magnet 901 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a bar-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is arranged and fixed so that the tip thereof faces the sorting member 900 side.

The magnet 900b is also a bar-shaped magnet similar to the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the sorting member 900 so that the tip thereof faces the base-side magnet 901 side. The distribution member 900 rotates, and the base-side magnet 901 and the magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 come closest to each other at a position where the boundary wall between the storage portions 900a and 900c is directly above (tips face each other). position. Here, since the magnets are arranged to have the same polarity, the magnets repel each other, and the boundary wall of the distribution member 900 does not stop at the position where it faces directly upward, but rotates to either the left or right position. will be maintained.

As a result, when the magnet 900b provided on the boundary wall of the sorting member 900 comes to a position (right above) on the center line of the passage port due to its own weight, the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 repel each other. The sorting member 900 rotates to either the left or the right, and one of the storage portions 900a and 900c faces the ball receiving side (upper side of the game machine) entering the sorting unit 1064.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring due to contact of the entered ball with the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900c.

In addition, due to the repulsion between the magnet 900b and the base side magnet 901, for example, the accommodation portion 900a receives the game ball and rotates about 45 degrees to the left, guiding the game ball to the first winning hole 964a. It is possible to prevent the right rotation of 900 (accommodating portion 900a facing upward). As a result, after the game ball is guided to the first winning hole 964a, the receiving portion 900c faces upward, and the next ball entering the sorting unit 1064 is received by the receiving portion 900c, and the weight of the ball is increased. This causes the distribution member 900 to rotate about 90 degrees to the right, guiding the game ball to the second winning opening 964b. In this manner, the sorting member 900 can alternately guide the ball entering the sorting unit 1064 to the first winning hole 964a and the second left winning hole 964b. Therefore, it is possible to evenly distribute the game balls to the first winning port 964a and the left second winning port 964b and enter the balls, and a lottery game ( The first lottery game) and the lottery game (second lottery game) caused by the entry of the ball into the left second winning hole 964b can be efficiently executed.

Next, the operation of the distribution member 900 when a ball enters the distribution unit 1064 will be described. FIG. 106(a) shows a state in which the accommodating portion 900a of the sorting member 900 is positioned so as to face the passage opening of the sorting unit 1064 (upper side of the gaming machine). In this state, the magnet 900b is positioned to the right of the base-side magnet 901, and the leftward rotational force due to the weight of the sorting member 900 and the repulsive force between the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 are balanced. is being maintained. In this case, when the ball passes through the passage opening, the ball is housed in the housing portion 900a, and the distribution member 900 is rotated counterclockwise by the weight of the game ball, and while rolling on the guide portion 900z1, the ball enters the first prize winning opening 964a. and is induced. When a ball enters the first winning hole 964a, prize balls (for example, three) are paid out, and a first lottery game is executed.

After the balls are distributed to the first prize winning openings 964a by the distribution member 900, the distribution member 900 is maintained at a position where the housing portion 900c faces upward as shown in FIG. 106(b). After that, when the ball passes through the passage opening, it is accommodated in the accommodation portion 900c, and the game ball is distributed to the left second winning opening 964b. When a ball enters the second left winning hole 964b, prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and a second lottery game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to alternately distribute the first winning opening 964a and the second left winning opening 964b.

Note that the configuration of the distribution member 900 is not limited to the configuration described above. For example, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid may be used to rotate the distribution member 900 at regular intervals. When adopting such a configuration, the position where the game ball can be guided to one of the winning holes (for example, the first winning hole 964a) is set as the origin position, and when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the origin position or return to the origin position when it is detected that the lottery game has not been performed for a long time. By doing so, it is possible to provide a fair game to the players.

Also, in this embodiment, the distribution destination of the distribution member 900 is two directions, the first prize winning port 964a and the left second prize winning port 964b, but it may be configured to distribute in three directions or more. In such a case, it is preferable to provide a through gate 67 that causes the second symbol (ordinary symbol) lottery and a general winning hole 63 that causes the payout of prize balls to be distributed. By doing so, it is possible to concentrate the devices that cause the games (lottery and prize balls) of the pachinko machine 10 in one place, and secure a large area on the game board 13 that can be used for decoration and performance. This makes it possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the number of winning balls when entering the first winning hole 964a and the second left winning hole 964b are the same, but they may be different. Also, although the distribution member 900 is configured to evenly distribute to each distribution destination, the distribution ratio may be changed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment can store up to eight lottery games (four first lottery games and four second lottery games) in order of ball entry resulting from ball entry. (details will be described later). Therefore, the two lottery games can be equally memorized by adopting a configuration in which the balls entering the sorting unit 1064 alternately enter the first prize winning port 964a and the left second prize winning port 964b as described above. It is possible to prevent a situation in which only one of the lottery games is stored and the maximum number of lottery games to be stored (8) is not reached.

Moreover, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is configured to perform the second lottery game even when the ball enters the second right winning hole 640 . That is, during normal operation, a left-handed game (a game in which a ball is shot aiming at the left side of the game area provided on the game board 13) is performed, and by aiming at the sorting unit 1064, the first lottery game and the first lottery game are played. 2 A lottery game is provided alternately, and a right-handed game (a game in which a ball is shot aiming at the right side of the game area provided on the game board 13) during the probability change and the time reduction when the electric accessory 640a is easily opened. , and aiming at the right second winning hole 640, the game can be played so as to always receive the second lottery game.

Next, the effect control displayed by the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 107 is a time chart for explaining effect control relating to a reserved symbol effect, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 107, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is controlled to perform a plurality of reserved symbol effects based on an increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, on the condition that the number of reserved balls becomes a predetermined number or more, a reserved design effect different from the normal (reserved effect performed when the number of reserved balls is equal to or less than a predetermined number) is performed. The details of the reserved symbol effect will be described later, but by performing a special effect when the number of reserved balls exceeds a predetermined number, the player can see the special effect. , the game is continued so that the number of held balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined number or reaches the upper limit.

First, increase and decrease in the number of held balls shown in FIG. 107 will be described. The number of reserved balls is the number of stored information related to the lottery game performed as a result of the ball entering the first winning hole 964a or the second left winning hole 964b. In this embodiment, the number of reserved balls is The maximum is set to 8 (4 first lottery games, 4 second lottery games). It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is provided with two second winning holes as described above, but in the present description, the left-handed game in which the number of pending balls is likely to be eight This will be described using states. Therefore, of the two second winning openings, the left second winning opening 964b will be used for explanation.

The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a variable state (variable time) for a predetermined time in order to identifiably display the result of the lottery game (jackpot or loss). The variation time is used to provide the player with an effect suggesting the result of the lottery game (for example, dynamic display (variation display) displayed on the third pattern display device 81), thereby enhancing the interest in the game. . In addition, a plurality of variable times are set according to the result of the lottery game. For example, if the result of the lottery game is lost, it is set to 5 seconds, if it is out of reach, it is set to 30 seconds, and if it is a big hit, it is set to 60 seconds. ing. This is to encourage the player whether or not the result of the lottery game currently being played is a big win, and the longer the fluctuation time, the longer the effect can be performed.

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is designed so that a plurality of the above-described lottery games cannot be performed at the same time. It has a function (suspension function) of storing, when a ball enters, a lottery game caused by the ball entering, to be performed after the current lottery game is finished. The number of stored lottery games is the number of pending balls.

In other words, the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls shown in FIG. increases, the lottery game ends, and the number of reserved balls decreases at the timing when a new lottery game starts, and the maximum value of the number of reserved balls is eight. This number of reserved balls is displayed using the reserved pattern in the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 108(b)), and the lottery result of the individually stored lottery game (the result of the judgment result ), a reserved symbol effect (details will be described later) is performed to change the display mode of the reserved symbols based on the information.

A period A shown in FIG. 107 represents a period until the number of reserved balls reaches eight, and during this period, a normal reserved effect is performed as a reserved symbol effect. Note that the description of the normal hold effect is omitted because it is the same as the content described in the above-described second embodiment.

Next, when the number of reserved balls reaches 8, a reserved 8-ball effect is performed (start of period B). This reserved 8-pieces effect is a reserved symbol effect performed using the 8 reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds (see FIG. 110). The period B is a period from the start of the 8-ball performance to the end of the 8-ball performance (at the time when the final lottery game of the 8-ball ball used in the 8-ball performance is started). be. That is, the period B is continued until the eighth lottery game is started after the number of reserved balls reaches eight.

When the number of reserved balls is increased (a new lottery game is stored) during the period B, an additional winning performance is performed. The additional prize effect is a reserved pattern effect that is performed when a new lottery game is memorized (additional winning) while a reserved pattern effect using a plurality of reserved patterns such as a reserved 8-piece effect is being performed. , Unlike the normal reserved effect, this is an effect that changes the reserved design so that the reserved design effect using a plurality of reserved designs is continuously performed (see FIG. 111(b)). By performing this additional winning performance, the player continues to play the game even during the execution of the reserved 8-piece performance in order to experience the reserved pattern performance different from usual. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game, and to reduce the problem of the player becoming bored with the game early.

Next, when the number of reserved balls is 5 or more at the end of period B, a special continuous effect is performed using all reserved symbols displayed at that time (start of period C). That is, the special continuation performance is a reserved symbol performance performed only when at least five lottery games are newly stored during the period B. Since the start condition of this special continuation effect is more difficult than that of the above-described reserved 8-piece effect, the reserved pattern effect provided is also a valuable effect for the player. Valuable effects include, for example, always displaying a premium effect that is displayed only in a small portion of cases where the result of the lottery game is a jackpot, or displaying the points that the player has accumulated regardless of the result of the lottery game. It is conceivable to display a large amount of information that can be given. A period C is a period from the start of the special continuation performance to the end of the special continuation performance (at the time when the final lottery game among the reserved balls used for the special continuation performance is started). Note that the additional prize effect is executed during the period C as well.

When the period C during which the special continuation performance is performed is over, the process shifts to the period A again. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a plurality of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 on the condition that the number of reserved balls reaches a predetermined number (eight). A multiple reserved pattern effect (retained 8-piece effect) using is performed. Then, when the number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (five) at the time when the multiple reserved symbol effect is completed, the plurality of reserved symbols displayed at that time are displayed. A second plural reserved symbol effect (special continuation effect) is performed using the symbol. In addition, an additional winning performance different from the normal reserved performance is performed for a newly generated reserved pattern while the multiple reserved pattern performance using the plurality of reserved patterns is being performed.

With this configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game so that the reserved symbols are always displayed in a predetermined number or more.

Next, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 112. FIG. FIG. 108(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. In this embodiment, a reserved design (special figure 1 reserved design) corresponding to winning the first winning opening 964 and a reserved design (special figure 2 reserved design) corresponding to winning the second winning opening 964b on the left They are displayed in the sub-display area Ds in order from the left side of the screen (up to 8). Due to the structure of the distribution unit 1064 described above, in the left-handed state, the special figure 1 reserved design and the special figure 2 reserved design are alternately displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special figure 1 reserved design and the special figure 2 reserved design are displayed in an unidentifiable manner, but each may be made in an identifiable manner. In addition, a reserved symbol that has been displayed corresponding to the special symbol that is being variably displayed on the main display area Dm may be separately displayed at a predetermined location in the sub-display area Ds. By configuring in this way, the player can grasp which of the special figure 1 reserved symbols and the special figure 2 reserved symbols is being used (whether it will be played). As a result, it is possible to increase interest in the progress of the game. Other parts have the same configuration as that of the above-described second embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 108(b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. In FIG. 108(b), seven pending symbols are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this embodiment, as described above, the reserved memory of the special figure 1 and the reserved memory of the special figure 2 are alternately stored, but the reserved symbols cannot be identified. By displaying the reserved symbols in this manner, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp whether the lottery game variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. , the player can play the game while expecting what kind of privilege will be provided when the jackpot is won.

In addition, the mode of the reserved design to be displayed may be displayed so as to be identifiable by the reserved memory of the special figure 1 and the reserved memory of the special figure 2. Moreover, whether the lottery game currently fluctuating is based on the special figure 1 or based on the special figure 2 may be displayed so as to be identifiable. By configuring in this way, the player can be made aware of the privilege in the event of a big win in advance, and can be given a sense of anticipation for the performance during the fluctuation.

FIG. 109 is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing a normal pending effect during the period A of FIG. 107. FIG. In FIG. 109(a), the fourth pending symbol from the left is variably displayed as a "push" symbol (announcement pending symbol). It is displayed by changing to the "△" symbol shown in (b). In addition, about the detailed content, since it is the same as that of 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, it abbreviate|omits. In the present embodiment, the variable display content of the reserved design ("△" design) is determined based on the result of the lottery game corresponding to the variably displayed reserved design. It may be determined based on the result of the lottery game corresponding to the reserved symbols displayed before and after the reserved symbols. In such a case, it is preferable to make the display contents after the variable display such as an "arrow" symbol to make the player expect that there is a chance near the reserved symbol to be variably displayed.

Further, it may be configured such that the reserved symbols that have been variably displayed once are again variably displayed after a period of time. By doing so, even if the content of the variable display is content that does not give a sense of expectation, there is a possibility that it will be variably displayed again and changed to a content that gives a sense of expectation, so that the lottery game corresponding to the reserved symbol is possible. It is possible to make the player have expectations until the is executed.

FIG. 110 is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing a pending 8-piece effect during period B of FIG. 107 . FIG. 110(a) shows a state in which the eight pending symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 have changed to notification pending symbols, and the player presses the frame button 22 ( operation), the symbols displayed on the left are sequentially changed (see FIG. 110(b)). In addition, since the detailed content is the same as that of the above-described second embodiment, it is omitted. In this embodiment, each time the frame button 22 is pressed once, the notification pending patterns are changed in order from the left. The order may be set randomly. By doing so, it is possible to make the player's operation (depression of the frame button 22) for changing the notification pending pattern have a game effect.

FIG. 111 is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing the pending 8 effect and the additional effect during the period B of FIG. 107 . FIG. 111(a) shows a state after all the notification pending symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 are changed by operating the frame button 22. FIG. In the present embodiment, in the case of performing notification to determine that there is a reserved memory with a jackpot in the result of judgment of success or failure among the eight reserved memories, eight reserved symbols are used to say "jackpot !!!" is set to be displayed, and the display of "big hit!!!?" It is something to do.

FIG. 111(b) is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing a state in which three reserved memories have been consumed and two new reserved memories have been added from the state of FIG. 111(a). As shown, in FIG. 111(a), 8 reserved symbols were used to display "Big Win!!!?" The pending symbol (“jackpot”) that had been displayed as a player has disappeared from the display screen. In addition, two reserved patterns displayed corresponding to the two reserved memories newly generated during this period are displayed in the sub-display area Ds as notification reserved patterns.

In this way, for the new reserved memory generated while the reserved pattern performance by the reserved 8-pieces production is being performed, it is not the normal reserved pattern production, but the additional winning that makes it look like the reserved 8-pieces production is continuing. A performance will be held. Specifically, a notification pending design (“push” design) is displayed as a pending design corresponding to the new pending storage (see FIG. 111(b)). The display mode of the notification reserved pattern changes by operating the frame button 22 in the same manner as the above-described reserved 8-piece effect. Specifically, for example, if any one of the two newly reserved memories has a reserved memory in which the winning judgment result is a big hit, the notification reserved pattern corresponding to the reserved memory is displayed on the frame button 22. When changed by operation, the last "?" of the character string "Big win !!!?" itself is also changed to "!". In addition, if both of the two newly stored hold-memorized results are loses, the notification hold pattern is displayed without changing the character string "big hit !!!?" to "?" By doing so, it becomes possible to associate the reserved pattern corresponding to the new reserved memory generated during the reserved 8-pieces production with the reserved 8-pieces production, and the player can continue to play while the reserved 8-pieces production is being performed. A game can be played by continuously shooting game balls in order to generate more reserved balls.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the rightmost character (character corresponding to the last reserved pattern to be digested) of the character strings displayed by the eight pending effects is notified ("?" or "!") Since it is configured to suggest the result of the judgment by , even in the additional winning effect, the effect of changing one character using the reserved pattern corresponding to one reserved memory is performed. When adopting a notification mode that suggests the result of winning or losing determination using a plurality of characters, the plurality of characters may be changed using a reserved pattern corresponding to one reserved memory in the additional winning effect, or a plurality of characters may be changed. A plurality of characters may be changed using a reserved design corresponding to the reserved memory of .

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the reserved symbols is changed to display a character string of 8 characters, that is, the number of characters corresponding to the number of reserved symbols is changed. A plurality of pending symbols may be combined to form one notification mode and variably displayed by eight pending effects without being limited thereto.

In addition, in the 8 reserved effects of the present embodiment, the notification mode suggesting the result of the judgment is displayed in characters corresponding to the last reserved pattern among the 8 reserved patterns. , All of the characters on the right side of the character string displayed by the 8 reserved patterns (the characters corresponding to the reserved patterns that are digested in the latter half of the 8 reserved patterns), not the last reserved pattern Alternatively, either one may be used to display the notification mode.

FIG. 112 is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing a special continuation effect in period C of FIG. 107. FIG. FIG. 112(a) shows a state in which the reserved pattern corresponding to the last reserved memory among the eight reserved memories used for the eight reserved effects has been digested, that is, the third pattern display device 81. The five "?" displayed in the secondary display area Ds are displayed by the above-described additional winning effects. In this state, if there are 5 or more pending memories, "Press me!" is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device. When the player presses (operates) the frame button 22, the mode of the reserved symbols displayed as "??????" changes again. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 112(a), if there is a judgment result that the hit/fail judgment result is a big hit among the reserved memories corresponding to the reserved symbols displayed as "????" , as shown in FIG. 112(b). In this way, when the number of pending memories (the number of displayed pending symbols) at the time when the display of the pending symbols by the eight pending effects is over is a predetermined number (five in this embodiment) or more, a further special Since the reserved symbol performance is performed, it is possible to encourage the player to continuously shoot the game balls.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a special continuous effect is performed using a plurality of reserved symbols displayed as "?" by the additional winning effect. It is preferable to set the display ratio to be small, and set the display ratio to be large, which indicates that the character indicating that the big win is confirmed by the special continuous effect. In this way, in the special continuation effect that is performed after the additional winning effect, it is displayed that the determination result of the big win is included in the pending and stored success/failure determination results (see FIG. 112(b)). It is possible to increase the frequency that can be performed, and it is possible to increase the player's desire to see the special continuation effect.

In addition, in the special continuous effect, in addition to the character string (message) based on the determination result of the success/failure determination result that is retained and stored, information for acquiring a large amount of points accumulated by the player is displayed, You may perform the production|presentation which provides the privilege which displays the game state (probability variation or normal). By doing so, it is possible to encourage the player to continue shooting game balls in order to receive benefits other than the result of the success/failure determination.

It should be noted that at the timing (boundary between period B and period C in FIG. 107) to determine whether or not to perform the special continuous effect, the number of pending memories (5 in this embodiment) that is the condition for performing the special continuous effect In the case of reserved memory, the reserved symbols corresponding to the surplus reserved memory are emphasized characters (“!”, “Congratulations”, etc.) for emphasizing the character string (“congratulations”) changed by the special continuation effect. should be changed to By doing so, even if the number of surplus reserved memories is indefinite, it is possible to perform an effect without changing the display contents displayed by the special continuation effect and giving a sense of incongruity.

Further, when the special continuation effect is to be performed, the suspended symbols displayed as "??????" may be temporarily changed to notification suspended symbols. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the special continuation effect is a reserved symbol effect using a plurality of reserved symbols.

In this embodiment, the above-described additional winning effect is performed even while the special continuous effect is being performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal reserved pattern is changed to the notification reserved pattern prompting the player to operate the frame button 22, and then the notification reserved pattern is changed based on the operation of the frame button 22. , Based on the success/failure determination results contained in the eight pending memories, a pending pattern (result display pending pattern) that makes one sense with a plurality of pending symbols is displayed, but it is not limited to this, for example , the characters (“large”, “hit”, “ri”, etc.) displayed by varying the notification pending pattern may be displayed at another location on the third pattern display device 81 . By constructing in this way, even if the reserved symbols used for the reserved 8-pieces presentation are consumed as the game progresses, the character string displayed as a result of the reserved 8-pieces presentation can be maintained. In this case, it is preferable that the character string displayed in another place is erased at the timing when all of the reserved symbols used for the reserved 8-piece effect are consumed.

Further, as the dynamic display of the third symbol, if an effect of temporarily stopping during the variable time and then restarting (so-called pseudo continuous effect or development effect to super reach) is performed, the frame button 22 has already been pressed. It is preferable to change the reserved pattern which is the result display reserved pattern by the operation to the notification reserved pattern, and perform the reserved 8 performance again. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform a reserved symbol performance corresponding to the dynamic display performance of the third symbol that makes one lottery game look like a plurality of lottery games.

In this way, in the case of redoing the pending symbol effect in conjunction with the dynamic display of the third symbol, the display contents of the first result display pending symbol are used as the success/fail judgment results contained in the eight pending memories. On the other hand, an effect with a low expectation of a big hit is made, and in the 8 pending effects to be performed again, the reserved pattern display corresponding to the success judgment result is performed, or the result display is displayed in the 8 pending effects to be performed again in advance. It is preferable to set the display contents of the reserved symbols so as to have a higher expectation than the display contents of the first result display reserved symbols. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which, as a result of redoing the pending symbol presentation, the display content changes to a display content with a lower expectation than the pending symbol presentation of our office.

Also, eight pending symbols may be used to display a character string suggesting that the third symbol restarts, such as "Keizoku!!!" . By doing so, it is possible to notify the player of the game contents other than the winning/failure judgment results contained in the eight reserved memories by using the reserved symbols, and to provide a game machine rich in game characteristics. It becomes possible.

In addition, the result of winning judgment contained in the 8 reserved memories, the lottery result of the third symbol dynamically displayed at that time, and the effect that the third symbol dynamically displayed at that time restarts. The possibility of being provided with an advantageous state for the player based on any one result or a combination of two or more results out of the determination result as to whether or not there is a chance is expressed as "chance!!!!" Marine-chan!” may be displayed as an abstract character string. By doing so, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with more amusement.

In this embodiment, the condition for carrying out the pending 8 effect is the case where the number of pending memories is 8, but it may be 7 as long as a predetermined number is stored.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a reserved design that changes according to the reserved design production is indicated, and the reserved design is changed to a notification reserved design as a notification for prompting the player to operate the frame button 22, but the reserved design is displayed. Another display may be used without changing the mode.

In addition, in the present embodiment, regardless of the success/failure determination result in which the notification pending pattern is retained and stored, the same display mode ("push" pattern) is always used, and the result display pending pattern is displayed by operating the frame button 22. The content of the display mode ("big hit!!!") is changed based on the result of winning/failing determination that is retained and stored. As a result, the player can see the effect suggesting the result of the winning/failure judgment held and stored for the first time by operating the frame button 22, so that the player can actively participate in the game. , it is possible to prevent early boredom. It should be noted that a plurality of notification pending symbols may be provided based on the success/fail determination results that are stored pending. By doing so, it is possible to easily provide a plurality of levels of expectations by combining the display mode of the notification pending pattern and the display mode of the result display pending pattern.

Next, using FIGS. 113 to 117, details of the composite display effects described in the second embodiment will be described. In addition, description is abbreviate|omitted about the location which overlaps with 2nd Embodiment mentioned above. FIG. 113 is a time chart for explaining the flow regarding the composite display effect. With reference to FIG. 113, a series of flow of the variable display using the composite display effect will be described.

First, when a predetermined time (eg, 10 seconds) elapses after the third symbol has started to change on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it becomes a frame button effect preparation period (eg, 10 seconds). 114(a)). Then, after the third symbol is in the ready-to-win display mode, the frame button operation effective period (for example, 10 seconds) is reached, and a display is made for the player to operate the frame button 22, and the frame button 22 is displayed within the frame button operation effective period. is pressed (operated) (see FIG. 114(b)). After the frame button operation effective period has elapsed, if the frame button operation of a predetermined condition is performed within the frame button operation effective period, the process shifts to the PUSH effect, which is a synthetic display effect (see FIG. 115(b)).

On the other hand, when the frame button operation of the predetermined condition is not performed within the frame button operation effective period, the normal effect period for normal super ready-to-win effect is entered (see FIG. 115(c)). In addition, when the current variation is reach loss, regardless of the content of the frame button operation within the frame button operation effective period, the process stops with the third symbol missing without transitioning to the synthetic display effect.

The PUSH effect is divided into the first half part (period of FIG. 113(d)) and the second half part (period of FIG. 113(e)). (Fig. 116(a)), display the "push" patterns synthesized and displayed corresponding to the "push" patterns collected in the latter part (Fig. 116(b)), and press the frame button 22 (operation). By doing so, the "push" pattern is changed to a number pattern. After that, the combination of the number patterns displayed on the display screen is temporarily stopped, and the pattern is determined after the lapse of a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 113, the synthesized display effect in this embodiment has the same fluctuation time as other predetermined super ready-to-win effects. Furthermore, the image data from the start of the variation of the third symbol to the development of super reach (image data used in the period of FIGS. 113 (a) and (b)), and the data from the temporary stop of the variation of the third symbol to the finalization The image data (image data used in the period of FIG. 113(f)) is configured so as to be able to use other predetermined super reach effect image data. By doing so, it is not necessary to prepare the image data used from the start of variation to the finalization of the pattern for each super ready-to-win effect, and the amount of image data can be reduced. In addition, it is configured such that out-of-reach effects can be performed using image data used in the periods (a), (b), and (f) shown in FIG. 113 .

FIG. 114(a) is a diagram exemplifying the display screen during the period (a) shown in FIG. 113. FIG. This display screen is displayed during the frame button effect preparation period for informing the player in advance that the effect for operating the frame button 22 will be performed, and the player may forget to operate the frame button 22. This is a display to prevent

FIG. 114(b) is a diagram exemplifying the display screen during the period (b) shown in FIG. This display screen is displayed during the frame button operation valid period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid. A status display (“1/50”) indicating that the frame button 22 has been pressed “1” is displayed. Note that this embodiment has a function of increasing the number of times of pressing by continuing to press the frame button 22 for a predetermined time. In addition, the remaining time of the frame button operation effective period (continuous hit mission period) may be displayed.

FIG. 115(a) is a diagram exemplifying the display screen during the period (c) shown in FIG. This display screen is a screen that is displayed during the normal effect period that shifts to when the consecutive hit mission cannot be achieved during the frame button operation valid period, and its contents are shown in FIG. Since it is the same as , the explanation is omitted.

FIG. 115(b) is a diagram exemplifying the display screen during the period (d) shown in FIG. Since the display contents of this display screen are the same as those in FIG. Although not shown, the values (acquisition number, acquisition points, and jackpot expected value) based on the "push" symbols acquired during this period (for example, 15 seconds) are displayed in a predetermined area of the display screen in colors and characters. .

FIG. 116(a) is a diagram exemplifying the display screen in the second half period of (d) shown in FIG. Since the display contents of this display screen are the same as those in FIG.

Although six "push" symbols are stopped and displayed in this figure, the number of "push" symbols to be stopped and displayed varies depending on the stop mode of the symbol rows. Thus, the number of "push" symbols stopped and displayed suggests the degree of expectation for the big win in the variable display, and the greater the number of "push" symbols that are stopped and displayed, the higher the degree of expectation for the big win. is preset. In other words, a plurality of variation patterns are provided for performing a composite display effect in which the number of "push" symbols that are stopped and displayed are different, and the "push" symbols that are stopped and displayed are more likely than the variation pattern with a small number of "push" symbols that are stopped and displayed. A variation pattern with a large number of symbols is set so that the ratio of the success/failure judgment result to be a big hit is high.

FIG. 116(b) is a diagram exemplifying the display screen during the period (e) shown in FIG. Since the display contents of this display screen are the same as those in FIG.

In this embodiment, the blank pattern is changed to a "push" pattern, and the "push" pattern is synthesized and displayed. It may be configured so as to synthesize and display sentences (messages). With such a configuration, at the timing when the blank pattern is changed to various characters, the player can combine the displayed characters and predict the sentences to be synthesized and displayed, and can be used in the later game. It is possible to create a sense of expectation. Also, when such a configuration is used, it is preferable to synthesize and display sentences using some of the displayed characters, rather than synthesize and display using all of the various displayed characters. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to anticipate sentences of various patterns. In addition, in order to make it possible to identify the characters that are always used, if the mode (color, size, etc.) of the characters that are always used is made different from the other characters, it will be possible for the player to see the combined display. It is possible to give a hint of the sentence to be created, and it is possible to make it more enjoyable to predict the sentence to be created in the composite display.

FIG. 117 shows the display screen during the period (f) shown in FIG. On this display screen, when the player presses the frame button 22, the composite display pattern stops at the combination of the third pattern (main pattern) indicating the winning/failing determination result. In this figure, the game stops at a combination of "777" indicating that the win/loss determination result is a jackpot, and is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. It should be noted that during the period (f) shown in FIG. 113, it is displayed in a state of temporary stop at "777" (slightly shaking state), and is completely stopped at the timing when the period (f) shown in FIG. 113 ends. state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as the variation pattern with the same variation time, there are a variation pattern that performs a push effect and a variation pattern that does not perform a push effect (normal super reach variation pattern). Based on the result of determining the achievement condition of (1), either a variation pattern in which the push effect is performed or a variation pattern in which the push effect is not performed is set. That is, since the push effect is provided as a variation pattern, it becomes easy to replace the subsequent effect in accordance with the result of the repeated hit mission. In addition, since a player who wants to experience the push effect needs to achieve the repeated hitting mission, the player actively participates in the game, and the motivation for the game can be enhanced.

Next, using FIGS. 118 to 121, the details of the time presentation described in the second embodiment will be described. In addition, description is abbreviate|omitted about the location which overlaps with 2nd Embodiment mentioned above. In addition, in this embodiment, it has the function which can set the period which performs time production|presentation. By providing this function, by synchronizing the effects executed by a plurality of pachinko machines 10, a conventional time effect (synchronized effect) was performed to create a sense of unity. By varying (extending) the period during which the synchronous performance is performed, it is possible to provide the player with a performance with unexpectedness.

FIG. 118 is a time chart for explaining the flow of time presentation. A series of flow relating to the time presentation will be described with reference to FIG.

In this embodiment, there is a function that can set the period during which the time effect is performed (details will be described later). , in FIG. 118(b), the first time presentation after the power is turned on is set to be performed for 8 minutes. Furthermore, the 8-minute time production shown in FIG. 3 minutes is set as production mode D which is a special time production period. By setting in this way, during the first five minutes in which the time performance is performed, the performance is performed as the same time performance period (performance mode B) in the case of the time performance period of 5 minutes and the time performance period of 8 minutes. becomes possible. Then, when the production mode B ends (when the time production has passed for 5 minutes), an inciting production is put in whether or not to shift to the production mode C or the production mode D, and if the transition condition is satisfied, the production mode C. or the production mode D is controlled.

In the above-described time production of the second embodiment, the condition not to shift from the production mode B to the production mode A which is the normal game period, that is, the condition to shift to the production mode C is whether or not the condition is in the reserved memory at the end of the production mode B. The judgment result includes the judgment result of a big hit, and among the game machines in which the production mode B is executed, the number of game machines that shift to the production mode D is extremely reduced, and the production mode C , itself informs that there is a big win in the reserved memory, and there is a problem that the player loses interest in the variable display of the third symbol.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in addition to the technology described in the second embodiment described above, the condition for shifting to the production mode D as a condition not to shift from the production mode B to the production mode A that is the normal game period, In other words, since the period in which the time effect is performed is set to 8 minutes in advance, the number of game machines that shift from the effect mode B to the effect mode other than the effect mode A can be increased. Further, by unifying the content of the performance in the performance mode C and the performance mode D, when the player shifts from the performance mode B to the performance mode (C or D) other than the performance mode A, the player will soon hit the jackpot. It is possible to raise the expectation that it will become.

FIG. 119(a) is a diagram exemplifying the display screen during the time presentation period shown in FIG. 118, and shows a state in which two minutes have passed since the time presentation was started. "Remaining 180 seconds" displayed on the upper right of this screen is the remaining number of seconds until 5 minutes have elapsed since the start of the time presentation. In other words, the same display is made whether 5 minutes or 8 minutes is selected as the time presentation period. Other contents are the same as those in FIG. 46 of the second embodiment described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 119(b) is a diagram exemplifying the display screen during the time effect period shown in FIG. 118, and shows a state in which 4 minutes and 57 seconds have passed (remaining 3 seconds) since the start of the time effect. . It should be noted that regardless of whether 5 minutes or 8 minutes is selected as the time rendering period, the display mode is the same as in FIG. 46(b) of the second embodiment described above. omit the explanation.

FIG. 120(a) is a diagram exemplifying the display screen at the end of the time presentation period shown in FIG. 118, and shows a state in which five minutes have passed since the start of the time presentation. It should be noted that whether 5 minutes or 8 minutes is selected as the time rendering period, the display mode will be the same as in FIG. 47(a) of the second embodiment described above. omit the explanation.

FIG. 120(b) is a diagram exemplifying the display screen during the time production extension period or the special extension production period shown in FIG. During the time performance extension period, the super school of fish time continues until the variable display for a big hit ends, and during the special extension performance period, the super school of fish time continues for 3 minutes. Therefore, if the number of remaining seconds is displayed, the player will easily understand whether the current super school of fish time is during the extended time effect period or during the special extended effect period. In the upper right corner of , "remaining ? seconds" is displayed. By displaying in this way, every time the variable display is performed during the super school of fish time, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that a big win may be possible. Other display contents are the same as those in FIG. 47(b) of the above-described second embodiment, so description of the display contents is omitted.

FIG. 121 shows that at the end of the time production period shown in FIG. 118 or at the end of the special extension production period, the judgment result that the hit or miss judgment result is a big hit with the reserved memory stored at that time or the special symbol during fluctuation. It is the figure which illustrated the display screen when it is not set. In this way, the image at the end of the super fish school time is shared regardless of whether it is after the end of the time effect period or after the end of the special extension effect period, so it is possible to reduce the amount of image data. can. Note that the display contents are the same as those in FIG. 48 of the second embodiment described above, so the description of the display contents is omitted.

In addition, in the time production in the present embodiment, during the time production period (during the production mode B), there is no production that suggests that the time production period will be changed to the production mode C or the production mode D at the end of the time production period. Although the player is made to have expectations, the success/failure determination is performed based on the information retained and stored just before the end of the time presentation period, and if the success/failure determination result is a big win pending memory exists, that is, the time presentation period. When it is determined that the time production extension period (production mode C) will be entered after the end of the game and that the game will be a big hit, an production may be provided to suggest that effect.

In addition, when a time performance of 5 minutes or more is set in advance, that is, when shifting to a special extended performance period (performance mode D) after the end of the time performance period, a performance suggesting that effect may be provided. In this case, the content of the suggestive effect should be a content suggesting that the game should continue for 5 minutes or longer, and preferably, the suggestive content should not be able to determine whether to shift to the effect mode C or to the effect mode D.例文帳に追加For that purpose, the timing of executing the suggestive effect is just before the end of the time effect period, that is, when the change stop timing of the third symbol corresponding to the holding memory of the jackpot judgment result passes the time effect period (for example, the jackpot If the change time is 1 minute, the remaining time of the time presentation period is within 59 seconds).

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 125. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in electrical configuration in that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main controller 110 and part of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 , and a part of the ROM 234 (effect) in the display control device 114 is changed (added), and the fact that the RTC 292 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 is specified. are identical in that respect. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 122, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment.

This block diagram differs from the block diagram (FIG. 49) showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment described above in that it clearly shows that the RTC 292 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113. , and other points are the same, so the description is omitted. As described above, this RTC 292 is used as a timekeeping means for performing time production.

Other changes include that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main controller 110, part of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the sound lamp controller 113, and part of the ROM 234 in the display controller 114 are changed (added). , which will be described later with reference to FIGS. Since other parts are the same, they are denoted by the same reference numerals and their explanations are omitted.

The contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 123(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110. .

Since the ROM 202 in this embodiment is the same as the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 in the second embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

In addition to the RAM 203 in the second embodiment, the RAM 203 in this embodiment has at least a variation execution flag 203i and a variation order storage area 203j.

Variation execution flag 203i is a flag used to determine whether variation is performed in special figure 1 or variation is performed in special figure 2. This variation execution flag 203i is set in the variation execution determination process (S4004 in FIG. 127) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (S120 in FIG. 126) (see S4105 and S4107 in FIG. 127). Then, it is referred to determine the variation execution in the special symbol variation process 2 (S120 in FIG. 126) (see S4005 and S4010 in FIG. 126), and when the variation execution determination process (S4004 in FIG. 127) is performed, it is turned off. (see S4101 in FIG. 127).

The variable order storage area 203j is an area for storing the winning order of each reserved data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Eight storage areas are set in the variable order storage area 203j, and the winning order is stored in the previous storage area. In addition, the storage area is also shifted based on the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. This variable order storage area j stores the winning order in the starting winning process 2 (S121 in FIG. 130) (see S4407 and S4414 in FIG. 130). Then, it is referred to in the variation execution determination process (4004 in FIG. 126) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (S120 in FIG. 126) (see S4102 to S4104 and S4106 in FIG. 127).

Next, referring to FIG. 124, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The ROM 222 in this embodiment has at least an effect time selection table 222b in addition to the ROM 222 in the second embodiment described above (see FIG. 124(a)). In addition to the RAM 223 in the second embodiment, the RAM 223 in this embodiment includes a special continuation effect flag 223t, an additional effect flag 223u, an 8-piece effect counter 223v, a special continuation effect counter 223w, an identification number storage area 223x, It has at least an effect time storage area 223y and an activation flag 223α (see FIG. 124(b)).

The effect time selection table 222b is a table that is referred to when selecting a period during which a synchronous effect (time effect) is performed, and is used in the effect time setting process (S4904 in FIG. 145). The effect time selection table 222b has a plurality of data with different periods (time effect periods) during which a synchronous effect (time effect) is performed, and corresponds to an identification number stored in an identification number storage area 223x, which will be described later. By selecting a time presentation period, a different time presentation period is selected. Therefore, for example, by assigning the same identification number to adjacent gaming machines, it is possible to start synchronous effects at the same timing.

In this embodiment, based on the given identification number, by selecting a predetermined time production period from among the plurality of time production periods held in the production time selection table 222b, for a plurality of pachinko machines 10, all Synchronous performance is executed at the same timing to execute a performance with a sense of unity, or only some pachinko machines 10 out of a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are intentionally made to have different timings for synchronous performance to provide unexpectedness. It becomes possible to execute a certain production.

The special continuation effect flag 223t is turned on when the condition for performing the special continuation effect is established in the setting process during 8 effects (S4806 in FIG. 143). Then, when the value of the special continuation effect counter, which will be described later, becomes 0, it is turned off (S4809 in FIG. 143). When this special continuation effect flag is turned on, a special continuation effect is performed for the reserved symbol (S4605 in FIG. 136).

The additional effect flag 223u is turned on when the condition for performing the additional effect is satisfied in the 8-piece effect setting process (S1353 in FIG. 143) (S4802 in FIG. 143). Then, when the value of the 8 effect counter, which will be described later, becomes 0, and the number of reserved numbers stored is 4 or less, and when the value of the special continuous effect counter becomes 0, it turns off (Fig. 143 S4810, S4812). When this additional effect flag 223u is turned on, an additional effect is performed for the reserved symbol (S4607 in FIG. 136).

The 8 effect counter 223v is set to 8 when the 8 effect flag 223i is turned on (S1553 in FIG. 139). Then, when the fluctuation start flag 223e is ON in the fluctuation display setting process 2 (S1352 in FIG. 140), the value of the counter is decremented by 1 (S1654 in FIG. 140). This 8 effect counter 223v determines the period during which 8 effects are performed. Then, by determining that the value of the counter becomes 0, it is determined whether or not all reserved symbols (8) corresponding to the 8 effects have been consumed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect is performed using eight reserved symbols (eight effects), but when performing the effect using the reserved symbols other than eight (for example, seven), this counter Set the value to 7.

The special continuation effect counter 223w is set to 5 in the counter value when the special continuation effect flag 223t is turned on in the setting process during the 8 effects (S4807 in FIG. 143). Then, when the fluctuation start flag 223e is ON in the fluctuation display setting process 2, the value of the counter is decremented by 1 (S1655 in FIG. 140). This special continuation effect counter 223w determines the period during which the special continuation effect is performed. Then, by determining that the value of the counter becomes 0, it is determined whether or not all of the pending symbols (five) corresponding to the special continuation effect have been consumed.

In the present embodiment, the production (special continuation production) is performed using 5 reserved patterns, but if the production (special continuation production) is performed using the reserved patterns other than 5 (for example, 6) should set the value of this counter to 6.

The identification number storage area 223x stores the identification number input in the identification number input process (S1851 in FIG. 135) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (S1351 in FIG. 134) (S4506 in FIG. 135). ). Then, the identification number stored in the start-up process 2 is cleared (S1209 in FIG. 131). This identification number storage area 223x stores the identification number input by the operator in the identification number input process for setting the period (time) during which the time effect (synchronization effect) using the RTC 292 is performed. It is used. If the operator does not input the identification number, the initial value stored in the identification number storage area 223x in the initialization process of the RAM 223 (S1210 in FIG. 131) is used.

In this embodiment, an identification number can be given to each gaming machine by performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. Then, by reading the production time (time for synchronized production) corresponding to the given identification number from the production time selection table 222b stored in the ROM 222, the time production (synchronized production) using the RTC 292 is performed. It is possible to set the period.

When reading the performance time from the performance time selection table 222b, the reading is based on two parameters: the identification number stored in the identification number storage area 223x and the time data (date, day of the week, etc.) obtained from the RTC 292. It is better to By doing so, even if the identification number is the same, the period during which the synchronous performance is performed can be changed by changing the date, and the work of assigning the identification number can be reduced.

The effect time storage area 223y stores the effect time selected in the effect time setting process (S4905 in FIG. 145). Then, the presentation time stored in the start-up process 2 is cleared (S4504 in FIG. 135). This effect time storage area 223y is used to store the effect time which is the period during which the synchronous effect based on the RTC 292 is performed. It will be done.

The startup flag 223α is set to ON by the time setting process 2 executed in the startup process 2 of the sound lamp control device (S1262 in FIG. 132). Then, by the identification number input processing, it is set to off when a predetermined time (20 minutes) has passed since the activation flag was turned on, or when an identification number input operation is performed (S4504 in FIG. 135). This startup flag 223α is used to perform processing (identification number input processing) that allows operation only for a predetermined period of time after the power source of the game machine is started. The identification number can be entered only when the

Next, the presentation time selection table 222b stored in the ROM 222 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125(a) schematically shows an effect time selection table 222b, and FIG. 125(b) schematically shows a timetable of effect times selected by the effect time selection table 222b. is.

The effect time selection table 222b is used when setting specific effect time data from among a plurality of effect time data stored in the ROM 222 in the sound lamp control device 113. In this embodiment, Specific performance time data is set using an identification number that can be set and input by the operator and day of the week data as time information acquired from the RTC 292 as parameters.

In the day-of-the-week data, items of event 1 and event 2 are provided in addition to the days of the week from Sunday to Saturday. This item is for special days such as holidays and anniversaries. The date corresponding to event 1 or event 2 is set so that the event item is used with priority over the day of the week (Sunday to Saturday) item.

Next, a timetable of each performance time will be described with reference to FIG. 125(b). FIG. 125(b) shows a timetable of each presentation time selected by the presentation time selection table 222b. Different timetables are set for the performance time from "I" to "XI". 'A', 'B', and 'D' written above the timetable are the production modes set in that period, and indicate production mode A, production mode B, and production mode D, respectively. . The number below it is the time (minutes) indicating the period.

Of the production modes, production mode A is a period during which normal production is performed, and production mode B and production mode D are periods during which time production (synchronized production) is carried out. In particular, the performance mode D is set so that the transition frequency is lower than that of the performance mode B, and during the period of the performance mode D, a performance is executed in which information that can be advantageous to the player is provided. Therefore, by starting the timed effect (synchronized effect), the player can play the game while having an expectation that there is a possibility of shifting to the effect mode D.例文帳に追加

Note that the performance mode C is a performance mode that shifts only when there is a big win in the holding memory at the time when the performance mode B and the performance mode D end, that is, whether the performance mode shifts according to the game lottery result. 125 (b) is omitted, but in fact after the production mode B and the production mode D, both the production mode A and the production mode C are set, and the game lottery It is set so that an appropriate production mode is selected according to the result.

In this embodiment, of the day data, "I" to "VIII" are selected as production times using normal items (Sunday to Saturday), and of the day data, special items (Event 1, Event 2) are selected. ) are assigned to “X” and “XI” as the performance time selected when using the .

Here, the presentation time "I" will be explained. The presentation time "I" is a time table in which presentation mode B (time presentation (synchronization presentation)) is performed for 5 minutes after presentation mode A (normal period) is performed for 55 minutes, and this is repeated.

Next, presentation time "II" will be explained. The effect time "II" is that after the effect mode A (normal period) is executed for 55 minutes, the effect mode B (time effect (synchronous effect)) is 5 minutes, and the effect mode D (time effect (synchronous effect)) is 3 minutes. Minutes, that is, a timed effect (synchronized effect) is executed for a total of 8 minutes. And after that, after executing the production mode A for 52 minutes, the production mode B is executed again for 5 minutes.

The production time "I" and the production time "II" are set so that the time during which the time production (synchronous production) is performed is different. Similarly, the performance times "I" to "VIII" are set so that the period during which the time rendering (synchronized rendering) is performed is different (partially the same). However, regardless of which presentation time is selected, the timing at which the time presentation (synchronous presentation) is started is set to be the same. The period of the production mode A is made different so that the time production (synchronized production) starts 55 minutes and 115 minutes after the production time "I" and the production time "II". . By configuring in this way, even if various performance times are selected, a sense of unity can be achieved by matching the timing at which the time performance (synchronization performance) is started (the timing at which the performance mode A is switched to the performance mode B). A certain performance can be executed. In addition, since the player cannot grasp whether the current time effect is set for 5 minutes or 8 minutes at the timing when the time effect is started, whether the time effect is extended or not. It is possible to watch the time presentation while enjoying whether or not, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the day of the week data includes presentation times "X" and "XI" that are selected only when special items such as "event 1" and "event 2" are referred to. . As shown in FIG. 125(b), these two presentation times "X" and "XI" are set to be clearly different from the other presentation times. Synchronous production) occupies half of the entire time, and in the production time "XI", the entire time is a time production (synchronous production).

In this way, when normal items (from Sunday to Saturday) are used as the day-of-the-week data, the difference in the period during which the time presentation is performed is not noticed by the player as much as possible (the player is not noticed at the start of the time presentation). However, when special items (event 1, event 2) are used as the day of the week data, the effect time is set so that the period during which the time effect is performed can be clarified.

In this embodiment, the performance time is set as described above, but other methods may be used to set the performance time. For example, the presentation time corresponding to the identification number may be selected without using the day of the week data in the presentation time selection table. When such a configuration is used, the time information acquired from the RTC 292 is referred to, and when it is determined that the date has changed, the contents of the presentation time given corresponding to the identification number are changed. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the present embodiment.

In this embodiment, when the operator does not set the identification number, the identification number "I" stored as the initial value in the identification number storage area 223x of the RAM 223 is used. If it is determined that the date has changed, the identification number stored as the initial value in the identification number area 223x may be changed. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the period during which the time presentation is performed without performing an operation of inputting the identification number, and it is possible to reduce the work of the operator.

In this embodiment, the time information obtained from the RTC 292 is referred to, and the synchronous effect is performed. may be used.

As another configuration, for example, a timer is provided to measure the elapsed time from power-on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a configuration that can be set to enter a predetermined period in which the synchronous effect can be executed, or a frame button 22 By operating , predetermined information is input, and based on the input predetermined information, it is possible to enter into a predetermined period in which a synchronous effect can be executed.

Specifically, in order to synchronously display the performance mode scheduled to be executed on the specific pachinko machine 10 (the performance mode retained and stored) on the other pachinko machines 10, the specific pachinko machine 10 Effect information including information indicating the reserved and stored effect mode is output to the third symbol display device 81 as a password that can be input to the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加By inputting the password into the other pachinko machine 10, the player sets a specific performance mode in the other pachinko machine 10 based on the performance information included in the inputted password. By allowing the player to execute the set performance mode at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to synchronize with the performance mode executed by the specific pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

When such a configuration is used, it is preferable to use the RTC 292 to include information indicating the time at which the reserved and stored presentation mode is actually executed in the above-described presentation information. In this way, only by inputting the password to the other pachinko machines 10, it becomes possible to enjoy the synchronized presentation mode between the specific pachinko machine 10 and the other pachinko machines 10 at that time.

Also, the effect information displayed on the third pattern display device 81 may be a two-dimensional information code, which is information that can be acquired by an external device (portable terminal), instead of a password. With this configuration, performance information is acquired by a mobile terminal, and performance information is transmitted to distant players by communication, thereby making it possible to execute a synchronized performance mode between distant pachinko machines.

It should be noted that what is synchronized in this manner is not limited to the reserved and stored presentation mode, and may be the presentation mode during the big win. In addition, in the performance mode of the pachinko machine 10 (main pachinko machine) on the side of the synchronization source and the pachinko machine 10 (secondary pachinko machine) on the side to be synchronized, the slave pachinko machine is not playing a game. may be enabled, and the display area of the third symbol display device 81 may be divided and displayed even during the special symbol game.

By using such a configuration, the player can set a predetermined period during which the synchronous effect can be executed, so that, for example, the player can arbitrarily experience the synchronous effect, and it is possible to alleviate the boredom of the game. becomes.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller in the fourth embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 130. FIG. In the fourth embodiment, the order of digesting the reserved ball of special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of special symbol 2 is different from the above-described second embodiment. In other words, in the above-described second embodiment, control was performed to preferentially digest the reserved ball of special symbol 2 with respect to the reserved ball of special symbol 1, but in this embodiment, the reserved ball of special symbol 1 and the special Control is performed to digest the reserved balls of the symbol 2 in the winning order. Since other points are the same, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, special symbol variation processing 2 (S120) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 2 (S120). This special symbol variation process 2 (S120) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display are performed. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed by the device 81 and the like.

In this special symbol variation process 2, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit at the moment (S4001). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S4001: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S4001: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S4002), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If it is not fluctuating (S4002: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of holding the fluctuation display in the special symbol) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of fluctuation display in the special symbol) The number of times of suspension N2) is acquired (S4003). Next, it is determined which of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 1) holding ball or the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 2) holding ball to execute the variation, and variation execution A change execution determination process for setting the flag 203i is executed (S4004). Note that the variation execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

The variation execution flag 203i set by the variation execution determination process (S4004) determines whether it is variation execution in special figure 1 (S4005), and if it is not variation execution in special figure 1 (S4005: No), variation It is determined whether the execution flag 203i is the variation execution of the special figure 2 (S4010), and if it is not the variation execution of the special figure 2 (S4010: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation execution flag 203i is the special figure 1 and fluctuation execution (S4005: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S4006), and the special symbol changed by the calculation 1 A pending ball number command indicating the value of the pending ball number counter 203d is set (S4007). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 67), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S4007, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S4008). In the process of S4008, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, special symbol 1 variation start processing for starting variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S4009). The special symbol 1 fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4005, if the variation execution flag 203i is not the variation execution of the special figure 1 (S4005: No), it is determined whether the variation execution flag 203i is the variation execution of the special figure 2 (S4010), the variation execution flag If 203i is the variation execution of special figure 2 (S4010: Yes), for the reserved ball of special figure 2, the same processing as the processing for the reserved ball of special figure 1 described above is performed.

Specifically, 1 is subtracted from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S4011), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by calculation is set. (S4012). The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223 is updated by the reserved ball number command set here. After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S4012, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S4013), and the special symbol for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37. 2 A fluctuation start process is executed (S4014). The special symbol 2 fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4002, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S4002: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S4015). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S4015: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S4016), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S4015, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S4015: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S4017). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by special symbol 1 variation start processing (S4009) described later with reference to FIG. 128 or special symbol 2 variation start processing (S4014) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol 1 variation start process or special symbol 2 variation start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Then, the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set. More specifically, in the case of the jackpot of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined according to the value of the first winning type counter C2, and the jackpot of the second special symbol is determined. , it is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B will be given according to the value of the first win type counter C2.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lit. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S4017 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the display of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is a special symbol. It is determined whether or not the symbol is a jackpot (S4018). Then, if the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S4018: Yes), the start of the jackpot is set (S4019), and the process proceeds to S4022.

On the other hand, in the process of S4018, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (S4018: No), it is determined whether the value of the counter 203g during time saving is greater than 0 (S4020), and the value of the counter 203g during time saving When it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S4020: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time saving counter 203g (S4021), and the process proceeds to S4022. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 (S4020: No), the process of S4021 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4022.

In the process of S4022 executed after the process of S4019, S4020 or S4021, the lighting of the LED which is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S4017 and the third symbol display device 81 A stop command is set to synchronize the fluctuation stop of (S4022).

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the variation execution determination process (S4004) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing the change execution determination process (S4004). This variation execution determination process (S4004) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 126) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol The effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the display device 81 is set to the value of the various counters stored in either the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. It is a process for determining whether to execute based on.

In the variation execution determination process, first, the variation execution flag 203i is initialized by setting 0 (S4101), and the data in the variation order storage area 203j is acquired (S4102). After that, the data in the change order storage area 203j is shifted (S4103). In the process of S4103, the data stored in the first to eighth areas of the variation order storage area 203j are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→holding 3rd area, 5th area→4th area, 6th area→ The data in each area is shifted in the order of 5th area, 7th area→reserved 6th area, 8th area→reserved 7th area, and so on. After shifting the data, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (S4104).

In the process of S4104, if it is determined that the data in the execution area is the special figure 1 (S4104: Yes), the variation execution flag 203i is set to the variation execution in the special figure 1 (S4105), and this process ends , returns to the special symbol variation process 2.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is not the special figure 1 (S4104: No), it is determined whether the data in the execution area is the special figure 2 (S4106). In the process of S4106, if it is determined that the data in the execution area is the special figure 2 (S4106: Yes), the variation execution flag 203i is set to the variation execution in the special figure 2 (S4107), and this process ends , returns to the special symbol variation process 2.

In the process of S4106, if it is determined that the data in the execution area is not the special figure 2 (S4106: No), since there is no reserved ball to be changed, this process ends with the change execution flag 203i remaining in the initial state. , returns to special symbol variation processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing (S4009) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S4009). This special symbol 1 variation start process (S4009) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 126) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of 1, it is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first design display device 37 and the third design display device 81.

In the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process, first, the first special symbol 1st per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a Each value of the counter C3 is acquired (S4201), and it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (S4202). Specifically, when the probability changing counter 203g is greater than 0, it is determined that the probability is changing, and when the probability changing counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the probability is not changing. In the processing of S4202, when it is determined that the probability is changing (S4202: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the high probability jackpot determination value of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (S4203), and the processing of S4205 move to Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first winning random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the big winning judgment value at high probability of the first winning random number table 202a (FIG. 52(a)). The value (hit value) is compared one by one to determine (S4203). If the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is determined to be a big hit, and if it is in the range of "10 to 399", it is determined to be a failure (see FIG. 52(a)). .

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not in the probability variation (S4202: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value at the time of low probability of the special symbol big hit random number table 202a (S4204), and the process of S4205 move to Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first winning random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the jackpot determination value at high probability of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 52(a)). The value (hit value) is compared one by one to determine (S4204). If the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is "7", it is determined to be a big hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 6" or "8 to 399", it is determined to be a loss (Fig. 52 (a) )reference).

Next, a winning information command including the lottery result is set (S4205), and the process proceeds to S4206. In the process of S4206, it is determined whether or not the lottery result obtained in the process of S4203 or S4204 is a big win. If it is determined that the lottery result obtained in the process of S4203 or S4204 is a big hit (S4206: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of S4201, the selection table for special figure 1 202b1 Then, the display mode is set (S4207), and the process proceeds to S4208.

More specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is compared with the random number value stored in the jackpot type selection table 202b, and two types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B) are determined. Among them, it is determined which one is the jackpot type. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 59", it is determined to be a jackpot A (16R probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "60 to 99", the jackpot It is determined to be B (16R normal jackpot) (see FIG. 52(b)).

In the processing of S4207, the display mode (lighting state of LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) are set as the stop types so that the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types are stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, a big hit variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S4208). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S4208, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach or super reach is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 53(a) to (d)). Specifically, at the time of the big hit, if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 50", normal reach (30 seconds), and if it is in the range of "51 to 179", super reach (60 seconds) , "180 to 198", it becomes a variation pattern of special reach (90 seconds) (see FIG. 53(b)).

In the processing of S4206, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S4206: No), the display mode of the out is set (S4209). In the processing of S4209, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. , the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. For example, as the stop type, "front-rear out-of-reach", "front-rear out-of-reach", "completely out of", etc. are defined.

Next, the deviation pattern is determined (S4210). Determined based on the (normal) selection table 202d2 for loss at normal time (when the variable probability counter 203 is 0), and based on the (probability variation) selection table 202d3 at the time of probability variation (when the probability variable counter 203g is greater than 0) It is determined. Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the processing of S4208 and S4210, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is checked, and based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, pattern variations such as normal reach and super reach Determine the variation time of The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 53(a) to (d)). Specifically, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 98", it will be short (7 seconds) if it is in the range of "99 to 198". It becomes a long outlier (10 seconds), and if it is a reach, if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", it is normal reach (30 seconds), and if it is in the range of "150 to 197", it is super reach (60 second), and if it is "198", it is a special reach (90 seconds).

After the processing of S4208 and S4210 is finished, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S4208 and S4210 is set (S4211). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processes of S4208 and S4210 is set (S4212). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 67), these commands are sent to the sound lamp control device 113. sent. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S4212 ends, it returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S4014) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S4014). This special symbol 2 variation start process (S4014) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 59) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, it is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first design display device 37 and the third design display device 81.

In this special symbol 2 variation start process, as in the special symbol 1 variation start process (S4009), by the process of S4301, the first hit random number counter C1 of the second special symbol and the determination value of the special symbol big hit random number table 202a Get the lottery results based on Except for the processing of S4307 and S4309, the same processing as the processing of S4009 is performed on the data of the execution area in the reserved ball storage area of the second special symbol, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The process of S4307 is executed when the lottery result obtained in the process of S4303 or S4304 is a big win (S4306: Yes). In the process of S4307, the big hit variation pattern is determined based on the special figure 2 selection table 202e2 (FIG. 54(c)) (S4307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S4307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. It should be noted that the relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of pattern variation is defined in the time saving variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIGS. 54 (a) to (c)), specifically, the variation type counter Regardless of the value of CS1 (in the entire range of values), the variation pattern is B (0.5 seconds) per time reduction (see FIG. 54(c)).

Further, the process of S4309 is executed when the lottery result obtained in the process of S4303 or S4304 is a loss (S4306: No). In the process of S4309, the deviation pattern is determined based on the special figure 2 time saving variation pattern table 202e2 (Fig. 54(c)) (S4309). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S4309, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. It should be noted that the relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of pattern variation is defined in the time saving variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIGS. 54 (a) to (c)), specifically, the variation type counter Regardless of the value of CS1 (in the whole range of values), it becomes a fluctuation pattern of short time out B (0.5 seconds) (see FIG. 54 (c)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 130, the start winning process 2 (S121) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process 2 (S121). This starting winning process 2 (S121) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) at the first starting port 63a, and if there is a starting winning, This is a process for holding the values indicated by various random number counters.

When the start winning process 2 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first start opening 63a (start winning) (S4401). Here, the ball entering the first starting port 63a is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first starting port 63a (S4401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S4402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S4403).

Then, if there is no winning to the first starting port 63a (S4401: No), or even if there is a winning to the first starting port 63a, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S4403: No), the process proceeds to S4408. On the other hand, there is a prize to the first starting port 63a (S4401: Yes), and if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S4403: Yes), special symbol 1 reserved ball 1 is added to the value (N1) of the number counter 203d (S4404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S4405).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 67), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S4405, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are changed to special symbols. Stored in the 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (S4406), stores the special figure 1 in the first area of the fluctuation order storage area 203j (S4407), and proceeds to the process of S4408. In the process of S4407, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is referred to, and if the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is the first area, if the value is 3, the third area is the first area, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is the first area. By determining the value set in the variation order storage area 203j in the above-described variation execution determination process (S4004), the starting port varies the first special symbol as in the present embodiment, and the second special symbol. Even if there are two kinds of variations, one that varies the symbols, the variations can be started in the order of winning the starting gate.

In the processing of S4408, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second starting port 63b (start winning) (S4408). When it is determined that the ball has won the second start hole 63b (S4408: Yes), the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is processed in the same way as when the ball wins the first start hole 63a.

More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S4409), and if the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) ( S4410: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (S4411), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S4412). Then, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (S4413), and to the first area of the variation order storage area 203j. To set the special figure 2 (S4414), it moves to the processing of S4415. The determination of the first area in S4414 is performed in the same manner as in S4407.

If there is no winning to the second starting port 63b (S4408: No), or even if there is a winning to the second starting port 63b, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S4410: No), pre-reading processing is executed (S4415), and this processing ends.

<Control Processing Executed by Sound Ramp Control Device in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 146. FIG. In the fourth embodiment, the contents of the 8-piece holding effect, the composite display effect, and the time effect (synchronization effect) are different from those of the second embodiment described above. Other parts are the same, and the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 131, startup processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 131 is a flow chart showing this start-up process 2. FIG. This start-up process 2 is a process performed when the power of the sound lamp control device 113 is turned on, as in the second embodiment described above. In the startup process 2, the processes from S1201 to S1211 are executed as in the second embodiment. After that, the time setting process 2 (S1251 in FIG. 132) is executed, and the main process 2 is performed.

Here, the time setting process 2 (S1251) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing time setting processing 2 (S1251). This time setting process 2 (S1251) is a process executed in the start-up process 2. Based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292, the time (time) at power-on (power-on) is set, and the power-on time is set. This is a process for setting on the activation flag 223α for executing a process that is performed only for a predetermined period of time from time.

In the time setting process 2, time information is obtained from the RTC 292, which is a clock means, as in the second embodiment described above (S1221). Thereafter, based on the acquired time information, the activation time is set in the set time storage area 223j (S1261), and the activation flag 223α is set to ON (S1262).

By executing this process and setting the activation flag 223α to ON, it is possible to perform a process (identification number input process (see FIG. 135)) that can be operated only for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on.

Next, main processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing main processing 2. FIG. This main process 2 is executed after the start-up process 2 of the sound lamp control device 113 is completed. This main process 2 executes the processes from S1301 to S1306 as in the second embodiment described above. Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 is executed (S1351). Details of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1351) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S1351) is executed, processing from S1308 to S1312 is executed in the same manner as in the second embodiment described above. After that, the variable display setting process 2 (S1352) is executed. Details of this variable display setting process 2 (S1352) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the variable display setting process 2 (S1352) is executed, the processes are executed in order of the 8 effect setting process (S1353) and the synchronous effect management process 2 (S1354). After that, the processes from S1317 to S1321 are executed in the same manner as in the above-described second embodiment. Details of the 8-piece effect setting process (S1353) will be described later with reference to FIG. 136, and details of the synchronous effect management process 2 (S1354) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Now, with reference to FIG. 134, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2. FIG. This frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (S1351) is executed in the main processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S1351) of the second embodiment described above. In addition to the same contents as S1307 in FIG. 80), this is a process for inputting an identification number used for setting a period (time effect period) for performing a synchronous effect, which will be described later.

In frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2, identification number input processing (S1851) is first executed.

Here, referring to FIG. 135, this identification number input processing will be described. FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing the identification number input process (S1851).

In the identification number input process (S1851), first, it is determined whether or not the pattern is changing (S4501). If it is determined that the symbols are changing (S4501: Yes), this process is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pattern is not fluctuating (S4501: No), it is determined whether or not the activation flag 223α is set to ON (S4502). If the startup flag 223α is not set to ON (S4501: Yes), this processing is completed.

On the other hand, if the startup flag 223α is set to ON (S4501: No), it is determined whether or not 20 minutes have passed since startup (S4503). This determination is made by comparing the startup time set in the set time storage area (S1261 in FIG. 132) and the current time information obtained from the RTC 292. FIG. Then, if 20 minutes have passed since the activation, the activation flag is set to OFF (S4504), and this processing is completed. On the other hand, if 20 minutes have not passed since the activation, it is determined whether or not there is an identification number input operation (S4504).

Here, the identification number input operation will be explained. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to be able to execute a predetermined input operation using the frame button 22, and within a predetermined time (within 20 minutes in this embodiment) after the power is turned on, and the third If the frame button 22 is pressed once when no symbol variation is performed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81 (for example, while the demo screen is being displayed), an identification number input screen is displayed. After inputting the desired identification number on the identification number input screen, the input of the identification number can be executed by selecting "input completion" displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁As a method of inputting the identification number, a plurality of input numbers are displayed on the display screen and one of them may be selected. A method of inputting an identification number by selection may be used, or a predetermined identification number may be automatically selected from a plurality of identification numbers by displaying "random" on the display screen and selecting "random". can be a method.

In this embodiment, the predetermined time after the power is turned on is 20 minutes, which is the time during which the identification number can be input to all the pachinko machines 10 even if the power of the pachinko machines 10 is started at the same time. , and the time may be set as appropriate.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the period during which the identification number can be input is set to a predetermined time period after the power source is turned on. Other methods may be adopted as long as the purpose can be achieved. For example, pressing a switch provided at a position where the player cannot operate , an identification number input operation screen is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, or it is determined that the time information clocked by the RTC 292 is outside business hours, and only outside business hours An identification number input operation screen may be displayed. Even if such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to prevent the identification number from being input by the player.

Returning to FIG. 135, the description continues. If the identification number input operation has not been performed in S4505, this processing ends. In other words, if the identification number input operation is not performed before the predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, there is a possibility that the identification number input operation will be performed before the predetermined time elapses. This determination is repeated until .

On the other hand, if an identification number input operation has been performed (S4505: Yes), the input identification number is stored in the identification number storage area 223x (S4506), the activation flag 223α is set to OFF (S4504), and this processing is performed. exit.

In the identification number input process described above, the identification number, which is a parameter necessary for setting the period (time effect period) during which the synchronous effect described later is performed, is entered within a limited period of time within a predetermined time after the power is turned on. Only can be set, and based on the identification number set by this process, the period during which the synchronous effect is performed is changed. Therefore, the parlor can easily input the identification number, and it is possible to prevent the player from easily inputting the identification number. When trying to perform a synchronous performance related to each other on neighboring machines, a desired synchronous performance can be surely performed without changing the identification number set by the store by the player.

Here, return to FIG. 134 and continue the description. After the identification number input processing (S1851) is executed, the processing from S1811 to S1813 is performed in the same manner as the processing performed in the above-described second embodiment, and in S1813, the pending effect flag is set to ON. If not, an 8-hold effect process (see S1852 in FIG. 136), which will be described later, is executed, and then a button effect process (see S1853 in FIG. 137), which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, when the pending effect flag is set to ON, the processing of S1814 and S1815 is executed in the same manner as the processing performed in the above-described second embodiment.

Next, referring to FIG. 136, the 8-piece pending effect process (S1852) will be described. FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing the 8-piece pending effect process (S1852). This 8-piece pending effect process (S1852) includes an 8-piece effect that is performed when 8 reserved balls are accumulated, a special continuation effect that is continuously performed after that, and an 8-piece effect and a special continuation effect that are performed. A process for executing an effect when the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) while the additional effect is executed while the This is a process of performing an effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 that is operated when displayed.

In the 8 pending effect process (S1852), first, it is determined whether or not the 8 effect flag 223i is set to ON (S4601). If the eight effect flags 223i are not set to ON (S4601: No), then it is determined whether or not the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to ON (S4602). If the special continuous effect flag 223t is not set to ON (S4602: No), then it is determined whether or not the additional effect flag is set to ON (S4603). If the additional effect flag is not set to ON (S4603: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the 8 effect flag 223i is set to ON (S4601: Yes), the corresponding pending 8 effect is executed (S4604), and the process proceeds to S4603. It should be noted that the timing when the notification pending symbol is not displayed during the eight effects, that is, the notification pending symbol (the "push" symbol shown in FIG. If the frame button 22 is operated at the timing after the pattern changes to the pattern ("big win !!!?" A so-called fanning effect is performed, such as expressing a degree or changing the color of a reserved symbol (for example, "big hit!?") that has already been changed by the 8 effects.

Also, in S4602, when the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to ON (S4602: Yes), the corresponding reserved special continuation effect is executed (S4605), and the process proceeds to S4603. It should be noted that during the special continuation effect (while the special continuation effect flag 223t is ON), if there is an operation input of the frame button 22 after the reserved pattern has already been changed by the operation of the frame button 22, the above-mentioned Similar to the 8 effects described above, the fan effect is performed based on the operation of the frame button.

At S4603, when the additional effect flag 223u is set to ON (S4603: Yes), the corresponding pending additional effect flag 223u is set to OFF (S4606), and the corresponding pending additional effect is executed ( S4607).

As described above, in the 8 hold effect (S1852) executed during the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (S1351 in FIG. 134), various flags (8 effect Since the effects to be executed are varied based on the setting conditions of the flag 223i, the special continuation effect flag 223t, and the additional effect flag 223u), the player can experience various effects just by performing the same operation. becomes.

Next, the button effect processing (S1853) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing button effect processing (S1853). This button effect processing (S1853) is a process of setting a display effect when the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) during the synthetic display effect, and is based on the button repeatedly hitting mission displayed in FIG. 114(b). This process corresponds to pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 and pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 based on the "push" symbol displayed in FIG. 116(b).

In the button effect processing (S1853), first, it is determined whether or not the button effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4701). If the button effect flag 223r is not set to ON (S4701: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the button effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the button effect stop pattern ("push" pattern in FIG. 116(b)) has been stopped. It discriminates (S4702).

Here, the button effect flag 223r will be described. The button effect flag 223r is a flag that is set to ON by button effect selection processing 2 (see FIG. 142), which will be described later, and is turned ON when the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the synthetic display effect. is set.

At S4702, if the button effect stop symbol is after the stop (S4702: Yes), a display command indicating a synthetic effect mode corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S4703). In other words, it is determined that the depression (operation) of the frame button 22 this time is to operate the "Push" symbol displayed in FIG. Set the display command.

On the other hand, when the button effect stop symbol is not after the stop (S4702: No), it is determined whether the button operation effective period has passed (S4705). The button operation effective period is a period indicated by (b) in FIG. 113 and is measured by a counter (not shown). Here, if the button operation valid period has passed (S4705: Yes), it is determined whether or not the button pressing condition is satisfied (S4706). Note that, in this embodiment, the button pressing condition is to press the button 50 times (see FIG. 114(b)).

If the button pressing condition is not satisfied (S4706: No), the button effect flag is set to OFF (S4704), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the button-pressing condition is satisfied (S4706: Yes), this processing ends. In other words, when the button operation effective period elapses, if the button pressing condition is not satisfied, the synthetic display effect is not continued, and after the period of (b) in FIG. 113 ends, the normal effect period ( In order to shift to c), the button effect flag is set to OFF so that the button effect processing is not performed.

Here, return to the process of S4705 and continue the description. If the button operation valid period has not passed in S4705 (S4705: No), the number of button presses is accumulated (S4707), and this processing ends.

The button effect processing has been described above, but in this process, when the composite display effect is selected by the button effect selection process 2 (see FIG. 142), the It is determined whether or not the button has been pressed a sufficient number of times to satisfy the button pressing condition (during the button repeated mission). When it is done, the process of setting the display command for changing the stop pattern for button production to the number pattern is performed. Also, if the button pressing condition is not achieved, the button effect flag is set to OFF, so the normal effect pattern (see FIG. 115(a)) is displayed without stopping the button effect stop symbol. will be

Next, referring to FIG. 138, advance notice selection process 2 (S1454) executed in command determination process (S1312) in main process 2 (see FIG. 133) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 ) will be explained. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the advance notice selection process 2 (S1454). This advance notice selection process 2 (S1454) is a process of setting a display advance notice command based on the time information obtained from the RTC 292 and an effect mode set by a synchronous effect management process 2 (see FIG. 144) which will be described later.

In the advance notice selection process 2 (S1454), first, the processes from S1501 to S1507 are executed in the same manner as the advance notice selection process executed in the second embodiment described above. Here, in the process of S1505, when it is determined that the effect mode C is not set, it is determined whether the effect mode D is set (S1541). If the effect mode D is not set (S1541: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the effect mode D is set (S1541: Yes), based on the success/failure determination result and the effect counter, a game state notice effect is selected (S1542), and a display notice command indicating the selected notice effect is displayed. is set (S1543). Then, this processing ends.

Here, the advance notice command for display that is set when the effect mode D is set will be described. Effect mode D is an effect that is set only when the period in which the synchronous effect (time effect) is performed is set longer than normal (5 minutes) (8 minutes) by the effect time setting process (see FIG. 145). mode. During the performance mode D, an advance notice performance that can be advantageous to the player is performed so that the player is satisfied with entering the performance mode D. - 特許庁For example, a notice effect that notifies that the current game situation is changing, a notice effect that does not appear in another production mode, and a player's accumulated It is conceivable that the announcement effect includes information for obtaining a large amount of points (points for raising the character's level) or information for obtaining a privilege image (information display that can be read by a mobile phone).

Next, referring to FIG. 139, winning command reception processing 2 ( S1461) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the winning command reception process 2 (S1461). This winning command reception process 2 (S1461) is a process performed when a winning command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received.

In the winning command receiving process 2 (S1461), first, similarly to the winning command receiving process (S1411 in FIG. 73) executed in the above-described second embodiment, the processes of S1511 and S1512 are executed. It is determined whether the flag is set to ON (S1551). If the additional effect flag is not set to ON (S1551: No), the processes from S1514 to S1522 are executed as in the above-described second embodiment.

On the other hand, if the additional effect flag is set to ON (S1551: Yes), the additional effect is set (S1552), and this process is terminated.

Next, the variable display setting process 2 (S1352) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 (S1352).

In the variable display setting process 2 (S1352), the processes of S1601 and S1602 are first executed in the same manner as the variable display setting process (S1313 in FIG. 74) executed in the second embodiment described above. Then, variation pattern selection processing 2 is executed (S1651).

Here, with reference to FIG. 141, the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1651) will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing variation pattern selection processing 2 (S1651). This variation pattern selection process 2 (S1651) is similar to the variation pattern selection process (S1603 in FIG. 75) executed in the second embodiment described above, based on the current effect mode and the acquired effect counter value. This is a process of selecting and setting a variation pattern by using the

In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1651), the processes of S1611 and S1612 are performed in the same manner as the variation pattern selection process (S1603) performed in the second embodiment described above. At S1612, if the effect mode A is set (S1612: Yes), button effect selection processing 2 is executed (S1661). Details of button effect selection processing 2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when production mode A is not set in S1612, S1614 and S1615 are executed in the same manner as the variation pattern selection process (S1603) executed in the second embodiment described above. Then, in S1614, if the production mode B is not set (S1614: No), then it is determined whether the production mode C is set (S1662).

When it is determined that the effect mode C is set (S1662: Yes), a variation pattern is selected from the corresponding time effect extension period variation pattern selection table and set. On the other hand, if the production mode C is not set (S1662: No), since the current production mode is D, a variation pattern is selected from the special extension production period variation pattern selection table corresponding to the production mode D. set.

Here, with reference to FIG. 142, button effect selection processing 2 (S1661) will be described. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing button effect selection processing 2 (S1661).

In the button effect selection process 2, first, the processes of S1621 and S1622 are executed as in the second embodiment described above. Then, in the process of S1622, when the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern selection table is button effect, the number of button presses is set (S1671). The number of button presses is the number of presses required to complete the button-pressing mission (see FIG. 114(b)) performed during the synthetic display effect, and is set to 50 times in this embodiment. . In this embodiment, the number of times the button is pressed is set to 50 times as a condition for achieving the mission during the composite display effect, but the mission imposed during the composite display effect (condition setting for reaching the Push effect) increases or decreases the number of times the button is pressed. Alternatively, the condition may be that the frame button is operated at a predetermined timing.

After executing the processes of S1623 and S1624 in the same manner as in the above-described second embodiment, this process ends.

As described above, the button effect selection process 2 includes the button effect selection process (S1613 in FIG. The number of button presses is set as a condition setting for reaching the target. By setting this condition, even if the button performance is selected as the variation pattern, the player operates the frame button 22 and shifts to the push performance unless the set condition (pressing the button 50 times) is achieved. Therefore, the player can enjoy the pachinko machine 10 by actively operating the frame button 22 in order to see the special performance and participating in the game machine.

Also, when the player wants to see the normal presentation, the button need not be pressed. It is possible to select the subsequent performance depending on the player's mood.

Although the number of button presses is set to 50 in this embodiment, the number of button presses may be changed each time a button effect is selected as a variation pattern. Also, even if the number of button presses set as the condition setting is achieved, the shift to the push performance is not always performed. In this case, the push effect may be performed only at a predetermined probability (30%). By doing so, it is possible to raise expectations for a big win only by shifting to the push effect, and the player can more positively participate in the game using the operation of the frame button 22.例文帳に追加

In addition, by making it possible to change the number of times the button is pressed, which is set as the condition setting, it is possible for the player not to shift to the push effect because the lottery result was a loss, or to push the effect because the conditions were not met. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not the migration has occurred. In addition, by setting the number of button presses set as the condition setting to once, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect.

When setting the number of button depressions, for example, it is preferable to set the number of times that is set only when the lottery result of the game is a big win. With this configuration, the player can recognize that the game result is a big win at the display timing of the performance different from usual, and pay attention to the performance of the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116(a), the blank pattern is changed to a "push" pattern, and the "push" pattern is synthesized and displayed. It may be constructed such that a text (message) corresponding to the changed characters is synthesized and displayed. With such a configuration, at the timing when the blank pattern is changed to various characters, the player can combine the displayed characters and predict the sentences to be synthesized and displayed, and can be used in the later game. It is possible to create a sense of expectation. Also, when such a configuration is used, it is preferable to synthesize and display sentences using some of the displayed characters, rather than synthesize and display using all of the various displayed characters. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to anticipate sentences of various patterns. In addition, in order to make it possible to identify the characters that are always used, if the mode (color, size, etc.) of the characters that are always used is made different from the other characters, it will be possible for the player to see the combined display. It is possible to give a hint of the sentence to be created, and it is possible to make it more enjoyable to predict the sentence to be created in the composite display.

Next, referring to FIG. 143, the setting process (S1353) during 8 effects performed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 133) performed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the 8-piece effect setting process (S1353). This 8-piece effect setting process (S1353) is a process of performing various settings related to the reserved symbol effects (see FIGS. 110 to 112) performed based on the number of reserved symbols (the number of reserved memories).

In the setting process during 8 effects (S1353), first, it is determined whether or not the 8 effects flag 223i is set to ON (S4801). When the eight effect flags 223i are set to ON (S4801: Yes), the additional effect flag 223u is set to ON (S4802). As described above, the additional effect flag 223u is a flag used when determining whether or not to execute the additional winning effect. Then, it is determined whether the value of the 8 effect counter 223v is greater than 0 (S4803). The 8 effect counter 223v is a counter that counts the number of symbol variations after the execution of the 8 effect using the reserved symbols as described above, and when the value is greater than 0, the 8 effect continues. It represents the state of being

If the value of the 8-point effect counter 223v is greater than 0, that is, if the 8-point effect continues (S4803: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when the value of the 8 effect counter 223v is not greater than 0, that is, when the value of the 8 effect counter 223v is 0 (S4803: No), the 8 effect flag 223i is set to OFF (S4804). , and then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved items is greater than 4 (S4805).

If the pending number is greater than 4 (S4805: Yes), the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to ON (S4806), then the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is set to 5 (S4807), and this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if the pending number is not more than 4 (4 or less) (S4805: No), the additional effect flag 223u is set to OFF (s4811), and this process is terminated.

Returning to S4801, the description is continued. When the eight effect flags 223i are not on (S4801: No), it is determined whether the special continuous effect flag 223t is set on (S4808). If the special continuation effect flag 223t is not set to ON (S4808: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the special continuous effect flag 223t is set to ON (S4808: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special continuous effect counter 223w is greater than 0 (S4809).

If the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is greater than 0 (S4809: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is not greater than 0 (when the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is 0) (S4809: No), the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to OFF (S4810), The additional effect flag 223u is set to OFF (S4811). Then, the process ends.

As described above, in this 8 effect during setting process, when determining whether to perform 8 effects, special continuous effects, and additional winning effects, which are performed based on the number of reserved symbols (number of reserved memories) Various flags to be referenced are set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the synchronous effect management process 2 (S1354) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the synchronous effect management process 2 (S1354). This synchronous production management process 2 (S1354) is a process of setting the production mode (A to D) based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292, and is the synchronous production management process executed in the above-described second embodiment. One effect mode to be set is added to (S1314).

In the synchronous production management process 2 (S1354), production time setting process (S1751) is first executed. This production time setting process (S1751) is executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 during the start-up process 2 (FIG. 131) executed after the power is turned on (S1251 in FIG. 132). , and the identification number stored in the identification number storage area in the identification number input process (S1851 in FIG. 135) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. , is the process of setting the performance time.

Here, with reference to FIG. 145, the rendering time setting process (S1751) will be described. FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing the rendering time setting process (S1751).

In the production time setting process, first. It is determined whether the performance time has already been set (S4901). If the performance time has already been set (S4901: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the presentation time is not set (S4901: No), then it is determined whether the activation flag is set to ON (S4902). If the activation flag is set to ON (S4902: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the startup flag is not set to ON (S4902: No), the process proceeds to S4903, which will be described later.

That is, in S4902, it is possible to determine by looking at the state of the activation flag 223α that the period in which the identification number can be assigned to the pachinko machine 10 has passed, and to assign the identification number to the pachinko machine 10. After a certain period of time has passed, the production time is set. In the identification number input process (S1851 in FIG. 135), if the activation flag is turned off without inputting the identification number, the identification number stored as initial setting in the identification number storage area 223x is used.

After it is determined that the activation flag is not set to ON in S4902, the identification number stored in the identification number storage area 223x is obtained (S4903), and the presentation time corresponding to the identification number is stored in the presentation time selection table. (222b). Then, the selected rendering time is stored in the rendering time storage area 223y (S4905), and the present processing ends.

The production time selection table (222b) used in S4904 is the day of the week created based on the identification number stored in the identification number storage area 223x and the time information obtained from the RTC 292, as described above with reference to FIG. It is configured so that the performance time can be selected by referring to the data. By using such a performance time selection table 222b, the time for which the performance time is provided is changed only by changing the day of the week. It is possible to reduce the change work.

In addition, based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292, two event days are set in addition to the normal day of the week data, but this is not limiting, and parameters that can be created based on the time information acquired by the RTC 292 can be set. Other parameters may be referenced. Other parameters include a parameter for distinguishing between even-numbered days and odd-numbered days, a parameter for identifying holidays, and a parameter for identifying dates with the same month and day (alternate).

Also, in this embodiment, two parameters, ie, the day of the week data and the identification number, are referred to set the presentation time, but three or more parameters may be referred to set the presentation time. In this way, more complex combinations can easily be provided.

In this embodiment, the identification number can be input as a parameter that can be set by the operator, so that a plurality of predetermined machines (for example, adjacent pachinko machines 10) can be synchronized at the same timing (time However, other parameters that can be set by the operator may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, parameters (day of the week data) based on time information acquired from the RTC 292 are used as parameters set by the pachinko machine 10, but other parameters may be provided. For example, the parameter may be set based on the previous day's game information (the number of jackpots and the number of balls released) of the pachinko machine 10 . do it. By configuring like this,
In addition to the frame button 22 as a means for the operator to set and input parameters, input means such as a touch panel type input means and a selection button (cross button) for selecting information displayed on the display screen are provided. machine 10 may be provided. By providing such an input means, complicated setting inputs can be easily operated. Further, such an input means may be used for the display effect of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Returning to FIG. 144, the description continues. After executing the production time setting process (S1751 in FIG. 145), the process from S1701 to S1705 is performed in the same manner as the synchronous production management process (S1314 in FIG. 77) executed in the second embodiment described above, and this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, when the production mode is not set to the production mode A at S1702, it is determined whether the production mode is set to the production mode B or the production mode D (S1752).

If it is determined that the effect mode is not the effect mode B or the effect mode D (S1752: No), the processes of S1709 and S1710 are performed in the same manner as in the above-described second embodiment, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be the production mode B or the production mode D (S1752: Yes), whether the time information (data) acquired from the RTC 292 is time information 4 minutes and 57 seconds after the start of the time production is determined (S1753).

As the determination of S1753, the elapsed time may be calculated by comparing the time when the time production was started and the current time, or the time table of the production time (see FIG. 125(b)) has 4 minutes 57 It is also possible to set a timing in seconds and determine whether or not the timing (time) has passed. Furthermore, without acquiring the time information from the RTC 292, a timer may be provided to start timing from the timing when the time presentation is started, and 4 minutes and 57 seconds may be measured using the timer.

If the time information obtained from the RTC 292 indicates that 4 minutes and 57 seconds have not elapsed since the start of the time presentation (S1753: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the time information obtained from the RTC 292 indicates that 4 minutes and 57 seconds have passed since the start of the time presentation (S1753: Yes), it is determined whether the current time presentation period is 5 minutes (S1754).

If the time effect period is 5 minutes (S1754: Yes), that is, if the effect mode is the effect mode C, the process of S1708 is performed in the same manner as in the above-described second embodiment, and this process ends. On the other hand, if the time effect period is not 5 minutes (S1754: No), that is, if the effect mode is the effect mode D, an extension effect setting process 2 is executed (S1755), and this process ends.

Next, the extension effect setting process 2 (S1755) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing the extension effect setting process 2 (S1755). This extension effect setting process 2 is a process executed when the time effect period is not 5 minutes, that is, when the time effect period is 8 minutes. This is a process for making necessary settings.

In the extension effect setting process 2 (S1755), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S5001). When it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S5001: Yes), the normal period flag 223m is set to ON (S5002), the effect mode is set to effect mode A (S5003), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S5001: No), it is determined whether the time effect period (synchronous effect period) has ended (S5004). If the time effect period has not ended (S5004: No), then it is determined whether five minutes have passed since the time effect started (S5005). When 5 minutes have not passed since the start of the time production (S5005: No), a re-variation production is set (S5008), and this processing is terminated.

That is, in S5008, in S1753 of FIG. 144, it is determined that 4 minutes and 57 seconds have passed since the time production started, and in S5005 of FIG. 146, 5 minutes have passed since the time production started. This is a process that is performed when it is determined that there is not, and is a process of setting a re-variation effect to be performed between 4 minutes and 57 seconds and 5 minutes after the start of the time effect.

It should be noted that the re-variation effect is the same effect as in the second embodiment, so the description is omitted.

On the other hand, if it is determined that 5 minutes have passed since the time production started at S5005 (S5005: Yes), the extension production flag is set to ON (S5006), and then the production mode is changed to production mode D (S5007), and the process ends.

Return to S5004 and continue the description. At S5004, when it is determined that the time effect period has ended (S5004: Yes), the normal period flag 223m is set to ON (S5009), and then the effect mode is set to effect mode A (S5010). Next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information in the winning information storage area 223a (S5011).

In the winning information storage area 223a, the pending and stored win/fail determination results and the win/fail determination results that are currently changing are stored, and up to nine determination results are stored.

If there is no jackpot information in the winning information storage area 223a (S5011: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is information about a big win in the winning information storage area 223a (S5011: Yes), the time until the change to become a big win ends is calculated, and that time is stored as an extended performance time in the extended performance time storage area 223q. Set (S5012).

After that, the re-variation production is set (S5013), the extension production flag 223p is set to ON (S5014), and the production mode is set to production mode C (S5015). Then, this processing ends.

The synchronous effect management process 2 described above performs the extended effect setting process 2 as a process related to the effect mode D newly added in this embodiment. It is different from the processing (S1314 in FIG. 77), and the rest of the processing is the same.

In this embodiment, even if the production mode D, that is, the time production period is 8 minutes, as in the other production modes, when the time production approaches 5 minutes (after 4 minutes and 57 seconds have elapsed), FIG. As shown in (a), an indication display mode is displayed in which the production pattern is slightly trembling for 3 seconds (until 5 minutes have passed). Therefore, the performance when the time performance period elapses for 5 minutes can be made the same as that of the other pachinko machine 10 in which the performance mode B is set, and the sense of unity of the performance can be enhanced. Further, after a plurality of pachinko machines 10 perform the re-variation performance at the same timing, only the pachinko machine 10 in which the performance mode C or the performance mode D is selected performs the extended performance, so the performance mode C or the performance A player playing a pachinko machine 10 in which mode D is selected can feel that his or her own pachinko machine 10 has been selected and can be immersed in a sense of superiority.

In the control processing of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment described above, the time information acquired from the RTC 292 is used in the control related to the synchronous performance, so that a plurality of pachinko machines 10 can perform a performance with a sense of unity. However, for example, in the case of enjoying a synchronous effect with only two adjacent units, by simultaneously performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 without using the RTC 292, the predetermined operation is executed. The time presentation may be started from . By configuring in this way, the player can enjoy the time presentation at his/her favorite timing and can suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect data (display mode) dedicated to the time effect is used, but the effect data for the time effect is set from the effect data (normal state effect data) that is also used outside the time effect period. may be used as By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of performance data. When such a configuration is used, it is preferable to provide means for restricting the presentation data set as the presentation data for the time presentation outside the time presentation period (normal state). Also, the above-described methods of synchronizing the presentation modes may be combined.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device 114 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, referring to FIGS. 147 and 148, among the controls executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the controls executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the second embodiment described above are different. Let me explain the points. In this embodiment, in the pending command process 2 (S2461 in FIG. 147), the process when a command related to the special continuous effect or additional effect is received, and in the effect command process 2 (S2463 in FIG. 148), 8 effects , is different in that a process is added when an effect command relating to a special continuous effect or an additional effect is received. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the part same as each control performed by MPU231 of the display control apparatus 114 of 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, and description is abbreviate|omitted.

First, the pending command process 2 (S2461) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing pending command processing 2 (S2461).

When the pending command process 2 (S2461) is executed, the processes from S2801 to S2807 are executed as in the second embodiment described above. Then, in S2805, when it is determined that the received command is not the 8 effect (S2805: No), it is determined whether the received command is a special continuation effect (S2851). When it is determined that the received command is a special continuation effect (S2851: Yes), the corresponding reserved design is changed to a special continuation effect design and set in the display data table (S2852).

On the other hand, when the received command is not the special continuation effect (S2851: No), it is determined whether the received command is an additional effect (S2853). If it is determined that the received command is not an additional effect (S2853: No), other pending display settings are executed (S2807), and this process ends.

On the other hand, when the received command is an additional effect (S2853: Yes), the corresponding reserved design is changed to an additional effect design and set in the display data table (S2854). Then, other pending display settings are executed (S2807), and this processing ends. It should be noted that the change to the additional effect symbol means to change to the "?" symbol shown in FIG. 111(b).

The pending command process 2 in the present embodiment is configured to process and set the received command related to the pending number and the received command related to the effect using the pending symbol at different timings. In other words, even if both the command related to the reserved number and the command related to the effect using the reserved design are stored in the command buffer area, after the command related to the reserved number is processed first, the command determination processing (S2302 in FIG. 86) After looping, process the command related to the effect using the reserved design. By configuring in this way, when a reserved design is displayed on the third design display device 81 by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the normal reserved design is displayed once, and then the displayed reserved design is a production design. It is possible to reliably perform a display that changes to Therefore, the player can visually recognize that the reserved symbols have increased and the increased reserved symbols have changed to the performance symbols.

The above configuration can produce further effects by being executed in the 8-point effect performed in the present embodiment. That is, the 8 effects performed in the present embodiment are effects that can be executed when the number of pending patterns is 8, and one effect mode (character string) is displayed using 8 pending patterns. (FIG. 111(a)). When performing such a reserved symbol effect, if the process of displaying the eighth reserved symbol and the process of displaying the eight effects are performed at the same time, seven reserved symbols are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol. There was a possibility that the display would suddenly switch to the 8 effect. If the pending display is changed in this manner, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize that the eighth pending symbol has occurred. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, even if both the commands related to the reserved number and the command related to the effect using the reserved design are stored in the command buffer area, after processing the command related to the reserved number first, By looping the command determination processing (S2302 in FIG. 86) and then processing the command related to the effect using the reserved design, the command processing related to the pending number and the command processing related to the effect using the reserved design Time lag can be provided, and the problems described above can be prevented.

As for the period for displaying the eighth pending symbol, it is sufficient that the player can recognize the increase display of the pending symbol (20 milliseconds or more), and if necessary, the eighth pending symbol is displayed. A process of providing a time delay (delaying the timing of displaying the 8-piece effect) from the time of display to the time of displaying the 8-piece effect may be provided.

Also, it is preferable to include display data for displaying 8 normal pending symbols at the beginning of the display data for the 8 effect symbols set in the display data table in S2806 of FIG. By doing so, it is possible to reliably display eight normal reserved symbols when processing and displaying commands relating to eight effects.

Next, the effect command process 2 (S2463) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing effect command processing 2 (S2463). This effect command process 2 is added to the effect command process (S2413 in FIG. 90) executed in the above-described second embodiment by adding processes corresponding to commands for eight effects, a special continuous effect, and an additional effect. Since the other parts are the same, the description is omitted.

First, when the effect command process 2 (S2463) is executed, it is similar to the effect command process (S2413) executed in the second embodiment described above. The processing from S2901 to S2904 is executed. Then, in S2903, when it is determined that it is not the pseudo-extended effect (S2903: No), it is determined whether the received command is one of the 8 effects, the special continuous effect, or the additional effect (S2951). . If none of the 8 effects, the special continuation effects, or the additional effects (S2951: No), the processes from S2907 to S2912 are executed in the same manner as in the above-described second embodiment, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in S2951, when it is determined that the received command is one of the 8 effects, the special continuation effect, or the additional effect (S2951: Yes), the 8 effects corresponding to the command, the special continuation effect , or set the display data table for additional effects in the display data table buffer.

In this embodiment, based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292, a technique for variously setting the effect display related to the variation of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 has been described. may be performed based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292. By doing so, the player concentrates on playing the game in order to feel a slight sense of discomfort, and the motivation for the game can be enhanced.

Besides the effect display related to the variation of the third symbol, various effect displays may be set based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 . For example, in an effect related to a jackpot game, the time information acquired from the RTC 292 may be used to control the start timing of the jackpot video and jackpot sound to be executed. Specifically, the privilege game that is executed when the result of the determination made based on the ball entering the winning opening (ball entrance) is the determination result of providing a predetermined privilege (jackpot) , the timing at which the privilege effect (jackpot video, jackpot sound (BGM), etc.) provided as a privilege game is started is set to a predetermined timing (for example, 00 seconds per minute) based on the time information acquired from the clock means (RTC 292). timing). With this configuration, even if the adjacent pachinko machines 10 win big with a slight time difference (for example, a time difference of about 30 seconds), the big win effects (video and audio) executed during the big win game are synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect with a sense of unity even during the jackpot game.

In addition, by synchronizing the timing of the performance that notifies the game state after the jackpot game that is performed during the jackpot game (the performance that informs whether or not the variable state will occur after the jackpot game ends), the performance with a greater sense of unity is achieved. can be provided.

In addition, when the effect during the jackpot game is thus synchronized based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292, even if the content of the effect (video and sound) during the jackpot game is made different between the adjacent pachinko machines 10. good. For example, by providing a female pattern and a male pattern as voices during the jackpot game, it is possible to combine presentations with different contents according to synchronous presentation during the jackpot game, and to provide a presentation with a greater sense of unity.

In the present embodiment, a technique based on the time information obtained from the RTC 292 is used in order to execute an effect with a sense of unity between adjacent pachinko machines 10, but other techniques may be used. For example, in the pachinko machine 10, a notification unit that identifiably reports information based on a game (information that a jackpot game is in progress, and information that the judgment result that the winning judgment result is a jackpot is retained and stored) display unit) and a detection unit (light detection sensor) for detecting the notification mode of the notification unit, and the information notified to the notification unit by the pachinko machine 10 is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 adjacent to the pachinko machine 10. Information based on the game of the adjacent pachinko machines 10 can be discriminated by detection by the detection unit, and based on the determination result, the adjacent pachinko machines 10 can perform a synchronized effect. good. By configuring in this way, for example, one of the adjacent pachinko machines 10 can synchronously execute an effect such as a big win.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 159. FIG. In the fifth embodiment, the arrangement of the distribution unit 1164 of the fourth embodiment described above and the third pattern display device 81 (main screen) and the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen) are related to the display control of the third embodiment. The other configurations are the same as those of the above-described embodiments. The same reference numerals are given to the same parts, and the description thereof is omitted.

It should be noted that the difference in the configuration of the distribution unit 1164 of the fifth embodiment from that of the fourth embodiment will be described in detail. is provided in the sorting unit 1164 .

Further, to explain the difference in the display control of the fifth embodiment from the third embodiment in detail, a pseudo variable display is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal based on the determination result of the success/failure determination result retained and stored. It is different in that display control is performed on the first liquid crystal display and that display contents displayed on the main liquid crystal display and the sub liquid crystal display can be switched.

FIG. 149 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 149, below the variable display device unit 80 provided on the front surface of the game board 13, a sorting unit 1164 into which balls can enter is arranged. A ball entering the distribution unit 1164 is distributed to a first winning port 1964a, a second left winning port 1964b, or a through gate 1067, which will be described later.

Now, with reference to FIG. 150, the configuration of distribution unit 1164 will be described. 150(a) and (b) are diagrams showing the internal structure of the sorting unit 1164. FIG. The structure of the two sorting members 1900 and 1950 provided inside the sorting unit 1164 is the same as that of the sorting member 900 used in the above-described fourth embodiment, so the explanation is omitted. For the convenience of describing this embodiment, different reference numerals are used.

First, the flow when a ball enters the sorting unit 1164 will be described with reference to FIG. 150(a). A ball entered into the sorting unit 1164 passes through the ball sensor 1164, is accommodated in the accommodation portion 1900c of the first sorting member 1900 provided in the upper part of the sorting unit 1164, and is moved to the sorting member by the weight of the game ball. It flows down while rotating 1900 clockwise, is guided by the guiding member 1900z2, and is accommodated in the accommodating portion 1950c of the second distribution member 1950. FIG.

The ball accommodated in the accommodation portion 1950c of the second sorting member 1950 flows down while rotating the second sorting member 1950 clockwise by its own weight, and enters the first winning hole 1964a. Next, the ball entering the sorting unit 1164 is accommodated in the accommodation portion 1900a of the first sorting member, flows down while rotating the first sorting member 1900 counterclockwise, is guided by the guide member 1900z1, and passes through the through gate 1067. pass. The ball that has passed through the through gate 1067 passes through a hole (not shown) provided on the surface of the game board 13 and flows down to the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 .

The next ball entering the sorting unit 1164 is accommodated in the accommodation portion 1900c of the first sorting member, flows down while rotating the first sorting member 1900 clockwise, is guided by the guiding member 1900z2, and is sorted into the second sorting unit. It is housed in the housing portion 1950 a of the member 1950 .

The ball accommodated in the accommodation portion 1950a of the second distribution member 1950 flows down while rotating the second distribution member 1950 counterclockwise due to its own weight, and enters the left second winning hole 1964b. Then, the ball that enters the sorting unit 1164 next passes through the through gate 1067 along the same route as the flow passing through the through gate 1067 described above.

As described above, the sorting unit 1164 used in the present embodiment repeats the sorting of the entered ball in the order of the first winning hole 1964a→through gate 1067→second left winning hole 1964b→through gate 1067. is configured as

In this way, by providing a plurality of winning holes and through gates in one sorting unit 1164, it is possible to make the installation space for various devices (winning holes, through gates, etc.) on the game board surface compact. Furthermore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 which further enhances the amusement of the game by using the empty space on the game board surface for decoration and presentation.

Furthermore, in the distribution unit 1164 of the present embodiment, two distribution members having the same configuration as the distribution member 900 used in the distribution unit 1064 of the fourth embodiment are provided, thereby distributing balls in three directions. Therefore, the same sorting member can be adopted for two-way sorting and three-way sorting of balls in the sorting unit according to the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, thereby reducing the cost. becomes possible.

Note that the distribution unit 1164 in this embodiment uses a configuration in which the ball distribution destination is changed according to the weight of the falling ball. good.

Also, in the sorting unit 1164 in this embodiment, the ratio of sorting to the first winning hole 1964a, the left second winning hole 1964b, and the through gate 1067 is. Although the ratio is 1:1:2, it is also possible to use a configuration in which all are distributed uniformly.

Further, in this embodiment, a ball entry detection sensor 1164 that detects a ball that has entered the sorting unit 1164 is provided. This is used for control to detect clogged balls in the sorting unit 1164, and the ball that entered the sorting unit 1164 will reach the through gate 1067, the first winning hole 1964a or the left second winning hole within a predetermined time. This control is performed by determining whether the ball is hit in any of 1964b. The through gate 1067, the first winning hole 1964a, and the second left winning hole 1964b are each provided with a detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that a ball has entered (passed through).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the through gate 1067 is used to discover an act of illegally operating the sorting members 1900 and 1950 provided in the sorting unit 1164 to guide a ball that hits the sorting unit 1164 to a specific location. , the first winning hole 1964a or the left second winning hole 1964b is stored and compared with the order of ball entry mechanically distributed by the distribution unit 1164 to check whether any fraudulent activity has occurred. Judging.

In addition, when a detection sensor is provided to collectively detect the balls that have entered the left second winning hole 1964b and the right second winning hole 640, the ball can enter the right second winning hole 640. In the game state (during time reduction, during variable probability, etc.), it is controlled so as not to discriminate the above-described cheating. By doing so, it is possible to easily find the act of restricting the rotation of the distribution members 1900 and 1950 and causing game balls to continuously enter a specific portion (for example, the second left winning hole 1964b). can.

Also, in order to prevent the above-described fraudulent act, it is preferable that the ball can flow down only after the distribution members 1900 and 1950 rotate. Specifically, in the sorting unit 1164 shown in FIG. 150(a), there is formed a portion where the distance between the top of the wall surface constituting the sorting member accommodating portion and the inner wall of the sorting unit 1164 is less than one ball. The sorting unit 1164 may be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, the ball cannot flow down inside the distribution unit 1164 unless the distribution member rotates. can be prevented.

Next, the effect control displayed by the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 151 is a time chart for explaining the flow of the special symbol variation effect performed using the third symbol display device 81 (main screen) and the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen), which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 151, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment displays the main variation (variation based on the variation pattern command) that is variably displayed in conjunction with the variation of the special symbol, and that the game ball has entered the entrance. It is configured to be able to execute a preliminary pseudo-variation that is variably displayed based on the winning command shown.

First, the special symbol fluctuation period shown in FIG. 151 is a period during which the first symbol display device 37 variably displays the special symbol. Fluctuation periods of the special symbols corresponding to winning prizes 1 to 5, which will be described later, are shown as fluctuation 1 to fluctuation 5, respectively. The number of reserved balls of special symbols is the number of reserved and stored judgment results of special symbols, and the balls enter the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance while the special symbols are fluctuating or during the jackpot game. It increases by doing, and it decreases by starting a new special pattern fluctuation.

Winning indicates whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance. In FIG. 151, for convenience of explanation, the first winning ball is shown as winning 1, winning 2, winning 3, winning 4, and winning 5.

The first ball entrance or the second ball entrance is configured to determine whether or not a ball enters the jackpot game and to pay out prize balls. Regarding, it will not be done if the number of balls entered exceeds the number of retained memories. On the other hand, the payout of prize balls is executed for all incoming balls. Here, a ball that enters each ball entrance and can receive a prize ball payout is referred to as a ball entry, and a ball enters each ball entrance and a jackpot game can be judged as winning. , and the description will be continued below.

At the bottom of the time chart in FIG. 151, there are a third symbol display device 81 (main screen) and a third symbol variation 1 which is dynamic display of the third symbol dynamically displayed on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen). , the third symbol variation 5 is shown.

The third pattern variation is composed of a real variation corresponding to the variation of the special symbol and a preliminary pseudo variation corresponding to the timing of receiving the winning command, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the main variation on the spherical liquid crystal device. At 670, it is configured to be able to perform pre-pseudo-variation.

Preliminary pseudo-variation refers to the period before the start of this variation, which determines the variation of the third symbol based on the information included in the winning command (the remaining variation time of the variation display that has already started variation, The third pattern is simulated by using the period of the variation time corresponding to the previously reserved and stored reserved pattern).

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the winning prize of the ball and the variation timing of the third symbol will be described. First, when winning 1 occurs in a state where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0, the variation of the special symbol (variation 1) is started, and the main variation of the third symbol is started on the third symbol display device 81. (this variation of the third symbol variation 1). Then, when winning 2 occurs while variation 1 is being performed, the number of reserved balls of special symbols is increased to 1. - 特許庁Based on the occurrence of the winning prize 2, the preliminary pseudo-variation of the third symbol variation 2 is started on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen). After that, when the win 3 occurs, the number of special symbol reserved balls is increased to 2, and the preliminary pseudo variation of the third symbol variation 3 is generated, but the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen) continues the third symbol variation 2. A prior pseudo-variation is displayed.

In this embodiment, when the preliminary pseudo-fluctuations overlap, the preliminary pseudo-fluctuation corresponding to the pending symbol selected by the player is displayed on the spherical liquid crystal device 670, and if the player does not select the pending symbol Then, it is configured to display on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 a pre-pseudo variation corresponding to the reserved symbol from which the main variation is started next. In addition, in this figure, the case where the player does not select the reserved symbol will be described. Therefore, even at the timing when the winning prize 3 occurs, the advance pseudo variation of the third symbol variation 2 based on the winning prize 2 at which the main variation is started next is displayed.

The method of displaying the preliminary pseudo-variation on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen) is not limited to the display method of the present embodiment. Alternatively, one selected by the player from among the plurality of preliminary pseudo fluctuations displayed at the same time may be displayed. In addition, only when the player selects the preliminary pseudo-variation display, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen) may display the preliminary pseudo-variation, or when the player does not select the preliminary pseudo-variation display. , Preliminary pseudo-variation display corresponding to the reserved symbol in which the performance (read-ahead performance) with high expectation for big hit is executed may be displayed.

Then, when the variation 1 of the special symbol ends and the timing of starting the variation 2 comes, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is reduced by one, and the third symbol variation 2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (main screen). is started, and the preliminary pseudo-variation of the third symbol variation 3 is started on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen). At this timing, the third symbol variation 2 is switched from preliminary pseudo variation performed on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub screen) to real variation performed on the third symbol display device. In order to eliminate the sense of incongruity in this display switching, an effect is performed in which the variation display of the preliminary pseudo variation fades out in accordance with the timing at which the preliminary pseudo variation is completed (the timing at which the previous main variation is stopped). By doing so, it is possible to continue the performance of the preliminary pseudo-variation performed by the spherical liquid crystal device 670 and the performance of the main variation performed by the third pattern display device without discomfort. In addition, a sense of incongruity is eliminated by making the background of the third symbol variation the same between the preliminary pseudo variation and the main variation. The same processing is performed thereafter.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153, the display screen on which the preliminary pseudo variation and the main variation of the third symbol variation are performed will be described. FIG. 152(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the main screen 3rd pattern display device 81 is subjected to the main variation and the sub-screen spherical liquid crystal device 670 is subjected to preliminary pseudo variation.

The third symbol display device 81 (hereinafter referred to as the main screen) performs variable display of the third symbol in the main display area Dm and displays reserved symbols in the sub display area Ds, as in the second embodiment described above. etc., and the description of the same content is omitted.

On the main screen in the present embodiment, on the reserved design displayed in the sub-display area Ds, a mark (black circle) that identifiably displays the reserved design corresponding to the preliminary pseudo-variation currently being performed is displayed. there is In FIG. 152(a), the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (hereinafter referred to as sub-screen) displays that preliminary pseudo-variation corresponding to the reserved symbol "1" is being performed. By using such a configuration, the player can easily grasp which of the plurality of reserved symbols the preliminary pseudo-fluctuation corresponding to is being performed. In addition, the reserved symbol "3" is displayed in a manner different from the other reserved symbols, indicating that the expectation of a big win is high.

Also, "screen switch push" is displayed on the right side of the sub-display area Ds. This is a display for informing the player that it is possible to switch the display contents of the main screen and the sub-screen. A configuration for switching display between the main screen and the sub-screen will be described later.

FIG. 152(b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the preliminary pseudo-variation is performed on the main screen and the main variation is performed on the sub-screen. In FIG. 152(b), by operating the frame button 22 and executing the screen switching operation while FIG. 152(a) is displayed, the image displayed in the main symbol and the sub symbol are displayed. The current image is switched. Specifically, the image data displayed in the main display area Dm of the main screen and the image data displayed in the sub-screen are switched. ) is the same as In this way, by switching the contents displayed on the main screen and the sub-screen by the player's operation, the player can select an effect that interests him/herself and watch the effect on the main screen. become.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 105, the main screen is about six times as large as the sub-screen, and the variable display displayed on the main screen is overwhelmingly more powerful. can provide. By using this configuration in a pachinko machine equipped with screens of different sizes, it is possible to select a variation that the player is interested in from among a plurality of variation displays (main variation and preliminary pseudo variation) that are simultaneously executed. Since the display can be selected and the selected variable display can be displayed on the main screen, it is possible to provide the desired effect to the player on a more powerful screen.

FIG. 153(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which preliminary pseudo-variation is performed on the main screen and main variation is performed on the sub-screen. FIG. 153(a) shows a state in which FIG. 152(b) is displayed, in which the player changes the target of preliminary pseudo-variation from reserved symbol "1" to reserved symbol "3". It should be noted that the reserved symbols to be subjected to the preliminary pseudo-variation are configured to be selectable by the player by operating the frame button 22, and a mark (black circle) is placed on the reserved symbol "3" selected by the player. is attached.

Then, on the main screen, the preliminary pseudo variation corresponding to the reserved symbol "3" is displayed, and the mode "chance!" indicating that the expectation of the big win is high is displayed.

FIG. 153(b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the main screen is subjected to the main variation using the reserved symbol selected in FIG. 153(a) as the target of the preliminary pseudo variation. As shown in this figure, this variation using the reserved design selected as the target of the preliminary pseudo variation is started, and when the timing when the preliminary pseudo variation ends, this variation is displayed on the main screen. The contents displayed on the display screen are configured to be automatically switched. In addition, the mode "Chance!", which is displayed during the pre-pseudo-variation display and indicates that the expectation of the big win is high, is also continuously displayed in the main variation display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an effect with continuity even when the preliminary pseudo-fluctuation changes to the main fluctuation, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused. .

In addition, in this figure, since there is no reserved symbol, the preliminary pseudo-variation display is not performed on the sub-screen. When the pre-pseudo variable display is not performed in this way, it is preferable to use the sub-screen as an effect for the main variable display displayed on the main screen.

The preliminary variable display and the main variable display executed by the main screen and the sub-screen have been described above using the schematic diagrams of each screen. .

First, even if the display time of this variable display is set short, that is, even if the variable time of the special symbols is set short, the player should be sufficiently encouraged whether the lottery result of the special symbols is a big win or not. In order to make it possible, in the preliminary pseudo-fluctuation effect, the effect indicating the degree of expectation of the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol (for example, the comment display effect suggesting the stop symbol of the third symbol, and the equipment of the character are selected and determined In this variable production, a result display production is performed as a production to display the lottery result (a production that the 3rd pattern only stops or a production that the character attacks the enemy). .

By performing such an effect, even if this variable time is set short in order to increase the efficiency of the game, by performing the expectation degree suggesting effect by the preliminary pseudo-variable effect, the player can get the lottery result of the special symbol. You can wait while enjoying being displayed.

Secondly, in order to allow the player to experience the effect desired by the player for as long as possible, the display mode of the reserved pattern displayed on the third display device 81 is changed when the player selects the display mode. A display mode (for example, displaying a plurality of characters) that suggests the content of the displayed preliminary pseudo-variation is set, and the player selects a desired reserved pattern, so that the character displayed in the selected reserved pattern appears. The effect to be displayed is displayed in advance pseudo-variation.

By performing such an effect, the player can enjoy a desired effect as a pre-pseudo-fluctuation effect while performing a lottery game with special symbols as usual. In addition, since the desired effect is provided not by the main variable effect but by using the preliminary pseudo-variable effect, the desired effect can be experienced for a long time.

In addition, by setting the character that appeared in the preliminary pseudo-fluctuation production to also appear in the main fluctuation production using the reserved pattern corresponding to the preliminary pseudo-fluctuation production, it is possible to achieve further effects. Become.

As above, the preliminary pseudo-fluctuation effect of the present embodiment has been described, but a configuration other than the above-described configuration may be adopted as long as the same effect is achieved.

For example, in the present embodiment, the display of the sub-display area Ds is displayed on the main screen without being switched so as not to confuse the player, but the display of the sub-display area Ds may also be switched. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to image data generation in the display control device 114 .

The preliminary pseudo-variation used in the present embodiment includes not only the variation of the third symbol, but also the aspect of being displayed in the main display area Dm accompanying the variation of the third symbol. It also includes story development, background image changes, and the like.

Further, it is preferable that the operation of switching between the main screen and the sub-screen is effective only within a predetermined period. For example, it is preferable that the screen can be switched only while the third symbol corresponding to the main variation is performing the high-speed variation. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the control device by eliminating the switching of the screen during the period in which the process related to the game is concentrated (the period in which the process related to the stop display of the third symbol is performed).

Further, in the state where the preliminary pseudo-variation is being executed on the sub-screen, it may be possible to select the pending symbol to be subjected to the preliminary pseudo-variation.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the preliminary pseudo-fluctuation effect corresponding to the reserved special symbol is executed on the sub screen, but for example, the preliminary pseudo-fluctuation effect corresponding to the reserved symbol of the normal symbol may be performed. In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration in which the special symbol starting winning prize and the normal symbol starting winning prize are regularly distributed like the distribution unit 1164 described in this embodiment, the reserved normal symbol symbols are used. Since it is possible to maintain the predetermined number, it is possible to enjoy the preliminary pseudo-fluctuation effect.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment will be explained. In this embodiment, it is clearly shown that the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is connected to the display control device 114, and the contents of the RAM 233 of the display control device 114 are changed from the above-described third embodiment. differ in Other points are the same as the above-described third embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 154, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 154 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment.

This embodiment differs from the above-described third embodiment in that it is clearly shown that the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is connected to the display control device 114 . Also, in this embodiment, a ball entering sensor 1164a shown in FIG.

FIG. 155 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment. This embodiment differs from the above-described third embodiment in that the RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is provided with a switching flag 233o.

The switching flag 233o is a flag used for determining whether to switch the display between the main screen (the third pattern display device 81) and the sub-screen (the spherical liquid crystal device 670), and is a command performed by the display control device 114. In the determination process 2, when it is determined that there is a switching command, it is set to ON (S2556 in FIG. 158), and similarly in the command determination process 2, the identification number corresponding to the preliminary pseudo-variation effect is given. If it is determined that there is a variation pattern command, it is set to OFF (S2554 in FIG. 158).

<Regarding control processing executed by the sound ramp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 and 157. FIG. The fifth embodiment differs from the above-described fourth embodiment in that the preliminary pseudo change setting process is executed in the main process. Since other points are the same, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, main processing 3 executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing main processing 3 in the fifth embodiment. This main processing 3 executes the processing of S1301 to S1354 in the same manner as the main processing 2 (see FIG. 133) in the above-described fourth embodiment, and then performs the preliminary pseudo change setting processing (S1355) added in this embodiment. Run. Then, as in the main process 2 described above, the processes from S1317 to S1321 are executed, and this process is repeated.

Next, referring to FIG. 157, the preliminary pseudo change setting process (S1355) will be described. FIG. 157 is a flow chart showing the preliminary pseudo change setting process (S1355). This pre-pseudo change setting process (S1355) is a process of setting a pre-pseudo change to be displayed on the main screen and sub-screen based on the winning command and the player's operation.

When the preliminary pseudo-variation setting process (S1355) is set, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol winning command has been received (S5101). If the special symbol winning command has not been received (S5101: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when a special symbol winning command is received (S5101: Yes), based on the winning command, a preliminary pseudo-fluctuation effect is selected (S5102).

In S5102, the information included in the winning command is analyzed whether it is a jackpot, a loss super reach, or a loss, and based on the analysis result, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a. It should be noted that the variation pattern selection table 222 of the present embodiment also stores a plurality of variation patterns of preliminary pseudo variation effects. Then, the selected variation pattern is temporarily stored in the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113. FIG.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is a selection of reserved symbols (S5103). This discriminates whether or not the player selects a reserved pattern that the player wants to execute the preliminary pseudo-fluctuation performance from among a plurality of reserved patterns, and is configured to enable selection by operating the frame button 22.例文帳に追加is doing.

In S5103, when it is determined that the reserved design is not selected (S5103: No), the identification information corresponding to the oldest reserved design and the preliminary pseudo-fluctuation effect are set (S5107). The oldest reserved pattern is the reserved pattern corresponding to the oldest reserved memory among the information held in the reserved memory. It is a reserved design corresponding to the design.

In addition, identification information is given so that individual winning information can be identified, and is information that makes it possible to associate various commands created based on the winning of one ball into the entrance. and is given to the header of each command. Based on this identification information, the command (number of pending balls command, winning command) created in the start winning process (see FIG. 61) executed by MPU 201 of main control device 110, and the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 60 ), the MPU 211 of the audio lamp control device 113 can associate commands with different transmission timings, such as commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command) created in the above.

On the other hand, in S5103, when it is determined that the reserved design has been selected (S5103: Yes), the identification information corresponding to the selected reserved design and the preliminary pseudo-fluctuation effect are set.

Next, it is determined whether a switching operation has been performed (S5105). This is for determining whether or not an operation has been performed to switch the display contents of the main screen and the sub-screen. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a switching operation (S5105: Yes), a switching command is set (S5106), and this processing ends.

Next, command determination processing 2 (S2352) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 158 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 2 (S2352). The command determination process 2 (S2352) is a process executed in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114, but the contents of the V interrupt process are the same as those of the above-described second embodiment. Therefore, the description is omitted.

Further, the processing from S2404 to S2417 executed in the command determination processing is executed in the other command processing (S2553) in the command determination processing 2, and the description of the content thereof is omitted.

When the command determination process 2 (S2352) is executed, the processes from S2401 to S2403 are performed in the same manner as the command determination process executed in the second embodiment. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command to which identification information corresponding to the preliminary pseudo variation effect is given (S2551). If it is determined that there is no variation pattern command to which the identification information corresponding to the preliminary pseudo-variation effect is given (S2551: No), then it is determined whether there is a switching command (S2552). If there is no switching command (S2552: No), other command processing is executed (S2553), and this processing is looped.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2551 that there is a display variation pattern command to which identification information corresponding to the preliminary pseudo variation effect is given (S2552: Yes), the switching flag 233o is set to OFF (S2554 ), the preliminary pseudo-fluctuation effect is terminated (S2555). Then, the process proceeds to S2552.

If it is determined in S2552 that there is a switching command (S2552: Yes), the switching flag 233o is set to ON, and the process proceeds to S2553.

By setting the switch flag 233o in the command determination process 2 described above, it is possible to switch the display contents between the main screen and the sub screen in the drawing process described later. In addition, since the preliminary pseudo-variation effect is terminated using the identification information attached to the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the variation time of the special symbol changes depending on the number of reserved symbols at the start of variation. Even if there is, it is possible to execute preliminary pseudo-variation until immediately before the start of the main variation.

Next, drawing processing 2 (S2356) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing drawing processing 2 (S2356). This drawing process 2 (S2356) is a process performed to switch the display contents between the main screen and the sub screen.

In the rendering process 2 (S2356), first, a first rendering list is generated (S3901). The first drawing list is a drawing list relating to the variable display (main variable display) of the third symbol performed corresponding to the variation of the special symbol. Next, a second drawing list is generated (S3902). The second drawing list is a drawing list relating to variable display (previous pseudo-variable display) of the third symbol set based on the winning command of the special symbol.

Then, it is determined whether the switching flag 233o is set to ON (S3903). If the switch flag 233o is set to ON (S3903: Yes), the sub-screen is set as the output destination, and the first drawing list and drawing target buffer information are transmitted to the image controller (S3904). Then, with the main screen set as the output destination, the second drawing list and the drawing target buffer information are transmitted to the image controller (S3905). That is, when the player operates the frame button 22 to switch the display contents of the main screen and the sub-screen, the switching flag is set to ON, and the image based on the first drawing list generated in S3901 is displayed on the sub-screen. , and an image based on the second drawing list generated in S3902 is displayed on the main screen.

After that, the drawing target buffer flag is updated (S3906), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the switching flag 233o is not set to ON (S3903: No), the main screen is set as the output destination, and the first drawing list and drawing target buffer information are transmitted to the image controller (S3907). Then, with the output destination as the sub-screen, the second drawing list and the drawing target buffer information are transmitted to the image controller (S3908), and the process proceeds to S3906.

By using the prior pseudo-variation described above, it is possible to solve the problems of the prior art described below.

Conventionally, based on the information included in the winning command, there has been an effect of changing the mode of the reserved design. By using this conventional technology, it is possible to inform the player that there is a reserved symbol that is reserved and stored and that the judgment result of the success/failure judgment result is a big win. It was necessary to keep watching the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the other special symbols until the variation of the special symbol based on the reserved memory with high expectation of the big win is started. Also, in recent years, pachinko machines have appeared that are capable of receiving a large number of pass/fail judgments by shortening the fluctuation time of special symbols. There is a problem that the variable display of is also shortened, and the game lacks interest.

In order to solve the above-described problem, in this embodiment, based on the information included in the winning command, prior pseudo-variation is performed before the main variation corresponding to the winning command is started. To display a preliminary pseudo-variation created based on information included in the prize-winning command even after receiving the prize-winning command corresponding to the high reserved memory and before starting the main variation corresponding to the prize-winning command. The player can see the variable display of the third pattern based on the reserved memory with high expectation of big win while the main variation of the third pattern based on the other reserved memory is being performed. Thus, it becomes possible to make the player interested in the variable display of the third symbol. Furthermore, even if the fluctuation time of the special pattern is shortened and the main fluctuation time of the third pattern is also shortened, the fluctuation time of the third pattern based on one prize is lengthened by providing the preliminary pseudo fluctuation. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepachi, jangkyu, a so-called game machine combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

As a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that confirms and displays the symbols after variably displaying a sequence of symbols, and does not have a handle for hitting balls. things are mentioned. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine due to separate handling of medals and balls.

In addition, all or part of the configurations of the above-described embodiments may be implemented in combination.

A part or all of the above-described embodiments and modifications thereof may be combined. In addition, although it is configured with a plurality of control devices, it is not limited to this, and may be configured with a single integrated control device.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Protruding Operation Unit 400 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising driving means for generating a driving force and a displacement member displaced by the driving force generated by the driving means, the displacement member is rotatable between a retracted position and a rotating position. a base side displacement member disposed on the base side displacement member and a relative formed to be displaceable between a reference position and an overhang position projecting outward from the base side displacement member from the reference position; a displacement member, comprising: a first operation for rotating the base-side displacement member between the retracted position and the rotation position; A gaming machine A1 characterized by being capable of executing a second action of displacing between the two.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a game machine that performs an effect by rotating a displacement member around a base end side that is rotatably supported (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-92634 ( For example, paragraphs 0175 to 0189, see FIG. 83)). According to this game machine, by rotating the displacement member in one direction, the distal end side of the displacement member is arranged at a predetermined position serving as the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, while the displacement member is rotated in the direction opposite to the one direction. By rotating in another direction, the displacement member is retracted to the outside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device (retracted position). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, if the displacement member has a small outer shape, it becomes difficult for the player to sufficiently see the displacement member at a predetermined position that is the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, and the production effect is sufficiently exhibited. On the other hand, if the outer shape of the displacement member is large, there is a problem that a large space is required outside the display area (retracted position). The game machine A1 was created to solve the above-described problems, and can allow the player to sufficiently see the displacement member at a predetermined position while reducing the space required for the retracted position. The purpose is to provide gaming machines.

That is, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement member includes a base-side displacement member formed rotatably between the retracted position and the rotation position, a base-side displacement member disposed on the base-side displacement member, and a reference position and a reference position thereof. a relative displacement member configured to be displaceable between overhanging positions projecting outward from the proximal displacement member relative to the proximal displacement member; , and the second motion of displacing the relative displacement member between the reference position and the extended position with respect to the proximal displacement member, so that the proximal displacement member at the retracted position can be rotated by the first motion. When disposing to the position, by disposing the relative displacement member at the reference position to the projecting position by the second operation, the relative displacement member can be projected outward from the proximal displacement member. Therefore, since the displacement member can be enlarged as a whole by that amount, the displacement member can be sufficiently visually recognized by the player at the rotation position, and the presentation effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

On the other hand, when the base-side displacement member in the rotational position is arranged at the retracted position by the first operation, the relative displacement member by the overhang position is arranged at the reference position by the second operation. The outward protrusion from the side displacement member can be suppressed. Therefore, since the displacement member can be made smaller as a whole, the space required to accommodate the displacement member at the retracted position can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to secure space for arranging other parts and devices.

The second action may be performed at least until the robot is placed at the retracted position (that is, until the first action is completed). Therefore, at least part of the first operation and at least part of the second operation may be performed in duplicate.

The gaming machine A1 includes a front member having an opening disposed forward of the plane of movement of the displacement member, and when the base-side displacement member 440 is arranged at the rotational position by the first operation, the relative displacement At least a part of the member is visible to the player through the opening of the front member, and when the relative displacement member is placed in the extended position by the second operation, the front member of the relative displacement member The game machine A2 is characterized in that an area visible to a player is enlarged through an opening.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effects of the game machine A1, the relative displacement member that has been retracted to the retracted position is first caused to appear in the opening of the front member by a rotational movement (first operation), and the relative displacement Making the player visually recognize only a part of the member, and then performing a linear motion (second operation) to expand the area where the player can visually recognize the relative displacement member through the opening of the front member. can be done.

In the gaming machine A2, the relative displacement member is disposed slidably displaceable on the base side displacement member, and the second action moves the relative displacement member to the reference position and the overhang relative to the base side displacement member. A gaming machine A3 characterized by sliding displacement between positions.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects of the game machine A2, the relative displacement member is disposed slidably displaceable on the base side displacement member, and the second action is to move the relative displacement member with respect to the base side displacement member. Since the relative displacement member is slidably displaced between the reference position and the extended position, the relative displacement member is extended from the reference position, for example, compared to the case where the second operation rotates the relative displacement member with respect to the base side displacement member. It is possible to reduce the space required for displacing to the protruding position, and to that extent, it is possible to secure space for arranging other parts and devices. In addition, since the mode of displacement of the relative displacement member by the second motion can be made different from the mode of displacement of the base side displacement member by the first motion, the production effect by performing the first motion and the second motion. can increase

In the game machine A3, the relative displacement member is disposed in a posture in which the longitudinal direction of the base side displacement member is aligned with each other, and the direction of the sliding displacement is the direction along the longitudinal direction of each other. A gaming machine A4 characterized by:

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects of the game machine A3, the relative displacement members are arranged in a posture in which the longitudinal directions of the base side displacement members are aligned with each other, and the directions of the sliding displacement are aligned with each other. Since the direction is along the longitudinal direction, the displacement member as a whole can be expanded and contracted by sliding displacement along the longitudinal direction of the relative displacement member with respect to the proximal displacement member. Therefore, in the rotating position, by expanding the displacement member as a whole, it is possible to allow the player to sufficiently visually recognize the displacement member, and to sufficiently exhibit the presentation effect. On the other hand, at the retracted position, by shortening the displacement member to make it smaller as a whole, the space required to accommodate the displacement member can be reduced, and the space for arranging other parts and devices can be secured. can do.

Further, according to the game machine A4, the relative displacement member that has been retracted to the retracted position is first caused to appear from the side in the opening of the front member by a rotational movement (first operation), and a part of the relative displacement member The player is made to visually recognize only the relative displacement member, and then, by a linear motion (second operation), the relative displacement member is projected toward the opening of the front member to expand the area where the player can visually recognize the relative displacement member. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to expand the visible area of the relative displacement member by a motion form (linear motion) different from the motion form (rotational motion) at the time of appearance. It is possible to make the player feel the sense of speed caused by the action and the sense of unity of the compound action caused by performing these actions in succession while being combined. As a result, it is possible to obtain a performance effect that cannot be obtained in a form in which the relative displacement member protrudes and retracts with respect to the opening of the front member only by linear motion (a form in which it reciprocates between the retracted position and the extended position).

In the gaming machine A4, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member is provided, and the transmission means is arranged at a position overlapping the displacement member arranged at the retracted position in a front view. A gaming machine A5 characterized by:

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A4, the transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the displacement member is provided, and the transmission means is arranged in front view with the displacement member arranged at the retracted position. Since they are arranged at the overlapping position, the dead space formed on the back side of the displacement member arranged at the retracted position can be effectively used as a space for arranging the transmission means.

In the gaming machine A5, a holding member for holding the driving means, the transmitting means and the displacement member is provided, the driving means and the displacement member are arranged on one side of the holding member, and the displacement member extends in the longitudinal direction thereof. A gaming machine A6, characterized in that it is arranged at the retracted position in a posture in which the driving means is positioned on an extension of the A6.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, since the driving means and the displacement member are arranged on one side of the holding member, for example, the holding member can be driven to the one side and the other side of the holding member. Compared to the case where the means and the displacement member are arranged respectively, the dimension in the direction connecting the one surface side and the other surface side of the holding member can be reduced. Furthermore, since the displacement member is disposed at the retracted position in such a manner that the driving means is positioned on the extension of the longitudinal direction of the displacement member, the displacement member and the driving means can be arranged linearly. Therefore, the space required for the retraction position can be efficiently suppressed.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, it comprises transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and a holding member for holding the transmission means, wherein the transmission member is adapted to drive the driving means. A rotating member that is rotated under force, and a predetermined position between one side position and the other side position that is eccentrically supported from the center of rotation of the rotating member, and the one side position is rotated by the holding member. a link member pivotally supported so that the other side position is connected to the relative displacement member of the displacement member, and when the rotation member is rotated between a first rotation position and an intermediate rotation position, the As the link member is displaced, the base-side displacement member is rotated via the relative displacement member of the displacement member, whereby the first operation is performed, and the rotation member moves between the intermediate rotation position and the second rotation position. A gaming machine A7 characterized in that when the link member is rotated between the two, the relative displacement member of the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base side displacement member as the link member is displaced, and the second action is executed.

According to the game machine A7, the link member pivotally supports a predetermined position between the one side position and the other side position at a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member, and rotatably shafts the one side position to the holding member. Since the other side position is supported and connected to the relative displacement member of the displacement member, by rotating the rotation member by the driving force of the driving means, the rotation of the rotation member is transferred to the relative displacement member of the displacement member via the link member. can be transmitted. In this case, when the rotating member is rotated between the first rotating position and the intermediate rotating position, the proximal displacement member can be rotated via the relative displacement member of the displacement member as the link member is displaced. can perform an action. On the other hand, when the rotating member is rotated between the intermediate rotating position and the second rotating position, the relatively displacing member of the displacing member can be displaced with respect to the base side displacing member along with the displacement of the link member, thereby performing the second operation. can be executed. That is, according to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A6, two different operations, the first operation and the second operation, can be performed by one driving means, so that the parts cost can be reduced. You can reduce the product cost by that amount.

In addition, the transmission means may have a structure in which a gear is provided on one side of the link member, and a gear provided on the outer periphery of the rotating member is meshed with the gear to displace the link member. The space required for arranging the members and link members increases. On the other hand, in the game machine A6, since a predetermined position between the one side position and the other side position of the link member is pivotally supported by the rotating member, the rotating member and the link member can be arranged in a state of being overlapped when viewed from the front. The space required for arranging the rotating member and the link member can be reduced by the amount of overlap.

Furthermore, since the relative displacement member and the holding member are connected via the transmission member, the shaking of the relative displacement member can be suppressed using the rigidity of the holding member.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A7, the displacement locus of the displacement member when the proximal displacement member of the displacement member is rotated by the first action overlaps at least a part of the locus in a front view. A gaming machine A8 characterized by comprising a decorative member.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A7, when the proximal displacement member of the displacement member is rotated by the first action, at least the displacement member and the decorative member are separated in front view. It can be crossed in part, and the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine A8, the displacement member has a rotation center in the first motion on one side in the longitudinal direction of the base side displacement member, and the relative displacement member is arranged on the front side of the base side displacement member in the longitudinal direction of each other. the second operation is to slide the relative displacement member between the reference position and the projecting position with respect to the base side displacement member, and the decorative member: When the base-side displacement member is rotated by the first action, the base-side displacement member is disposed at a position where at least a part thereof overlaps in a front view with a displacement trajectory on the rotation distal end side of the displacement member, and the base-side displacement member is arranged by the first action. When the side displacement member is arranged at the rotational position, there is no overlap with the displacement member in a front view, and the relative displacement member has a shape in which the rotation center side is positioned closer to the front side than the rotation tip side. A gaming machine A9 characterized by:

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effects of the game machine A8, the relative displacement member disposed on the front side of the base side displacement member has a shape in which the rotation center side is located on the front side rather than the rotation tip side, that is, Since the rotation distal end side is recessed toward the back side, contact between the relative displacement member and the decoration member can be suppressed when the proximal displacement member is rotated by the first action. In this case, since one longitudinal side of the base side displacement member is the center of rotation in the first motion, the free end of the displacement member, which is the leading end of the rotation, tends to sway back and forth during the first motion and comes into contact with the decorative member. is likely to occur. Therefore, the configuration of the gaming machine A9 is particularly effective.

On the other hand, when the relative displacement member is slidably displaced from the reference position to the extended position by the second operation, the relative displacement member disposed on the front side of the base side displacement member is positioned so that the rotation center side is the front side rather than the rotation tip side. Since the shape is positioned on the side, the relative displacement member can be arranged further forward (on the side closer to the player) to increase the impact.

In the game machine A9, the shape in which the rotation center side of the relative displacement member is positioned closer to the front side than the rotation tip side of the relative displacement member is any shape from the rotation tip side to the rotation center side. , may change stepwise, or may change gradually in a linear or curved line.

In any one of game machines A6 to A9, a pin member provided on one of the base side displacement member and the relative displacement member and a pin member provided on the other of the base side displacement member and the relative displacement member are slidably displaceable. a slide groove for receiving and enabling slide displacement of the relative displacement member with respect to the base side displacement member, wherein the position where the other side position of the link member is connected to the relative displacement member is closer to the relative displacement member than the pin member; A gaming machine A10 characterized in that it is on the tip side in the sliding direction of the displacement member.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A6 to A9, the position where the other side position of the link member is connected to the relative displacement member is the slide direction leading end side of the relative displacement member rather than the pin member. Therefore, the portion where the relative displacement member is supported by the holding member via the link member can be brought closer to the distal end side of the relative displacement member in the sliding direction. In other words, the location where the relative displacement member is supported by the holding member via the link member can be kept away from the location where the proximal displacement member is pivotally supported by the holding member. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the relative displacement member from swinging in the front-rear direction.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Taking the Complex Action Unit 500 as an Example>
A gaming machine comprising a driving means for generating a driving force, a driven member displaced by being driven by the driving force generated by the driving means, and a holding member for displaceably holding the driven member, a driven member displaceably connected to the driven member; and displacement regulating means for regulating displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member, wherein the displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member is determined by the displacement regulating means. A game machine B1 characterized in that the driven member is relatively displaced with respect to the driven member when the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, for example, a protruding position that is the front surface of a liquid crystal display device and a liquid crystal display from the protruding position are driven by a driving force from a driving means. There is known a game machine that produces an effect by displacing a displacement member between a retracted position that retracts in a direction outside the display area of the device (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-200790 (for example, paragraph 0095, FIG. 11 to 15)). According to this game machine, by switching the output direction of the driving means or intermittently outputting the output, the displacement mode of the displacement member is varied. However, the above-described conventional game machine has a configuration in which the output of the driving means is changed, so there is a problem that the control becomes complicated. Since only the velocity is changed and the direction of displacement remains constant, there is a problem that the mode of displacement is not sufficiently changed. The game machine B1 was created to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a game machine that can change the displacement mode of the displacement member while keeping the output of the driving means constant. do.

That is, according to the gaming machine B1, when the driven member is displaced by being driven by the driving force of the driving means, the displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member is defined by the displacement regulating means, thereby displacing the driven member. Along with this, the driven member can be driven while being relatively displaced with respect to the driven member. In other words, even if the driven member is displaced along a fixed trajectory such as a straight line or an arc, the driven member can be displaced along a trajectory different from that of the driven member. In addition, since the change in the displacement mode is formed by the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member, even if the driven member is displaced at a constant speed, the displacement will be different from that of the driven member. The track can displace the driven member. Therefore, it is possible to change the displacement of the driven member while keeping the output of the driving means constant.

In the gaming machine B1, the displacement regulating means includes a first groove formed in one of the driven member and the holding member, and a first groove formed in one of the driven member and the holding member, and a displacement along which the other of the driven member and the holding member is guided. A gaming machine B2 characterized by comprising a first guided portion formed in the .

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1, the displacement regulating means includes the first groove portion and the first guided portion, and the first guided portion is guided along the first groove portion, A displacement of the driven member relative to the retaining member can be defined. Therefore, the driven member is displaced by being driven by the driving force of the driving means, so that the driven member can be displaced relative to the driven member in accordance with the contour (shape) of the first groove. That is, by setting the contour (shape) of the first groove portion, it is possible to arbitrarily set the mode of relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member. In this way, the groove-shaped portion (first groove portion) and the portion guided by the groove portion (first guided portion) constitute the displacement regulating means, thereby simplifying the structure and reducing the product cost. At the same time, it is possible to improve the reliability and durability of the movable portion.

A gaming machine B3, wherein the driven member is at least rotatably connected to the driven member in the gaming machine B1 or B2.

According to the gaming machine B3, in the gaming machine B1 or B2, the driven member is at least rotatably connected to the driven member, so when the driven member is relatively displaced in accordance with the displacement of the driven member, Also, the angle of the driven member relative to the driven member can be changed, and the player can be made to recognize a change in strong impression as a change in the mode of displacement.

A game machine B4 in the game machine B3, wherein the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slidable manner.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of the game machine B3, the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slidable state, so that the driven member can be moved relative to the driven member as the driven member is displaced. When displacing, not only can the relative angle of the driven member with respect to the driven member be changed by rotation, but also the relative position of the two can be simultaneously changed by sliding displacement. You can increase the variation of changes that can be given.

In the game machine B4, the displacement regulating means includes a second groove formed in one of the driven member and the holding member, and a second groove formed in one of the driven member and the holding member, and a guide member along the second groove and moving the other of the driven member and the holding member. A gaming machine B5 characterized by comprising a second guided portion formed in the .

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of the game machine B4, the displacement regulating means includes the second groove portion and the second guided portion, and the second guided portion is guided along the second groove portion, A displacement of the driven member relative to the retaining member can be defined. Therefore, by displacing the driven member by the driving force of the driving means, relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be formed according to the contour (shape) of the second groove portion. That is, by setting the contour (shape) of the second groove portion, it is possible to arbitrarily set the mode of relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member. In particular, when the driven member is rotatably and slidably connected to the driven member, the guiding structure by the combination of the first groove portion and the first guided portion and the combination of the second groove portion and the second guided portion By providing both the guide structure and the guide structure, it is possible not only to increase the variation of the change that can be applied to the displacement mode, but also, even if there are many directions in which the driven member can be displaced with respect to the driven member, such displacement can be performed in two directions. Since it can be guided by the guide structure, it is possible to suppress the displacement from becoming unstable and improve the reliability as a movable member.

In the gaming machine B5, as in the case described above, the groove-shaped portion (second groove portion) and the portion guided by the groove portion (second guided portion) constitute the displacement regulating means. can be simplified, the product cost can be reduced, and the reliability and durability of the movable member can be improved.

In the gaming machine B5, the second groove portion is formed in the holding member, the second guided portion is formed in the driven member, and the driven member is such that the second guided portion is rotatable and slidably displaceable. A groove-shaped connection groove portion is provided that is inserted in a possible state, and the driven member is rotatable and slidably displaceable relative to the driven member by inserting the second guided portion into the connection groove portion. A gaming machine B6 characterized by being connected.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the second groove portion is formed in the holding member, the second guided portion is formed in the driven member, and the second guided portion is formed in the driven member. Since the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slidable state by being inserted into the connection groove, the driven member is held by being guided by the second guided portion and the second groove. It can serve both the role of regulating the displacement with respect to the member and the role of connecting the driven member to the driven member so as to be relatively displaceable by being inserted into the connection groove. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of parts, reduce the product cost, simplify the structure, and improve the reliability and durability of the movable member.

In the game machine B6, the holding member is interposed between the driven member and the driven member at least in a portion where the second groove is formed, and the driven member is positioned in the second groove of the holding member. A gaming machine B7, characterized in that it comprises an abutting part that abuts against the periphery of the second guided part, and the abutting part is formed in a circle concentric with the second guided part.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machine B6, the driven member has a contact portion that contacts the periphery of the second groove portion of the holding member, and the contact portion is the second guided portion. , so that even when the driven member is rotated with respect to the holding member (second groove), the contact area between the contact portions and the holding portion (peripheral edge of the second groove) is constant, it is possible to suppress the change in the support reaction force. As a result, the driven member can be stably displaced.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B7, the holding member can displace the driven member by the driving force of the driving means, and can displace the driven member as the driven member displaces. A gaming machine B8 characterized in that the driving means, the driven member and the driven member can be held in such a state.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the holding member is such that the driven member can be displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the displacement of the driven member Since the driving means, the driven member and the driven member can be held in a state in which the driven member can be displaced accordingly, the driving means, the driven member and the driven member are held by the holding member. can be unitized as As a result, the manufacturing cost for assembling the unit itself and the manufacturing cost for assembling the game machine by assembling the unit to the game machine body can be reduced.

A gaming machine B9 in the gaming machine B8, wherein the first groove portion is formed in the holding member, and the first guided portion is formed in the driven member.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B8, the first groove is formed in the holding member and the first guided portion is formed in the driven member. Space can be easily secured. That is, the space for forming the first groove portion is made by utilizing the dead space of the holding member, which must be formed in a relatively large outer shape in order to hold and unitize the driving means, the driven member and the driven member. can be secured. As a result, the degree of freedom of the outline (shape) and extension length of the first groove portion can be increased, and the variation of the change that can be given to the displacement mode can be increased accordingly.

In the gaming machine B9, the displacement regulating means includes a second groove formed in the holding member in a groove shape, and a second guided portion guided along the second groove and formed in the driven member. , wherein the holding member includes a first facing portion and a second facing portion facing each other with the driven member interposed therebetween, and the first groove portion is formed in one of the first facing portion and the second facing portion. and the second groove is formed in the other of the first facing portion and the second facing portion.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects of the game machine B9, the first groove portion is formed in one of the first facing portion and the second facing portion of the holding member that face each other across the driven member, and the other Since the second grooves are formed in the grooves, the first grooves and the second grooves can be formed without considering the formation positions of the other. That is, when forming both the first groove and the second groove in one of the first facing portion and the second facing portion, it is necessary to form the first groove and the second groove so as not to cross each other. , the degrees of freedom are limited. On the other hand, according to the game machine B10, both the first groove portion and the second groove portion can be set without considering the positional relationship with the other party for the outline (shape) and the extension length. By increasing the degree of freedom, it is possible to increase the variations of changes that can be given to the displacement mode.

In any one of game machines B5 to B7, game machine B11 is characterized in that at least one of the first groove and the second groove has a radius larger than a reference value at a starting end or a terminal end.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B5 to B7, in the initial stage of starting the driving of the driven member in the stopped state by the driving means, the load is reduced and the driving is smoothed. can be started at

In any one of game machines B5 to B7, a shielding member that shields the driven member invisibly is provided, and at least one of the first groove and the second groove is such that a part of the driven member is outside the area of the shielding member. A game machine B12 characterized in that the radius of a corresponding region is made smaller than a reference value from the start of exposure until the whole of the driven member is exposed outside the region of the shielding member.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the movement of the driven member can be made faster in the range where the driven member is partially shielded by the shielding member. An effect in which the member suddenly appears and an effect in which the driven member quickly hides behind the shielding member can be performed.

<Regarding the Concept of the Invention Using the Rotational Operation Unit 600 as an Example>
A holding member, a first rotating body and a second rotating body rotatably disposed on the holding member, and a driving means for applying a rotational driving force to the first rotating body and the second rotating body A gaming machine C1, wherein the second rotating body is formed in an annular shape and is concentrically fitted onto the first rotating body.

Here, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that performs an effect by rotating a plurality of rotating bodies (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-30847 (eg, paragraph 0162, see FIGS. 42 to 46)). According to this game machine, a plurality of rotating bodies arranged separately in the left and right direction are synchronously rotated in the same direction to give a sense of unity to the performance. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the plurality of rotating bodies are arranged left and right apart, it is difficult for the player to recognize the rotation of each other in association with each other. There is a problem that the effects of the presentation cannot be exhibited sufficiently. The gaming machine C1 is designed to solve the problems exemplified above. The rotations of a plurality of rotating bodies are associated with each other to make it easier for the player to recognize them, and an effect is produced by rotating the plurality of rotating bodies. To provide a game machine capable of sufficiently exhibiting the effects of

That is, according to the gaming machine C1, the second rotating body is formed in an annular shape and is concentrically fitted onto the first rotating body. Can rotate concentrically. As a result, the rotation of the first rotating body and the rotation of the second rotating body can be easily recognized by the player, and as a result, the effect of presentation by rotating each of the plurality of rotating bodies can be fully exhibited. can be done.

A gaming machine C2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine C1, the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, since the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape, it is possible to dispose performance members and the like on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body. Thus, it is possible to perform a performance of rotating the first rotating body surrounding the performance member and the second rotating body surrounding the first rotating body around the performance member. As a result, an effect of rotating each of the plurality of rotating bodies can be performed more effectively.

In the game machine C1 or C2, the first rotating body includes a main body portion inserted into the holding member, a one-side flange portion projecting outward in a flange shape on one axial side of the main body portion, and a second flange portion projecting outward on the other side in the axial direction opposite to the side flange portion and facing the one side flange portion with the holding member interposed therebetween; , a gaming machine C3, which is fitted on the main body of the first rotating body and arranged between the one-side flange of the first rotating body and the holding member.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1 or C2, the first rotating body is formed in the main body through which the holding member is inserted, and on one side and the other side in the axial direction of the main body. One side flange portion and the other side flange portion facing each other across a member are provided, and the second rotating body is fitted onto the main body portion of the first rotating body, and the one side flange portion of the first rotating body and the holding member are provided. Since it is disposed between and, the holding structure of the first rotating body and the second rotating body by the holding member can be simplified.

That is, according to the above configuration, since the main body portion of the first rotating body is inserted through the holding member, the first rotating body can be rotatably held by the holding member. In addition, since the other side flange portion of the first rotor is brought into contact with the holding member, displacement of the first rotor in one direction in the axial direction can be restricted, and the one side flange portion of the first rotor can be rotated for the second rotation. The displacement of the first rotating body in the other axial direction can be restricted by contacting the body and the second rotating body contacting the holding member.

Furthermore, since the second rotating body is fitted onto the main body of the first rotating body, the second rotating body can be rotatably held by the holding member via the main body of the first rotating body. In addition, the second rotating body is brought into contact with one side flange portion of the first rotating body, and the other side flange portion of the first rotating body is brought into contact with the holding member, so that the axial one side of the second rotating body Since the second rotating body is brought into contact with the holding member, it is possible to restrict the displacement of the second rotating body in the other axial direction.

In the gaming machine C3, a first gear and a second gear are provided in the holding member and transmit the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively. A game machine C4 characterized in that gears with which the first gear and the second gear mesh are engraved on the outer peripheral surfaces of the body and the second rotating body, respectively.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C3, the first gear and the second gear are arranged in the holding member and transmit the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively. Gears are provided on the first rotating body and the second rotating body, and gears with which the first gear and the second gear are meshed are engraved on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. Thus, the structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be simplified. In particular, when the main body of the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape and the effect member or the like is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the main body, the first gear is provided on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. and the structure meshing with the second gear becomes effective.

In the gaming machine C4, the second gear is arranged on one side of the holding member, and the first gear is arranged on the other side opposite to the one side of the holding member. meshes with the gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the other side flange portion of the first rotating body, and the second gear meshes with the gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body. A gaming machine C5 characterized by:

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, the second gear is arranged on one side of the holding member and the first gear is arranged on the other side opposite to the one side of the holding member. The first gear is meshed with the gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the other side flange portion of the first rotating body, and the second gear is engaged with the gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body. Therefore, for example, compared to the case where both the first gear and the second gear are meshed with the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively, on one side of the holding member, the first gear and the second gear are It is possible to simplify the structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body via the gear.

In addition, the first gear and the other side flange portion of the first rotating body with which the first gear is meshed, the one side flange portion and main body portion of the first rotating body, and the second rotating body are disposed. By being arranged on the other side opposite to the one side of the holding member, the first gear and the other side flange portion of the first rotating body are visible to the player who views the one side of the holding member from the front. It can be shielded by the holding member. That is, it is possible to simplify the structure for shielding the first gear and the other side flange portion of the first rotating body from being visually recognized by using the holding member.

In either game machine C4 or C5, first transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first gear, and second transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the second gear A gaming machine C6 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C4 or C5, the first transmission means and the second transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive means to the first gear and the second gear, respectively. The first rotating body and the second rotating body can be rotated by one driving means. In this case, the rotational driving force of the drive means can be transmitted to the first gear by the first transmission means and to the second gear by the second transmission means, respectively, through separate transmission paths. Therefore, for example, by setting the number of gears and the reduction ratio for each transmission path, even if two rotating bodies are rotated by one driving means, the two rotating bodies (first rotating The rotation modes of the body and the second rotating body) can be different. As a result, an effect of rotating each of the plurality of rotating bodies can be performed more effectively.

In any one of game machines C4 to C6, the holding member has a tubular portion that is formed in a tubular shape and protrudes to the one side, and the tubular portion of the holding member is provided on the inner peripheral side of the first The game machine C7 is characterized in that the second rotating body is rotatably disposed on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member, respectively.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines C4 to C6, the holding member is formed in a tubular shape and has a tubular portion projecting to one side, and the holding member has a tubular shape. Since the main body of the first rotating body is rotatably disposed on the inner peripheral side of the holding member, and the second rotating body is rotatably disposed on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member, the second rotating body is arranged on the holding member. It can be externally fitted to the main body of the first rotating body via the tubular portion. That is, not only the first rotating body but also the second rotating body can be held by the holding member. As a result, the arrangement positions of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be defined with reference to the holding member, respectively, so that the gears engraved on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, A positional relationship between the first gear and the second gear provided on the holding member can be defined with the holding member as a reference. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the engagement between the gears engraved on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body and the first gear and the second gear. As a result, the uneven wear of the gear can be suppressed, and the drive resistance can be suppressed.

In the game machine C7, the first rotating body has a plurality of projecting portions that project from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion, extend in the axial direction of the main body portion, and are scattered in the circumferential direction at predetermined intervals. A gaming machine C8 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effects of the game machine C7, the main body of the first rotating body protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the main body, extends in the axial direction of the main body, and is spaced at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. Since a plurality of spaced apart projecting portions are provided, the contact area between the main body portion of the first rotating body and the cylindrical portion of the holding member is limited to the projecting portions, and the main body portion of the first rotating body is moved. It can be smoothly rotated on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member.

In addition, it is preferable that the protruding portion is curved in an arcuate shape in which the shape of the cross section cut along a plane perpendicular to the axial direction of the main body portion is convex outward. Since the contact area with the inner peripheral surface of the tubular portion of the holding member is suppressed, the body portion of the first rotor can be rotated more smoothly on the inner peripheral side of the tubular portion of the holding member. is.

In the game machine C8, the main body of the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the first rotating body protrudes from the inner peripheral surface of the main body and extends in the axial direction of the main body. A gaming machine C9 comprising a plurality of inner protrusions disposed at positions that are in the same phase as the protrusions.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects of the game machine C8, the main body of the first rotor is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the first rotor protrudes from the inner peripheral surface of the main body and extends in the axial direction of the main body. and a plurality of inner projections provided at positions that are in the same phase as the projections (that is, the back side of the region where the projections are formed), so that the main body of the first rotating body When molding with a resin mold, the shape of the main body of the first rotating body can be uniformed (made symmetrical) on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side to ensure moldability. .

In the game machine C9, the main body of the first rotating body is divided in the axial direction, the divided parts are fastened and fixed with screws, and the screws are fastened at positions corresponding to the protrusions. A gaming machine C10 characterized by:

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effects of the game machine C9, the main body of the first rotating body is divided in the axial direction, the divided parts are fastened and fixed by screws, and the screws are the protruding parts. In other words, the projecting portion also serves as the screw fastening portion for fastening the screw, so the strength of the screw fastening portion can be ensured.

In any one of the game machines C1 to C10, the holding member is disposed at a position overlapping the locus of rotation of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body in a front view, and is formed to be capable of emitting light. A gaming machine C11 characterized by comprising a light emitting means that emits light.

According to the game machine C11, in any one of the game machines C1 to C10, it is arranged on one side of the holding member and at a position overlapping the locus of rotation of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body when viewed from the front. When the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated concentrically, the light emitted by the light emitting means is emitted on the locus of rotation of at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. can be seen by people. That is, it is possible to perform the effect of rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body at positions overlapping the light emitted by the light emitting means. As a result, the effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies can be performed more effectively It can be carried out.

In the gaming machine C11, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body includes a first portion formed so that the light emitting means can be visually recognized in a region where the locus of rotation overlaps the light emitting means when viewed from the front; A gaming machine C12 characterized in that the second portions in which the light emitting means are formed so as to be invisible are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction.

According to the game machine C12, in addition to the effects of the game machine C11, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body has the light emitting means visible in the region where the rotation locus overlaps the light emitting means when viewed from the front. Since the first portions formed and the second portions formed so that the light emitting means are invisible are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated. Since the part and the second part alternately pass in front of the light emitting means, the player can intermittently see the light emitted from the light emitting means. In other words, it is possible to perform an effect in which the rotation of the first rotating body and the second rotating body are associated with the intermittent light emission of the light emitting means, and as a result, the effect of rotating each of the plurality of rotating bodies. can be done more effectively.

<Feature D group> 8 pending effects (exciting time)
Acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of a judgment condition. and a display means for displaying an identification pattern corresponding to one piece of information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied; , a symbol variable means for varying the display mode of the identification symbol, a variable determination means for determining the identification symbol that can be varied by the symbol variable means, and a variable determined by the variable determination means. and variable notification means for notifying the identification pattern, and the variable determination means, based on the fact that the number of the information stored in the storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, The game machine D1 is characterized in that the identification pattern different from the normal one is determined as the identification pattern that can be changed by the pattern changing means.

Here, in a conventional game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is conducted when a game ball enters a starting hole, and a variation performance or a big win performance according to the lottery result is displayed on a liquid crystal screen. Then, a gaming machine has been proposed that, when winning a starting slot, stores the right of the lottery up to a certain number and notifies the number by a symbol (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-13528). However, in this type of pachinko machine, if the content of the lottery that has been reserved and stored is first discriminated and reported, the motivation to win a prize at the starting port will decrease after that, and the game will be stopped and the lottery result will be waited for. There is a problem that the game is played and the player becomes bored. The gaming machine D1 was created to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the problem of the player getting bored with the game early.

According to the gaming machine D1, the information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means. Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the propriety determination is executed by the propriety determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. The display means displays an identification pattern corresponding to one piece of information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied. The display mode of the identification pattern is changed by the pattern changing means based on a predetermined trigger. The identification pattern that can be changed by the pattern changing means is determined by the variable determining means. The identification pattern determined to be variable by the variable determination means is notified by the variable notification means. Based on the fact that the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the variable determination means selects an identification pattern that is different from the normal time as an identification pattern that can be varied by the pattern changing means. A symbol is determined by the variable determining means. Thus, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game so that the information is stored up to the predetermined number or more. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game, and to reduce the problem of the player becoming bored with the game early.

The game machine D1 has operation means that can be operated by a player and operation determination means for determining that the operation means has been operated, and the predetermined trigger is that the operation means is operated by the operation determination means. A game machine D2 characterized in that it is determined that the game machine has been operated.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operation determination means determines that the operation means operable by the player has been operated. A predetermined trigger is set when the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of operating the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the variable determination means variably determines the plurality of identification symbols based on the fact that the number of the information is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. Characterized game machine D3.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, based on the fact that the number of pieces of information is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a plurality of identification symbols are variably determined by the variable determining means. Since it is determined, there is an effect that the player can be encouraged to play the game so as to store the predetermined number or more of information.

In the gaming machine D3, when the variable determining means determines that the identification symbols are variably determined, a predetermined order is determined based on the fact that the operation determining means determines that the symbols have been operated. The game machine D4 is characterized in that the identification pattern of (1) is changed and displayed by the pattern changing means.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects of the game machine D3, when the variable determination means determines that the identification symbols are variably determined, the operation determination means determines that the operation has been performed. Based on this, one identification pattern is changed and displayed in a predetermined order by the pattern changing means, so that there is an effect that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Any one of the game machines D1 to D4 has prior right/wrong determination means for executing right/wrong determination based on the information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is established, and the symbol variable means. The game machine D5 is characterized in that the information corresponding to the variable identification pattern is changed and displayed in a notification mode based on the result of the right/wrong determination by the prior right/wrong determination means.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, the propriety judgment is executed by the prior propriety judging means based on the information stored in the storage means before the judging condition is satisfied. The information corresponding to the identification pattern to be changed is changed and displayed by the pattern changing means in a notification mode based on the result of the suitability judgment by the prior suitability judging means. As a result, the player can be notified of the success/failure determination result before the success/failure determination result is reported. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with interest in the display mode that is changed by the pattern changing means.

In the gaming machine D5, when the plurality of identification symbols are variably determined by the variable determining means, any of the information corresponding to the identification symbols determined to be variably selected is changed by the pattern changing means and displayed in a notification mode based on the determination result determined by the prior appropriateness determination means.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, when a plurality of identification symbols are variably determined by the variable determining means, information corresponding to the variably determined identification symbols is obtained. Since any of the information is displayed while being changed by the pattern changing means in a notification mode based on the determination result determined by the prior appropriateness determining means, the appropriateness determination result is known before it is displayed in the identification pattern. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine D6, when the plurality of identification symbols are determined to be variable by the variable determining means, one notification mode is displayed by displaying the plurality of identification symbols in a variable manner. A gaming machine D7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D6, when a plurality of identification symbols are determined to be variable by the variable determination means, the plurality of identification symbols are displayed in a variable manner to achieve 1 is displayed, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved by diversifying the notification modes.

<Feature D'group> 8 pending effects 2 (exciting time)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and when the determination condition is met, the information stored in the storage means display means for displaying at least an identification pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means before execution of the determination by the determination means; and a predetermined based on the trigger, when the number of the information stored in the storage means before execution of the determination by the determination means is a predetermined number or more, the display means a symbol changing means for varying a display mode of at least the predetermined number of identification symbols displayed in the game machine D'1 to a predetermined display mode.

Here, in a conventional game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is conducted when a game ball enters a starting hole, and a variation performance or a big win performance according to the lottery result is displayed on a liquid crystal screen. Then, a gaming machine has been proposed that, when winning a starting slot, stores the right of the lottery up to a certain number and notifies the number by a symbol (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-13528). However, in this type of pachinko machine, if the content of the lottery that has been reserved and stored is first discriminated and reported, the motivation to win a prize at the starting port will decrease after that, and the game will be stopped and the lottery result will be waited for. There is a problem that the game is played and the player becomes bored. The gaming machine D'1 was created to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the problem of the player getting bored with the game early. .

According to the gaming machine D'1, the information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means. When the determination condition is established, determination is performed by the determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. The display means displays at least the identification pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means before the determination is performed by the determination means. Based on a predetermined trigger, when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means before execution of determination by the determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the pattern variable means displays the information on the display means. The display mode of at least a predetermined number of displayed identification patterns is changed to a predetermined display mode.

Thus, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game so that the information is stored up to the predetermined number or more. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game, and to reduce the problem of the player becoming bored with the game early.

The game machine D'1 has operation means that can be operated by a player, and operation determination means for determining that the operation means has been operated, and the predetermined trigger is determined by the operation determination means. A game machine D'2 characterized in that it is determined that the means has been operated.

According to the gaming machine D'2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D'1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operation determination means determines that the operation means operable by the player has been operated. A predetermined trigger is a case where the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of operating the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early.

In a gaming machine D'2, a variable system that notifies, before the operation means is operated, an identification pattern whose display mode changes when the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated. A gaming machine D'3 characterized by comprising a notification means.

According to the gaming machine D'3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D'2, the identification pattern whose display mode changes when it is determined by the variable notification means that the operation means has been operated is displayed by the variable notification means. Since the information is identifiable before the operating means is operated, the player can operate the operating means while grasping which identification pattern display mode is to be changed, and enjoys operating the operating means. can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early.

In the gaming machine D'3, the variable notification means changes the display mode of the identification pattern to a variable notification mode, so that the display mode is displayed when the operation determination means determines that the operation means has been operated. A game machine D'4, characterized in that an identification pattern in which a variable is identifiably notified before the operation means is operated.

According to the game machine D'4, in addition to the effects of the game machine D'3, the variable notification means performs notification by changing the identification pattern itself to a variable notification mode, so that the player can determine which identification pattern is displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to easily grasp whether is variable.

In the gaming machine D'4, when the plurality of identification symbols are changed to the variable notification mode by the variable notification means, a predetermined number is determined based on the fact that the operation determination means determines that the operation has been performed. The game machine D'5 is characterized in that one of the identification symbols is displayed in the order that the identification symbols are varied by the symbol varying means.

According to the game machine D'5, in addition to the effects of the game machine D'4, when the plurality of identification symbols are changed to the variable notification mode by the variable notification means, it is determined that the operation has been performed by the operation determination means. Based on this, since one identification pattern is displayed in a variable manner in a predetermined order, there is an effect that it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Any one of the game machines D'1 to D'5 has pre-determination means for performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means before the determination is performed by the determination means. The game machine D' is characterized in that the pattern changing means changes the display form of the identification pattern to a predetermined display form in a notification mode based on the determination result determined by the prior determination means. 6.

According to the gaming machine D'6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D'1 to D'5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, prior to execution of determination based on the determination conditions, the determination is performed by the preliminary determination means based on the information stored in the storage means. Then, the display mode of the identification pattern is changed to a predetermined display mode and displayed in a notification mode based on the determination result by the prior determination means. As a result, the determination result of the preliminary determination means can be notified to the player before the determination means is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with interest in the display mode that is changed by the pattern changing means.

In the gaming machine D'6, the predetermined order is the order in which the information corresponding to the identification symbols is stored in the storage means, and the symbol changing means selects one of the display modes of the identification symbols. A gaming machine D'7 is characterized in that the display mode of the identification pattern corresponding to the second half of the order is variable to the notification mode.

According to the gaming machine D'7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D'6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the order in which the display mode of the identification pattern is changed by the pattern changing means is set as the order stored in the storage means, and the display mode of the identification pattern corresponding to the second half of the order is changed to the notification mode. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of operating the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early.

In any one of the game machines D'1 to D'7, while the identification pattern changed to the predetermined display mode by the pattern changing means is displayed on the display means, the storage means newly stores The gaming machine D'8 is characterized by further comprising additional pattern changing means for changing the display mode of the identification pattern corresponding to the information to the predetermined display mode based on the predetermined trigger.

According to the gaming machine D'8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D'1 to D'7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display mode of the identification pattern corresponding to the information newly stored in the storage means is changed based on a predetermined opportunity while the identification pattern changed to the predetermined display mode by the pattern changing means is displayed on the display means. , the additional pattern changing means is used to change the display mode to a predetermined one. As a result, the player can continue to be encouraged to play the game even after the predetermined number or more of information is stored. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game, and to reduce the problem of the player becoming bored with the game early.

In any one of the game machines D'1 to D'8, when all the information corresponding to the identification pattern changed to the predetermined display mode by the pattern changing means is judged by the judgment means, If the number of pieces of the information stored in the storage means before execution of judgment by the judging means is equal to or greater than a predetermined second prescribed number, based on a prescribed trigger, A gaming machine D'9, further comprising a second pattern changing means for changing a display mode of at least the second predetermined number of identification patterns displayed on the display means to a predetermined second mode.

According to the gaming machine D'9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D'1 to D'8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when all the information corresponding to the identification pattern changed to the predetermined display mode by the pattern changing means is judged by the judging means, the execution of judgment by the judging means out of the information stored in the storage means. When the number of pieces of information before being processed is equal to or greater than a second predetermined number, at least a second predetermined number of identification symbols displayed on the display means by the second symbol changing means based on a predetermined trigger. is changed to a predetermined second mode. Thus, after the player plays the game so that the information is stored up to the predetermined number or more, the player can be urged to play the game again so that the information is stored up to the second predetermined number or more. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game, and to reduce the problem of the player becoming bored with the game early.

In any one of the game machines D'1 to D'9, the predetermined display mode is a combination of a plurality of display modes of the identification symbols to form one display mode. 10.

According to the game machine D'10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D'1 to D'9, the display mode of a plurality of identification patterns is combined into one display mode. There is an effect that it is possible to increase the willingness of the player to play the game by giving the display mode of .

<Feature Group E> Displaying blank symbols by changing them to push-button advance notice Lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, By arranging and displaying a plurality of pattern rows composed of sub-patterns different from the patterns, a display means capable of displaying the stopped and displayed combination of the main patterns of each pattern row, and a lottery result specific to the display means. and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the display of the combination of the main symbols indicating that the stop is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition A sub-symbol variable means for varying the display mode of the sub-symbols of the displayed symbol row and whether or not to display in a combined display mode obtained by synthesizing the sub-symbols displayed by the sub-symbol variable means. A synthesis determining means for determining based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, and a synthesized display mode for displaying the synthesized display mode on the display means based on the determination by the synthesis determining means to display in the synthesized display mode. A gaming machine E1 characterized by comprising display means.

Here, in a conventional game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variable effect or a big win effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. Are known. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. . Among these types of pachinko machines, there is proposed a game machine in which operation means (switches, etc.) that can be operated by the player is provided in the game machine, and the player operates the operation means to change the performance of the game. (for example, JP-A-2010-075741). In such a pachinko machine, for example, there is a machine in which a lottery is executed as to whether or not to change the game effect when the operating means is operated by the player, in order to execute various effects when the operating means is operated. . However, in this type of pachinko machine, the performance of the game changes at a certain timing or the like due to the player's operation, and the player has a monotonous impression of the game, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. There was a problem. The gaming machine E1 was created to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine E1, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. A lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by arranging a plurality of pattern rows composed of a plurality of different main patterns and sub-patterns different from the main patterns between the patterns, so that the main patterns of each pattern row are stopped and displayed. The combination is displayed by the display means. Based on the display of a combination of main symbols indicating a specific lottery result on the display means, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is given by the privilege giving means. When a predetermined condition is established, the display mode of the sub-symbols of the stopped symbol row is varied by the sub-symbol varying means. Whether or not to display in a composite display mode in which the sub-symbols changed and displayed by the sub-symbol changing means are to be displayed is determined by the composition determining means based on the lottery results of the lottery means. The combined display mode is displayed on the display means by the combined display mode display means based on the determination by the combination determination means to display in the combined display mode. Thus, by displaying the combined display mode, it is possible to provide the player with a fresh presentation. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine E1, an operation means that can be operated by the player, an operation determination means for determining that the operation means has been operated, and the sub symbol variable means if the operation determination means determines that the operation has been performed. an operation variable display means for changing the display mode to a specific display mode when the display mode of the sub-symbol is changed and displayed by the game machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operation determination means determines that the operation means operable by the player has been operated. When it is determined by the operation determining means that the operation has been performed, if the display mode of the sub-symbol is changed and displayed by the sub-symbol changing means, the display mode is changed to a specific display mode by the operation-variable display means. displayed. As a result, the enjoyment of operating the operating means by the player can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can participate in the game.

In the gaming machine E2, the variable operation display means changes the display mode of the sub-symbol to one of the plurality of specific display modes based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means. A gaming machine E3 characterized by being a display.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the display mode of the sub-symbol is changed to one specific display mode among a plurality of specific display modes based on the lottery result by the lottery means. Since the sub-symbols are displayed by the variable operation display means, it is possible to diversify the display modes of the sub-symbols, and there is an effect that a fresh performance can be provided to the player.

In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a symbol row stopping means for stopping and displaying two or more symbols in a predetermined order after dynamic display of the symbol row for a predetermined period, and two or more symbols by the symbol row stopping means. dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period of the symbol row when the row is statically displayed and one or more symbol rows are dynamically displayed, and the predetermined condition is established. In this case, the dynamic display period determination means determines a specific dynamic display period that is different from the normal display period.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, after the symbol rows are dynamically displayed for a predetermined period, they are stopped and displayed by the symbol row stopping means in a predetermined order. When two or more symbol rows are stopped and displayed by the symbol row stopping means and one or more symbol rows are dynamically displayed, the dynamic display period of the symbol row is determined by the dynamic display period determination means. be. When a predetermined condition is established, the dynamic display period determination means determines a specific dynamic display period different from the normal display period.

As a result, it can be determined that the sub-symbol is variably displayed according to the specific dynamic display period. Therefore, the player can play the game with interest even during the dynamic display period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets bored with the game.

In any one of the game machines E1 to E4, the composition determining means is configured to easily determine the composition display mode when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result. Characterized game machine E5.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effects of the game machines E1 to E4, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the composition display mode is easily determined by the composition determination means. There is an effect that the game can be played in anticipation of the display of the composite display mode, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In any one of the game machines E1 to E5, when the composite display mode is displayed, based on the determination that the operation means is operated by the operation determination means, based on the lottery result by the lottery means. A gaming machine E6, characterized in that it has synthesis variable means for displaying said synthesized display mode which is displayed in a specific display mode variably.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines E1 to E5, when the composite display mode is displayed, based on the fact that the operation determination means has determined that the operation means has been operated, Since the composite display mode is changed and displayed by the composite variable means in the specific display mode based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the player can intervene in the game, and the problem of getting bored with the game early can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine E6, when the synthesis determining means determines to display in the synthesized display mode, the display mode changed and displayed by the sub-symbol changing means is operated by the operation means through the operation determining means. A game machine E7, characterized in that it has prohibiting means for prohibiting variable display even if it is discriminated that it has been done.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, when it is determined by the synthesis determining means to display in the synthesized display mode, the display mode varied and displayed by the sub-symbol changing means is determined by the operation determination. Even if it is determined that the operating means is operated by the means, the prohibiting means prohibits the variable display. There is an effect that it can be determined whether or not to be performed.

<Feature E'group> Display 2 by changing the blank pattern to a push button notice
Determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of determination conditions, and a symbol row provided with a plurality of different main symbols and sub-symbols different from the main symbols as identification information indicating determination results by the determination means are displayed. dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the symbol row on the display means; dynamic display period determination means for determining a period during which the symbol row is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; A gaming machine having a first privilege granting means for granting a first privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, wherein a predetermined condition is satisfied. sub-symbol variable means for varying the display mode of the sub-symbol during the dynamic display period, and when the sub-symbol is displayed in a specific display mode by the sub-symbol variable means. , and specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect in the remaining period of the dynamic display period.

Here, in a conventional game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variable effect or a big win effect according to the result of the lottery on a liquid crystal screen. Are known. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. . Among these types of pachinko machines, there is proposed a game machine in which operation means (switches, etc.) that can be operated by the player is provided in the game machine, and the player operates the operation means to change the performance of the game. (for example, JP-A-2010-075741). In such a pachinko machine, for example, when a player operates an operation means, a lottery is executed as to whether or not to change the game effects when the operation means is operated, in order to execute various effects. be. However, in this type of pachinko machine, the performance of the game changes at a certain timing or the like due to the player's operation, and the player has a monotonous impression of the game, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. There was a problem. The gaming machine E'1 was created to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the game machine E'1, the judgment is executed by the judgment means based on the establishment of the judgment condition. As the identification information indicating the result of determination by the determination means, a symbol row provided with a plurality of different main symbols and sub-symbols different from the main symbols is displayed on the display means. The dynamic display means dynamically displays the symbol row on the display means. The dynamic display period determination means determines the period during which the symbol row is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. When identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a first privilege giving advantage to the player is given by the first privilege giving means. When a predetermined condition is established, the display mode of the sub-symbol is varied during the dynamic display period by the sub-symbol variable means. When the sub-symbol is displayed in a specific display mode, a specific effect executing means executes a specific effect in the remaining period of the dynamic display period. As a result, it is possible to provide a fresh effect using the sub-symbols. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine E'1, the specific effect is a composite display mode obtained by synthesizing a plurality of sub-symbols having the specific display mode after being changed to the specific display mode by the sub-symbol changing means. A game machine E'2 characterized by a presentation to be displayed.

According to the gaming machine E'2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E'1, a composite display mode obtained by synthesizing a plurality of sub-symbols having a specific display mode is displayed as a specific effect, so that the player can feel freshness. There is an effect that a certain performance can be provided, and the problem that the player gets bored with the game early can be reduced.

The gaming machine E'1 or E'2 has operating means that can be operated by a player, and predetermined condition determining means for determining whether the predetermined condition is established based on the operation of the operating means. Characteristic game machine E'3.

According to the game machine E'3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E'1 or E'2, the predetermined condition determination means determines whether the predetermined condition is established based on the operation of the operation means that the player can operate. Therefore, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the player operating the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can participate in the game.

In the gaming machine E'3, when the sub-symbol variable means displays the sub-symbol in the specific display mode, the sub-symbol is displayed in the specific display mode based on the operation of the operating means. A gaming machine E'4 characterized in that the secondary symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the composite display mode.

According to the gaming machine E'4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E'3, based on the operation of the operation means, the secondary symbols are changed from a specific display mode to a composite display mode and displayed. In order to execute a specific effect, the player must actively operate the operating means, and the player can be prompted to operate the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can participate in the game.

In any one of the game machines E'1 to E'4, the display means displays a plurality of the symbol rows as identification information indicating the result of determination by the determination means, and the plurality of symbol rows are displayed for a predetermined period of time. symbol row stopping means for stopping and displaying in a predetermined order based on the determination result of the determining means after dynamic display for a period of time, wherein the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. The game machine E'5 is characterized in that the number of sub-symbols to be stopped and displayed is varied based on the determination result of the determination means when the sub-symbols are present.

According to the gaming machine E'5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E'1 to E'4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display means displays a plurality of symbol strings as identification information indicating the result of determination by the determination means. After the plurality of symbol rows are dynamically displayed for a predetermined period, the symbol row stopping means stops and displays them in a predetermined order based on the judgment result of the judging means. When a specific effect is being executed by a specific effect executing means, the number of sub symbols to be stop-displayed is varied based on the result of determination by the determining means. As a result, a specific effect using the sub-symbols can be made based on the result of determination by the determining means, and a fresh effect using the sub-symbols can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

When the determination result of the determining means is a specific determination result, or when the possibility of the determination result of the determining means being a specific determination result is high, the number of sub-symbols stopped and displayed by the symbol sequence stopping means is increased. do it. By doing so, if the number of sub-symbols is large, the degree of expectation for a big win increases, and the player can be interested in a specific performance. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

In any one of the gaming machines E'1 to E'5, the sub-symbol changing means changes the sub-symbol to the specific display mode when the determination result by the determining means is the specific determination result. A gaming machine E'6 characterized in that it is constructed so as to be easy to display.

According to the game machine E'6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the game machines E'1 to E'5, the sub-symbol variable means changes the sub-symbol when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result. Since the game is configured to be displayed easily by changing to a specific display mode, the game can be played in anticipation of the specific display mode being displayed.

In any one of gaming machines E'2 to E'6, the specific display mode is a display mode in which the display mode of the sub-symbol is changed to characters, and the synthetic effect mode is the specific display mode. A character string obtained by synthesizing a plurality of sub-symbols in the display mode, and the specific effect is to display the composite effect mode by combining at least part of the characters displayed in the specific display mode. A gaming machine E'7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E'7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E'2 to E'6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by synthesizing a plurality of displayed sub-symbols that have been changed into characters as a specific display mode, a character string is displayed as a synthetic presentation mode. A composite rendering mode obtained by combining at least a part of the characters displayed as the specific display mode is displayed as the specific rendering. As a result, the player can predict the character string displayed in the composite display mode by looking at the plurality of characters displayed in the specific display mode. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a fresh presentation, and it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

It should be noted that it is also possible to partially notify that characters displayed as a specific display mode will be used in a character string displayed as a combined effect mode before the combined effect mode is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to provide hints for predicting the character string to be displayed in the composite display mode, and to entertain the player.

In any one of game machines E'3 to E'7, the above-described effect storage means for storing a plurality of effects to be executed when the dynamic display is performed, and the effect stored in the effect storage means. A first effect including the specific effect is selected when the predetermined condition establishment determination means determines that the predetermined condition is established, and the predetermined condition establishment determination means determines that the predetermined condition is established. and effect selection means for selecting a second effect that does not include the specific effect if it is not determined.

According to the gaming machine E'8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines E'3 to E'7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effect storage means stores a plurality of effects to be executed when dynamic display is performed. The effect selection means selects the first effect or the second effect based on the determination result of the predetermined condition establishment determining means. As a result, different effects are selected based on the determination result of the predetermined condition establishment determining means during the dynamic display. Therefore, it is possible to change only the effect during the dynamic display based on the determination result of the predetermined condition establishment determining means, so that the amount of data relating to the dynamic display can be reduced.

<Characteristic group F> Display means capable of displaying the effect mode for executing an extended effect at the end of the SPGT, and time measuring means capable of measuring time even in a power failure state where the power supplied to the game machine is below a predetermined voltage value. an acquisition means for acquiring time information from the time measuring means; an elapsed time determination means for determining an elapsed time based on the time information acquired from the acquisition means; and a predetermined elapsed time has passed by the elapsed time determination means. switching display means for switching and displaying the effect mode displayed on the display means to a specific effect mode until a predetermined period elapses when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied; and extension period setting means for setting an extension period for extending a period for displaying the specific effect mode when it is determined that the specific effect mode is established. .

Here, in a conventional game machine such as a pachinko machine, an RTC (real time clock) is provided in the game machine, and the same effect is executed at the same timing between a plurality of game machines based on the time data measured by the RTC. A game machine configured to change the display mode is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-31695). In such a pachinko machine, the display mode is changed when the RTC reaches a preset time. However, in this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that the player's desire to play decreases after the period in which the display mode is changed ends, and the player becomes bored with the game. The gaming machine F1 was created to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the game machine F1, the effect mode is displayed by the display means. Even in a power failure state in which the power supplied to the game machine is equal to or lower than a predetermined voltage value, the time is measured by the time measuring means. The acquisition means acquires time information from the clock means. The elapsed time is determined by the elapsed time determining means based on the time information acquired from the acquiring means. When the elapsed time discriminating means discriminates that the prescribed elapsed time has passed, the presentation mode displayed on the display means is switched to the specific presentation mode and displayed by the switching display means until the specified period elapses. When it is determined that a predetermined condition is established when a predetermined period has passed, an extension period setting means sets an extension period for extending a period for displaying a specific performance mode. As a result, whether the period during which the specific presentation mode is displayed is extended or not is changed depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the player can be provided with an unexpected presentation. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine F1, acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the information based on the establishment of a lottery condition. A lottery is executed based on lottery means for executing a lottery, display means for displaying identification information indicating the result of the lottery by the lottery means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means before the lottery condition is established. and a preliminary lottery means, wherein the predetermined condition is easily established when the information determined as a specific lottery result by the preliminary lottery means is stored. Characterized game machine F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition. The information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means. A lottery is executed by the lottery means for the information based on the establishment of the lottery condition. The display means displays identification information indicating the result of the lottery by the lottery means. A lottery is executed by the preliminary lottery means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means before the lottery condition is satisfied. A predetermined condition is likely to be established when information determined as a specific lottery result by the preliminary lottery means is stored. As a result, a specific lottery result can be expected by extending the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played in anticipation of an extension of the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed.

The gaming machine F2 has dynamic display period determination means for determining a period for dynamically displaying the identification information, and the elapsed time is determined before the period determined by the dynamic display period determination means elapses. A gaming machine F3 characterized in that the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed when the period of time has elapsed.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the period for dynamically displaying the identification information is determined by the dynamic display period determining means. If the elapsed time elapses before the period determined by the dynamic display period determining means elapses, the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed. As a result, the dynamic display can be temporarily stopped in time with the end timing of the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily determine the end timing.

In the game machine F3, the game machine F4 is characterized in that the identification information is displayed in a specific dynamic display mode for a predetermined period until the elapsed time elapses.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, the identification information is displayed in a specific dynamic display mode for a predetermined period of time until the elapsed time elapses. There is an effect that it can be discriminated in the dynamic display mode.

<Features F'group> 2 to execute extension effect at the end of SPGT
A display means capable of displaying an effect mode, a predetermined period setting means capable of setting a predetermined period, a predetermined period determining means determining whether the predetermined period is set by the predetermined period setting means, and a predetermined period determining means. switching display means for switching and displaying the effect mode displayed on the display means to a specific effect mode when it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed; and when the predetermined period has passed and a predetermined condition is satisfied and extension period setting means for setting an extension period for extending the period for displaying the specific effect mode when it is determined that the specific effect mode is to be displayed.

Here, among game machines such as conventional pachinko machines, game machines that are configured to execute the same effects at the same timing or change the display mode among a plurality of game machines have been known ( For example, JP-A-2013-31695). Such a pachinko machine is equipped with, for example, an RTC (real time clock), and is configured to change the display mode when the time information obtained from the RTC reaches a preset time. However, in this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that the player's desire to play decreases after the period in which the display mode is changed ends, and the player becomes bored with the game. The gaming machine F'1 was developed to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine F'1, the presentation mode is displayed on the display means. The predetermined period determining means determines whether the predetermined period is set by the predetermined period setting means. When it is determined that it is the predetermined period, the switching display means switches the presentation mode displayed on the display means to a specific presentation mode and displays it. When it is determined that a predetermined condition is satisfied when a predetermined period elapses, an extension period setting means extends a period for displaying a specific performance mode and displays it. As a result, the period during which the specific presentation mode is displayed changes depending on the establishment of the predetermined condition, so that an unexpected presentation can be provided to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

In game machine F'1, clock means capable of clocking, acquisition means for acquiring time information from the clock means, and elapsed time determination for determining elapsed time based on the time information acquired from the acquisition means and means for setting the predetermined period of time based on the time information acquired from the clocking means, and the predetermined period determining means for determining the time information acquired from the clocking means. The gaming machine F'2 is characterized in that it determines whether it is the predetermined period based on.

According to the gaming machine F'2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F'1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the acquisition means acquires the time information from the clock means, and the elapsed time determination means determines the elapsed time based on the time information. A predetermined period is set by the predetermined period setting means based on the time information acquired from the clock means, and it is determined by the predetermined period determination means whether it is the predetermined period based on the time information acquired from the clock means. As a result, since a specific performance mode is displayed based on the time information, a performance mode with a sense of unity can be displayed on a plurality of pachinko machines. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

In the gaming machine F'2, information acquisition means for acquiring information based on establishment of an acquisition condition; storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means; determining means for performing determination on information; and pre-determining means for performing determination based on the information acquired by the information acquiring means before the determination condition is satisfied, wherein the predetermined condition is , a gaming machine F'3 characterized in that the game machine F'3 is configured to be easily established when the information determined as a specific determination result by the prior determination means is stored.

According to the gaming machine F'3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F'2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the information acquired by the information acquisition means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition is stored in the storage means, and the judgment means executes judgment on the information based on the establishment of the judgment condition. The determination is made based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means before the determination condition is established by the advance determination means. The predetermined condition is likely to be established when information determined as a specific determination result by the prior determination means is stored. As a result, a specific determination result can be expected by extending the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be played in anticipation of an extension of the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed.

The game machine F'2 or F'3 has information input means for inputting specific information, and the predetermined period setting means receives the specific information input by the information input means and A period during which the specific effect mode is performed is set to at least a first predetermined period that is the predetermined period and a second predetermined period that is different from the predetermined period based on the acquired time information. A game machine F'4.

According to the gaming machine F'4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F'2 or F'3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, specific information is input by the information input means. The predetermined period setting means sets a period during which the specific presentation mode is performed based on the specific information input by the information input means and the time information acquired from the clock means. Thereby, it is possible to set a period during which a specific presentation mode is performed based on two types of information, ie, the information that can be input and the time information. Therefore, by combining the two pieces of information, it is possible to set a plurality of patterns of periods during which a specific presentation mode is performed, so that there is an effect that an unexpected presentation can be provided. In addition, there is an effect that the period during which a specific presentation mode is performed can be changed by changing the time information without changing the information that can be input.

In the game machine F'4, the predetermined period setting means sets a period longer than the first predetermined period as the second predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine F'5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F'4, the second predetermined period set by the predetermined period setting means is set as a longer period than the first predetermined period, so that the specific When the performance mode continues longer than the first predetermined period, the player is made to imagine whether it is an extended period based on the establishment of a predetermined condition or a period set as a second predetermined period. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

Any one of game machines F'3 to F'5 has dynamic display period determination means for determining a period for dynamically displaying the identification information, and the period determined by the dynamic display period determination means has elapsed. A game machine F'6 characterized in that it has temporary stop display means for temporarily stopping and displaying the identification information when the elapsed time has elapsed before the game machine F'6.

According to the gaming machine F'6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F'3 to F'5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the period for dynamically displaying the identification information is determined by the dynamic display period determining means. If the elapsed time elapses before the period determined by the dynamic display period determining means elapses, the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed. As a result, the dynamic display can be temporarily stopped in time with the end timing of the period in which the specific effect mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily determine the end timing.

In the gaming machine F'6, when the game is temporarily stopped and displayed by the temporary stop display means and the extension period is set by the extension period setting means, after the predetermined period elapses, a specific effect is displayed. A game machine F'7 is characterized by having a specific effect display means for displaying a display mode on the display means.

According to the gaming machine F'7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F'6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the display is temporarily stopped by the temporary stop display means and the extension period is set by the extension period setting means, the specific effect display mode is displayed by the specific effect display means after the predetermined period has passed. to display. As a result, the player to whom the extension period is set is displayed in the specific effect display mode from the state of the temporary stop display, so that the surrounding players can be displayed in the same temporary stop display as the surrounding players. Since a different specific effect display mode is displayed, the user can feel a sense of superiority. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the game machine F'7, the game machine is characterized by comprising suggestive effect display means for causing the display means to display a suggestive effect suggesting that the extension period is set during the predetermined period. F'8.

According to the gaming machine F'8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F'7, the suggestive effect indicating that the extension period is set by the suggestive effect display means is displayed on the display means during the predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game, and to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In any one of the game machines F'2 to F'8, the clocking means is configured to be capable of clocking even when power is not supplied to the game machine. Machine F'9.

According to the gaming machine F'9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F'2 to F'8, the timing means can keep time even when power is not supplied to the gaming machine. Therefore, it is possible to constantly count the time regardless of whether the power of the game machine is turned on, and it is possible to accurately execute a specific presentation mode based on the time information.

The gaming machine F'10 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines F'2 to F'9, the clocking means has correction means capable of correcting the current time.

According to the game machine F'10, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F'2 to F'9, the clocking means can correct the current time by the correction means. There is an effect that it is possible to accurately execute a specific performance mode by pressing the button.

In any one of game machines F'4 to F'10, game machine F'11 is characterized in that the information input means is set with an input-enabled period during which information can be input.

According to the gaming machine F'11, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F'4 to F'10, a period during which information can be input is set by the information input means. By setting it outside the possible period, there is no change in the period during which the specific presentation mode is displayed during business hours, and there is an effect that the specific presentation mode can be executed at desired timing.

In the gaming machine F'11, the acquisition means acquires day of the week information as the time information, and the predetermined period setting means changes the period for displaying the specific effect mode according to the difference in the day of the week information. A gaming machine F'12 characterized by being set as follows.

According to the game machine F'12, in addition to the effects of the game machine F'11, the day of the week information is acquired by the acquisition means, and when the acquired day of the week information is different, a specific presentation mode is displayed by the predetermined period setting means. Since the period during which the effect is performed is set to be different, there is an effect that the period during which the specific presentation mode is performed can be changed by changing the day of the week information without changing the information that can be input.

In any one of the gaming machines F'4 to F'12, the predetermined period setting means is capable of setting a plurality of periods for displaying the specific effect mode in chronological order. Machine F'13.

According to the game machine F'13, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines F'4 to F'12, a plurality of periods for displaying a specific presentation mode can be set in chronological order by the predetermined period setting means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to simplify the work of setting a period for performing a specific presentation mode.

In the gaming machine F'13, the acquiring means acquires time information as the time information, and the predetermined period setting means can set a period for displaying the specific effect mode from a plurality of different periods. Even if the period for displaying the specific effect mode is changed by the predetermined period setting means, the timing for executing the display of the specific effect mode is unified based on the time information. A gaming machine F'14 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine F'14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F'13, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the obtaining means obtains the time information. A predetermined period setting means can set a period for displaying a specific performance mode from a plurality of different periods, and even if different periods are set, the timing for executing the display of the specific performance mode is unified based on time information. do. As a result, even if the period of displaying the specific effect mode is different, the timing of executing the display of the specific effect mode can be unified, so that the player can execute the display of the specific effect mode. It is not possible to grasp the length of the period during which a specific effect mode is displayed depending on the timing. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game while being interested in whether or not the period during which the specific presentation mode is displayed passes the predetermined period. effective.

In game machines F'1 to F'14, display timing for setting the timing for executing the display of the effect mode displayed on the display means at predetermined intervals within the predetermined period set by the predetermined period setting means. setting means, effect mode executing means for executing the effect mode based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and execution of the effect mode by the effect mode executing means on standby until the timing set by the display timing setting means. A game machine F'15, characterized by comprising waiting means for an effect mode to cause the player to play the game.

According to the gaming machine F'15, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F'1 to F'14, the following effects are exhibited. That is, within a predetermined period set by the predetermined period setting means, the display timing setting means sets the timing for executing the display of the effect mode to be displayed on the display means at predetermined intervals. The execution of the selection mode performed by the performance mode executing means on the basis of the establishment of a predetermined condition is made to wait until the timing set by the performance mode waiting means. As a result, the effect mode executed within the predetermined period is also executed at a predetermined timing. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect with a sense of unity among a plurality of game machines, and it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In game machines F'2 to F'14, a display execution time for setting a time for executing the display of the effect mode displayed on the display means at predetermined time intervals based on the time information acquired by the acquisition means. A setting means, a performance mode execution means for executing a performance mode based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and a performance mode for waiting the execution of the performance mode by the performance mode execution means until the time set by the display execution time setting means. A gaming machine F'16 characterized by comprising waiting means.

According to the gaming machine F'16, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F'2 to F'14, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display execution time setting means sets the time for executing the display of the effect mode displayed on the display means at predetermined time intervals based on the time information acquired by the acquisition means. The execution of the selection mode performed by the performance mode executing means on the basis of the establishment of a predetermined condition is made to wait until the time set by the performance mode waiting means. As a result, an effect mode that is executed within a predetermined period is also executed at a predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect with a sense of unity among a plurality of game machines, and it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Any one of the game machines F'1 to F'16 has operation means capable of performing a predetermined input operation, and the predetermined period setting means sets the predetermined period based on the predetermined input operation by the operation means. A gaming machine F'17 characterized in that it is set.

According to the game machine F'17, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F'1 to F'16, the predetermined period set by the predetermined period setting means is set based on a predetermined operation by the operation means. There is an effect that the predetermined period can be easily set to a desired period.

In any one of game machines F'1 to F'17, effect information output means for outputting effect information including at least specified effect mode information based on said specific effect mode displayed on said display means, and effect information output thereof effect information input means capable of inputting information corresponding to the effect information output by means; specific effect mode setting means for setting the specific effect mode based on the information input by the effect information input means; A gaming machine F'18 characterized by having:

According to the gaming machine F'18, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F'1 to F'18, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effect information output means outputs the effect information including at least the specific effect mode information based on the specific effect mode displayed on the display means. Information corresponding to the performance information is input by the performance information input means. A specific effect mode setting means sets a specific effect mode based on the information input by the effect information input means. As a result, it is possible to set a specific presentation mode to be displayed on other pachinko machines, so that the presentation modes can be freely synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the gaming machine.

It should be noted that the performance information output by the gaming machine F'18 may include information on the time during which a specific performance is displayed. By doing so, there is an effect that the time when the specific effect mode is displayed can be synchronized regardless of the timing at which the specific effect mode is set by the specific effect mode setting means.

In the game machine F'18, the performance information output means displays the performance information on the display means in a manner that can be acquired by an external device.

According to the gaming machine F'19, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F'18, the performance information output means outputs performance information in a form (eg, two-dimensional information code) that can be acquired by an external device (eg, a mobile terminal). Since it is displayed, there is an effect that it is possible to facilitate the work of setting the specific effect mode by the specific effect mode setting means.

<Characteristic Group G> A first display means having a display area configured by arranging a plurality of first pixels each having a first display size, and a first display means having a pattern size displayed by a fish-eye liquid crystal. second display means having a display area arranged adjacent to the display area and configured by arranging a plurality of second pixels each having a second display size smaller than the first display size; and display control means capable of moving and displaying the same pattern data from the display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means. Machine G1.

Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a novel presentation mode by arranging a plurality of display devices and providing different display modes to the player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-270417). However, in this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that the load on the display control increases and the control load increases. The game machine G1 is designed to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a game machine capable of reducing the control load.

According to the game machine G1, the first display means is configured by the display area configured by arranging a plurality of first pixels each having the first display size. The second display means is configured by a display area which is arranged adjacent to the display area of the first display means and configured by arranging a plurality of second pixels each having a second display size smaller than the first display size. ing. The same pattern data is moved and displayed by the display control means from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means. Thus, by displaying the same display data on different display means, patterns can be displayed in different display sizes. Therefore, even when it is desired to change the display size of the pattern and display it, the load of the control processing for changing the magnification of the display data can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

A game machine G2 characterized in that, in the game machine G1, the first display size and the second display size are each configured with a predetermined enlargement ratio.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, since the first display size and the second display size are each configured with a predetermined enlargement ratio, the size of the displayed pattern is enlarged to a predetermined size. There is an effect that it can be displayed differently at a rate.

In the game machine G1 or G2, the pattern data displayed in common on the first display means and the second display means is image information displayed by scrolling.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, since the pattern data displayed in common on the first display means and the second display means is image information to be scrolled, The symbols can be scroll-displayed across the first display means and the second display means, and there is an effect that a fresh performance can be provided to the player.

In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a storage means storing the pattern data to be displayed by the display control means, and acquiring the pattern data from the storage means, and transferring the acquired pattern data to the display control means. and a display data setting means for setting an enlargement ratio to be displayed on the display, wherein the display control means moves from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means. The game machine G4 is characterized in that, when the pattern data is displayed by moving the pattern data having the same enlargement ratio set by the display data setting means, the pattern data is moved and displayed.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the pattern data to be displayed by the display control means is stored by the storage means. Design data is acquired from the storage means, and an enlargement ratio for displaying the acquired design data on the display control means is set by the display data setting means. The display control means, when moving from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means for display, displays the pattern data with the same enlargement ratio set by the display data setting means. It is moved and displayed by the control means. As a result, the display size of the pattern can be displayed differently between the first display means and the second display means without changing the enlargement ratio. Therefore, there is an effect that the load due to the process of changing the display size of the pattern and displaying it can be reduced.

The game machine G5 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines G1 to G4, the first display means has a display area larger than that of the second display means.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines G1 to G4, the first display means has a display area larger than that of the second display means, so that a different impression is displayed to the player. There is an effect that production can be performed.

Any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5 has lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions, and the display control means dynamically displays identification information indicating the result of the lottery by the lottery means in the pattern. A game machine G6 characterized by displaying.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. The display control means dynamically displays the identification information indicating the result of the lottery by the lottery means in the form of a pattern. As a result, the result of the lottery can be determined by the symbols, and there is an effect that the player can be interested in the dynamic display of the symbols.

In the gaming machine G6, the pattern indicating the identification information is displayed on the first display means at the enlargement rate after scrolling and displaying the data set at the predetermined enlargement rate on the second display means. a game machine G7 characterized in that the data set at a predetermined enlargement rate by the first display means is scrolled and displayed after the information is moved and displayed.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effects of the game machine G6, the pattern indicating the identification information is displayed in the first display after scrolling the data set at a predetermined magnification by the second display means and displaying it in an enlarged manner. After the information set at the enlargement rate is moved and displayed on the means, the pattern indicating the identification information is scroll-displayed by the display control means with the data set at the predetermined enlargement rate on the first display means. In the case of moving from the display means to the first display means and displaying the image by changing the enlargement ratio, there is an effect that the processing for changing the enlargement ratio can be reduced and processed.

<Characteristics G'group> Design size 2 displayed with fish-eye liquid crystal
a first display means having a display area configured by arranging a plurality of first pixels each having a first display size; a second display means having a display area configured by arranging a plurality of second pixels each having a second display size smaller than the display size; and from the first display means to the second display means or the second display means and display control means for moving the same pattern data from the first display means to the first display means for display.

Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a novel presentation mode by arranging a plurality of display devices and providing different display modes to the player (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-270417). However, in this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that the load on the display control increases and the control load increases. The gaming machine G'1 was created to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the control burden.

According to the gaming machine G'1, the first display means is configured by the display area configured by arranging a plurality of first pixels each having the first display size. The second display means is configured by a display area which is arranged adjacent to the display area of the first display means and configured by arranging a plurality of second pixels each having a second display size smaller than the first display size. ing. The same pattern data is moved and displayed by the display control means from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means. Thus, by displaying the same display data on different display means, patterns can be displayed in different display sizes. Therefore, even when it is desired to change the display size of the pattern and display it, the load of the control processing for changing the magnification of the display data can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

A game machine G'2 characterized in that, in the game machine G'1, the first display size and the second display size are each configured with a predetermined enlargement ratio.

According to the gaming machine G'2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G'1, since the first display size and the second display size are each configured with a predetermined enlargement ratio, the size of the symbols to be displayed is increased. can be displayed differently at a given magnification.

In the game machine G'1 or G'2, the pattern data displayed in common on the first display means and the second display means is image information displayed by scrolling. '3.

According to the gaming machine G'3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G'1 or G'2, the pattern data displayed in common on the first display means and the second display means are scroll-displayed images. Since the symbols are information, the symbols can be scroll-displayed across the first display means and the second display means, and there is an effect that a fresh performance can be provided to the player.

In any one of the game machines G'1 to G'3, a storage means storing the pattern data to be displayed by the display control means, acquiring the pattern data from the storage means, and storing the acquired pattern data. and display data setting means for setting an enlargement ratio to be displayed on the display control means, wherein the display control means changes the display data from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display. The game machine G'4 is characterized in that when the symbol data is moved to the means and displayed, the pattern data having the same magnification set by the display data setting means is moved and displayed.

According to the gaming machine G'4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines G'1 to G'3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the pattern data to be displayed by the display control means is stored by the storage means. Design data is acquired from the storage means, and an enlargement ratio for displaying the acquired design data on the display control means is set by the display data setting means. The display control means, when moving from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means for display, displays the pattern data with the same enlargement ratio set by the display data setting means. It is moved and displayed by the control means. As a result, the display size of the pattern can be displayed differently between the first display means and the second display means without changing the enlargement ratio. Therefore, there is an effect that the load due to the process of changing the display size of the pattern and displaying it can be reduced.

A game machine G'5 characterized in that in any one of the game machines G'1 to G'4, the first display means has a larger display area than the second display means.

According to the gaming machine G'5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines G'1 to G'4, the first display means has a display area larger than that of the second display means. There is an effect that it is possible to perform a display effect that gives a different impression to the person.

Any one of the gaming machines G'1 to G'5 has a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and the display control means transmits identification information indicating the result of the lottery by the lottery means. A gaming machine G'6 characterized in that it dynamically displays symbols.

According to the gaming machine G'6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines G'1 to G'5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition. The display control means dynamically displays the identification information indicating the result of the lottery by the lottery means in the form of a pattern. As a result, the result of the lottery can be determined by the symbols, and there is an effect that the player can be interested in the dynamic display of the symbols.

In the gaming machine G'6, the pattern indicating the identification information is displayed on the first display means at the enlargement rate after scrolling and displaying the data set at the predetermined enlargement rate on the second display means. A game machine G'7 characterized in that, after moving and displaying set information, the first display means scroll-displays data set at a predetermined magnification.

According to the gaming machine G'7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G'6, the pattern indicating the identification information is displayed after scrolling the data set at a predetermined magnification rate on the second display means and displaying the enlarged data. After moving and displaying the information set at the enlargement rate on the first display means, the pattern indicating the identification information is scrolled and displayed by the data set at the predetermined enlargement rate on the first display means. Therefore, in the case of moving from the second display means to the first display means for display and changing the enlargement ratio for display, there is an effect that the processing for changing the enlargement ratio can be reduced and processed.

<Characteristic group H> Preliminary pseudo-variation on the sub-screen A first display means having a specific first display area, a second display means having a second display area Based on establishment, acquisition means capable of acquiring information, display control means for displaying an effect based on the information on the first display means or the second display means, and determining whether a predetermined condition has been established. and a condition determination means, wherein the display control means performs an effect based on the information in the first display area or the second display area when the condition determination means determines that a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine H1 characterized in that it is displayed by moving from one display area of two display areas to the other display area.

Here, in a conventional game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one in which a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is provided, and various effect images are displayed on the display device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-13528). . However, although the gaming machine described above is capable of displaying various effect images, the effect image is displayed only in one place. However, there is a problem that the player becomes bored with the game. The gaming machine H1 was created to solve the above-described problems, and is a gaming machine that can alleviate the player's boredom by providing an unexpected game using an effect image. intended to provide

According to the game machine H1, the display control means displays an effect based on the information acquired by the acquisition means on the first display means having the first display area or the second display means having the second display area. be done. Then, when it is determined by the condition determination means that a predetermined condition is established, the effect displayed in either the first display area or the second display area is moved to the other display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness, thereby reducing the player's boredom.

In the gaming machine H1, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; determination means for executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means when a determination condition is satisfied; Dynamic display control means for causing the first display means to perform dynamic display for a predetermined time as the effect based on the result of determination by the determination means; Pre-determination means for executing a pre-determination based on the stored information; Pre-dynamic display for causing the second display means to perform a pre-dynamic display as the effect based on the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means. A gaming machine H2 characterized by comprising: a control means;

Here, in a conventional game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed in accordance with the winning of a game ball into a prize winning opening, a variable display is performed according to the result of the lottery, and the right of the lottery is reserved and stored. There is a gaming machine that performs an effect (so-called look-ahead effect) that changes the display mode during variable display based on the content of the lottery in the reserved memory (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-16499). However, in the above-described gaming machine, one display means executes the variable display according to the lottery result and the above-described prefetch effect display. However, since the performance mainly based on the specific reserved memory is forcibly performed, there is a problem that the player loses interest in the variable display for other reserved memories. The gaming machine H1 was created to solve the above-described problems, and is intended to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the player's interest from declining while performing an effect based on the reserved memory. aim.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the determination condition is established, the determination means executes determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and causes the first display means to perform dynamic display as an effect based on the determination result. Prior determination is performed by the prior determination means based on the information stored in the storage means before the determination by the determination means is executed, and a performance based on the result of the prior determination is dynamically displayed in advance on the second display means. to do Thus, by displaying the dynamic display on the first display means and the pre-dynamic display on the second display means, each motion can be performed while expecting the lottery contents retained and stored by the pre-dynamic display. You can watch the result of the target display. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the dynamic display from being lowered.

In the gaming machine H2, the storage means can store a plurality of the information up to a predetermined number, and information selection means for selecting arbitrary information from the plurality of information stored in the storage means. The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the preliminary dynamic display control means performs preliminary dynamic display corresponding to the information selected by the information selection means.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2, the following effects are produced. That is, the storage means stores a plurality of information up to a predetermined number, and the information selection means selects arbitrary information from the plurality of stored information. The pre-dynamic display control means causes the information selected by the information selection means to be pre-dynamically displayed. This will result in a pre-dynamic display based on the information desired by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the boredom of the player can be alleviated.

In the gaming machine H3, the second display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of preliminary dynamic displays corresponding to a plurality of information stored in the storage means, and the information selection means comprises the A gaming machine H4 characterized in that an arbitrary preliminary dynamic display is selected from a plurality of preliminary dynamic displays displayed on the second display means.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3, a plurality of advance dynamic displays corresponding to a plurality of information stored in the storage means are displayed on the second display means, and the displayed plurality of dynamic displays are displayed on the second display means. Since the information selection means selects any pre-dynamic display from the pre-dynamic displays, there is an effect that the player can easily select the desired pre-dynamic display.

The gaming machine H3 or H4 has reserved symbol display control means for displaying a reserved symbol corresponding to at least the information stored in the storage means before execution of determination by the determination means. The information selection means selects an arbitrary reserved pattern from a plurality of reserved patterns displayed by the reserved pattern display control means, and the preliminary dynamic display control means selects by the information selection means. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that it performs preliminary dynamic display corresponding to the reserved symbols that have been drawn.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the pending symbol display control means displays the pending symbol corresponding to at least the information before the execution of determination by the determination means among the information stored in the storage means. An arbitrary reserved pattern is selected from the displayed plurality of reserved patterns by the information selection means, and preliminary dynamic display corresponding to the selected reserved pattern is performed by the preliminary dynamic display control means. This allows any pre-dynamic display to be selected while viewing the pending symbols being displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily select the desired pre-dynamic display.

The game machine H6 is characterized in that, in the game machine H5, it has identification means for identifiably displaying the reserved symbol selected by the reserved symbol selection means.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H5, the reserved symbols selected by the reserved symbol selection means are identifiably displayed by the identifying means. There is an effect that it is possible to easily grasp which pattern is which.

The game machine H5 or H6 is characterized by having a reserved symbol display mode changing means for changing the display mode of the reserved symbol to a predetermined display mode suggesting the display contents of the pre-dynamic display corresponding to the reserved symbol. Game machine H7 to play.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H5 or H6, the display mode of the reserved symbol is displayed by the reserved symbol display mode varying means to provide a predetermined display suggesting the display contents of the pre-dynamic display corresponding to the reserved symbol. Since the mode is variable, there is an effect that the player can easily select the desired pre-dynamic display.

Any one of game machines H1 to H7 has information specifying means for specifying the information used for determination by the determination means and the information used for determination by the prior determination means, The dynamic display control means controls the preliminary dynamic display to be displayed based on the one piece of information specified by the information specifying means until a determination condition is established by the determination means based on the one piece of information. A gaming machine H8 characterized by stopping the advance variation display when a case occurs.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effects of the game machines H1 to H7, the following effects are produced. That is, the information specifying means specifies the information used for the determination by the determination means and the information used for the determination by the prior determination means. The preliminary dynamic display displayed based on the one piece of information specified by the information specifying means is stopped when the judgment condition for making a judgment by the judging means based on the one piece of information is satisfied by the preliminary dynamic display control means. Let Thereby, the prior dynamic display based on the one information can be stopped at the timing when the dynamic display based on the one information is started. Therefore, the pre-dynamic display arbitrarily selected by the player can be displayed so as to be switched to the dynamic display without discomfort. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the dynamic display or the pre-dynamic display from decreasing.

A game machine H9 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines H1 to H8, a switching means for switching display contents displayed on the first display means and display contents displayed on the second display means is provided. .

According to the game machine H9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H8, the switching means switches the display contents displayed on the first display means and the display contents displayed on the second display means. , the player can display the desired display contents on the desired display means, and the problem of the player getting bored with the game early can be reduced.

In the game machine H9, when the preliminary dynamic display corresponding to the one information selected by the information selection means is displayed on the first display means by the switching means, the switching means A game machine H10 characterized in that, when the dynamic display corresponding to the information of (1) is started, the dynamic display is switched to be displayed by the first display means.

According to the game machine H10, in addition to the effects of the game machine H9, the following effects are produced. That is, when the switching means displays the preliminary dynamic display corresponding to the one information on the first display means, the switching means causes the dynamic display corresponding to the one information to be displayed on the first display means. switch to display. As a result, when the preliminary dynamic display corresponding to the information arbitrarily selected by the player is displayed on the first display means, the dynamic display corresponding to the information is continuously displayed on the first display means. Therefore, it is possible to perform display so that preliminary dynamic display is switched to dynamic display without discomfort. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the dynamic display or the pre-dynamic display from decreasing.

In any one of the game machines H8 to H10, the preliminary dynamic display includes at least a judgment result mode display based on the judgment result of the preliminary judgment means, and corresponds to one piece of information specified by the information specifying means. The game machine H11 is characterized in that the determination result mode display displayed in the previous dynamic display is also continuously displayed in the dynamic display corresponding to the one information.

According to the gaming machine H11, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H8 to H10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the preliminary dynamic display, at least the determination result mode display based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means is displayed, and the determination result mode displayed in the prior dynamic display corresponding to the one information specified by the information specifying means. The display is also continuously displayed in a dynamic display corresponding to one piece of information. As a result, the determination result mode display is displayed across the pre-dynamic display and the dynamic display, so that the pre-dynamic display and the dynamic display can be continued without discomfort. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the dynamic display or the pre-dynamic display from decreasing.

<Feature Group I> Synchronous effect A display means capable of displaying the effect mode, an information input means capable of inputting predetermined information, and a specific effect mode based on the predetermined information input by the information input means. A performance period setting means for setting a displayable period on the display means, and a specific performance for executing the specific performance mode based on establishment of a predetermined condition within the period set by the performance period setting means. and mode executing means.

Here, there is a conventional game machine such as a pachinko machine that executes a synchronous effect all at once at predetermined time intervals (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2007-252534). However, since the gaming machine described above performs control to execute the synchronous effect according to time, there is a problem that the timing of performing the synchronous effect becomes monotonous and the player gets tired of it. The gaming machine I1 was created to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can alleviate the player's boredom.

According to the game machine I1, the presentation mode is displayed on the display means. Based on the predetermined information input by the information inputting means, the effect period setting means sets a period during which the specific effect mode can be displayed on the display means. A specific performance is executed by a specific performance mode execution means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition within the period. As a result, it is possible to set a period during which a specific effect mode can be displayed based on the input predetermined information. Therefore, it is possible to change the setting of the period during which a specific effect mode can be displayed, and it is possible to alleviate the boredom of the player. In addition, by inputting the same information as predetermined information to the game machines installed side by side, the dynamic display can be experienced at a desired timing, and there is an effect that the boredom of the player can be alleviated. .

The gaming machine I1 has clocking means capable of clocking and time information obtaining means for obtaining time information from the clocking means, and the presentation period setting means is obtained by the time information obtaining means. A game machine I2 characterized in that a period during which a specific performance mode can be displayed on said display means is set based on time information and information input to said information input means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the time information obtained by the time measuring means is obtained by the time information obtaining means, and based on the time information and the information input to the information input means, a period in which a specific effect can be displayed on the display means is set. . Thus, it is possible to set a period during which a specific effect mode can be displayed based on two pieces of information, ie, the time information and the information input by the information input means. Therefore, by combining information, it becomes possible to set various periods, and it is possible to alleviate the boredom of the player.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, specific effect mode execution timing setting means for setting the timing for executing the specific effect mode within the period set by the effect period setting means; and specific effect mode execution waiting means for waiting the execution of the specific effect mode until the timing for executing the specific effect mode set by the execution timing setting means. Gaming machine I3.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1 or the game machine I2, the following effects are produced. That is, within the period set by the effect period setting means, the specific effect mode execution timing setting means sets the timing for executing the specific effect mode. During a period from the establishment of a prescribed condition to the timing of executing the specific performance mode set by the execution timing setting means, the specific performance mode execution waiting means makes the particular performance mode stand by. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to unify the execution timings of specific presentation modes.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I3, an effect mode storage means for storing a plurality of effect modes, and a specification for setting the specific effect mode from among the plurality of effect modes stored in the effect mode storage means. A gaming machine I4 characterized by comprising a performance mode setting means.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effects are exhibited. A plurality of performance modes are stored in the performance mode storage means, and a specific performance mode is set by the specific performance mode setting means from among the performance modes. As a result, since a specific performance mode that can be displayed within a period set by the performance period setting means is set from a plurality of performance modes, there is no need to prepare data for the specific performance mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the amount of data can be reduced.

In the game machine I4, the specific effect mode setting means sets the specific effect mode based on the time information acquired from the timer means.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effects of the game machine I4, the specific effect mode setting means sets the specific effect mode based on the time information acquired from the clock means, so that the specific effect mode can be easily changed. It has the effect of being able to

The game machine I4 has operation means that can be operated by a player, and operation determination means that determines that the operation means has been operated in a predetermined manner, and the specific effect mode setting means is the operation determination means. A game machine I6, characterized in that the specific performance mode is set based on a predetermined operation determined by means.

According to the game machine I6, in addition to the effects of the game machine I4, a predetermined operation is performed by the operation means operable by the player, and a specific performance mode is set based on the predetermined operation determined by the operation determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect mode desired by the player can be set to a specific effect mode.

In any one of the game machines I4 to I6, a specific effect for restricting the effect mode set as the specific effect mode by the specific effect mode setting means so as not to be executed during a period other than the period set by the effect period setting means. A gaming machine I7 characterized by having a mode execution restricting means.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines I4 to I6, the specific presentation mode execution limiting means sets the presentation mode set as the specific presentation mode by the specific presentation mode setting means to the presentation period setting means. Since it is restricted so as not to be executed during a period other than the period set by , there is an effect that a special feeling of performance can be provided while eliminating the need to prepare data for a specific performance mode.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I7, effect information output means for outputting effect information including at least specific effect mode information based on the specific effect mode displayed on the display means, and output by the effect information output means. a performance information input means capable of inputting information corresponding to the performance information; and a specific performance mode setting means for setting the specific performance mode based on the information input by the performance information input means. Characterized game machine I8.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effect information output means outputs the effect information including at least the specific effect mode information based on the specific effect mode displayed on the display means. Information corresponding to the performance information is input by the performance information input means. A specific effect mode setting means sets a specific effect mode based on the information input by the effect information input means. As a result, it is possible to set a specific presentation mode to be displayed on other pachinko machines, so that the presentation modes can be freely synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the gaming machine.

It should be noted that the performance information output by the gaming machine I8 may include information on the time during which a specific performance is displayed. By doing so, there is an effect that the time when the specific effect mode is displayed can be synchronized regardless of the timing at which the specific effect mode is set by the specific effect mode setting means.

A gaming machine I9 in the gaming machine I8, wherein the performance information output means displays the performance information on the display means in a manner that can be acquired by an external device.

According to the game machine I9, in addition to the effects of the game machine I8, the effect information output means displays the effect information in a form (for example, a two-dimensional information code) that can be acquired by an external device (for example, a mobile terminal). There is an effect that it is possible to facilitate the work of setting a specific presentation mode by the specific presentation mode setting means.

Game machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C12, D1 to D7, D'1 to D'10, E1 to E7, E'1 to E'8, F1 to F4, F'1 to F'19, In any one of G1 to G7, G'1 to G'7, H1 to H11, and I1 to I9, the game machine K1 is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Game machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C12, D1 to D7, D'1 to D'10, E1 to E7, E'1 to E'8, F1 to F4, F'1 to F'19, In any one of G1 to G7, G'1 to G'7, H1 to H11, and I1 to I9, the gaming machine K2 is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

Game machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C12, D1 to D7, D'1 to D'10, E1 to E7, E'1 to E'8, F1 to F4, F'1 to F'19, In any one of G1 to G7, G'1 to G'7, H1 to H11, and I1 to I9, the gaming machine K3 is characterized by combining a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. . Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, effects such as a variable display of a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols are executed to give the player a sense of anticipation, effects to increase the player's desire to participate in the game, etc. Various patterns of effects are executed to improve the interest of the game.
In such a pachinko machine, for example, a pattern row is scrolled and displayed for a predetermined period, and then stopped, so that the player expects that a specific symbol in the pattern row will be stopped and displayed. is proposed (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2010-075741).
This type of pachinko machine has a problem that the player has a monotonous impression of the game, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a player from quickly becoming bored with the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 comprises a determination means for executing a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition; display means for displaying a symbol row provided with sub-symbols different from the symbols; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the symbol row on the display means; and moving the symbol row by the dynamic display means. a dynamic display period determining means for determining a period for displaying a target; and a first privilege granting means for imparting a first privilege advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means. and a sub-symbol variable means for varying the display mode of the sub-symbol during the dynamic display period when a predetermined condition is satisfied; and specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect in the remaining period of the dynamic display period when the sub-symbol is displayed in a variable manner in a specific display mode.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the specific effect is changed to the specific display mode by the secondary symbol changing means, and then the specific display mode is changed. It is an effect that displays a composite display mode in which a plurality of sub-symbols are combined.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, wherein an operation means that can be operated by the player and a predetermined condition for determining whether the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the operation of the operation means. and discriminating means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 3, wherein the sub-symbol changing means is adapted to operate the operating means when the sub-symbol is displayed in the specific display mode. Based on this, the sub-symbol displayed in the specific display mode is changed to the combined display mode and displayed.
A gaming machine according to Technical Idea 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Technical Ideas 1 to 4, wherein the display means displays a plurality of the symbol rows as identification information indicating the result of determination by the determination means. symbol row stopping means for stopping and displaying the plurality of symbol rows in a predetermined order based on the determination result of the determining means after dynamically displaying the plurality of symbol rows for a predetermined period; When the specific effect is being executed by the execution means, the number of sub-symbols to be stop-displayed is varied based on the result of determination by the determination means.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the judgment is executed by the judgment means based on the establishment of the judgment condition. As the identification information indicating the result of determination by the determination means, a symbol row provided with a plurality of different main symbols and sub-symbols different from the main symbols is displayed on the display means. The dynamic display means dynamically displays the symbol row on the display means. The dynamic display period determination means determines the period during which the symbol row is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. When identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, a first privilege giving advantage to the player is given by the first privilege giving means. When a predetermined condition is established, the display mode of the sub-symbol is varied during the dynamic display period by the sub-symbol variable means. When the sub-symbol is displayed in a specific display mode, a specific effect executing means executes a specific effect in the remaining period of the dynamic display period.
As a result, it is possible to provide a fresh effect using the sub-symbols. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, a composite display mode is displayed by synthesizing a plurality of sub-symbols in a specific display mode as a specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a fresh presentation, and reduce the problem of the player becoming bored with the game early.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, based on the operation of the operation means that can be operated by the player, the predetermined condition determination means determines the predetermined condition. Since the establishment is determined, the enjoyment of the player operating the operating means can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can participate in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, the sub-symbols are changed from the specific display mode to the composite display mode based on the operation of the operating means. Since the display is variable, the player must positively operate the operation means in order to execute a specific effect, and the player can be prompted to operate the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can participate in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in any one of technical ideas 1 to 4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display means displays a plurality of symbol strings as identification information indicating the result of determination by the determination means. After the plurality of symbol rows are dynamically displayed for a predetermined period, the symbol row stopping means stops and displays them in a predetermined order based on the judgment result of the judging means. When a specific effect is being executed by a specific effect executing means, the number of sub symbols to be stop-displayed is varied based on the result of determination by the determining means.
As a result, a specific effect using the sub-symbols can be made based on the result of determination by the determining means, and a fresh effect using the sub-symbols can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
22 frame button (operation means)
81 Third pattern display device (display means)
114 display control device (dynamic display means)
S3 14 determination means
S1004 jackpot control processing (privilege granting means)
S1819 Button effect execution processing ( a part of sub-symbol variable means )

Claims (1)

determination means for executing a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition;
display means for displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means;
dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means;
and privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result is stopped and displayed. In the gaming machine that
The identification information is composed of a plurality of symbol rows, and is configured to indicate that the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result by displaying a combination of specific symbols,
The symbol row is configured to be able to display a sub-symbol different from the symbol,
The dynamic display means is capable of displaying symbol rows other than one of the plurality of symbol rows in a ready-to-win display mode that can be combined to indicate the specific determination result,
The game machine is
When the symbols that are combinations other than the specific combination of symbols are statically displayed in the one symbol row, the secondary symbols that are statically displayed can be displayed by changing the display mode of the secondary symbols. a pattern variable means;
and an operation means operable by a player,
The varied sub-symbols are displayed in a manner that makes the symbols stopped and displayed in the first symbol row invisible,
Based on the operation of the operating means, the changed sub-symbols are hidden, and the symbols that are a combination of the specific symbols are displayed in the one symbol row. has been
When the determination result is the specific determination result, the display mode of the sub symbol is configured to be more easily changed than when the determination result is other than the specific determination result. Amusement machine.

Images